0% encontró este documento útil (0 votos)

1K vistas269 páginas

Manual de Operación Y Mantención Sistema Huinches Tensores Linea Critica CORREAS CV112 - CV113 - CV114

Cargado por

Yo Jimenez Pardo

Derechos de autor

Nos tomamos en serio los derechos de los contenidos. Si sospechas que se trata de tu contenido, reclámalo aquí.

Formatos disponibles

Descarga como PDF, TXT o lee en línea desde Scribd

0% encontró este documento útil (0 votos)

1K vistas269 páginas

Manual de Operación Y Mantención Sistema Huinches Tensores Linea Critica CORREAS CV112 - CV113 - CV114

Cargado por

Yo Jimenez Pardo

Derechos de autor

Nos tomamos en serio los derechos de los contenidos. Si sospechas que se trata de tu contenido, reclámalo aquí.

Formatos disponibles

Descarga como PDF, TXT o lee en línea desde Scribd

MANUAL DE OPERACIÓN Y MANTENCIÓN

SISTEMA HUINCHES TENSORES LINEA CRITICA

CORREAS CV112 – CV113 – CV114

Firma: Firma: Firma: Firma:

Preparado por: Preparado por: Revisado por: Aprobado por:

Alex Ceballos Somoza. Jaime Mellado Arriagada Alexis Araya Henríquez Alexis Araya Santander
Ing. Instrumentación y Control ING. JEFE DE PROYECTOS GERENTE OPERACIONES GERENTE GENERAL

Fecha: Revisión: Paginas:

08-07-2021 0 48
Nro. Documento PRAXA: Nro. Documento Codelco: Nro. OT:
93219-05-01 4600017842
MANUAL DE OPERACIÓN Y MANTENCIÓN SISTEMA Código
HUINCHES TENSORES LINEA CRITICA Versión 1.0

CORREAS CV112 – CV113 – CV114 Página 2 de 51

INDICE

1) Generalidades ..........................................................................................................................5
2) Advertencias Antes de Manipular los Equipos ..........................................................................6
a) Alimentación de electricidad .................................................................................................6
b) Montaje.................................................................................................................................6
c) Antes de poner en funcionamiento........................................................................................6
d) Mantenimiento y servicio ......................................................................................................6
e) Aceite hidráulico ...................................................................................................................6
f) Campana soporte .................................................................................................................7
g) Superficies calientes .............................................................................................................7
h) Situaciones de emergencia ...................................................................................................7
3) Componentes principales y principio de funcionamiento sistema Tensor ..................................8
3.1 Huinche Tensor: ..............................................................................................................10
3.1.1 Descripción motor hidráulico Hägglunds Viking MK 64.................................................... 11
3.1.2 Descripción Freno MDA 21 .............................................................................................12
3.2 Unidad Hidráulica ............................................................................................................ 13
4) Componentes sistema Huinche Tensor ..................................................................................15
4.1 Huinche Tensor: ..............................................................................................................15
4.2 Motor Hidráulico, Freno y Encoder .................................................................................. 15
4.3 Sistema Hidráulico: .........................................................................................................16
4.4 Motor Eléctrico: ............................................................................................................... 17
4.5 Sistema de Control: .........................................................................................................17
5) Sistema de Monitoreo y Control – Bosch Rexroth -hagglunds.................................................18
5.1 Descripción Señales de Interlock del Sistema hidráulico: ................................................19
5.2 Descripción del Sistema de Monitoreo y Control: ............................................................20
5.3 Sistema Control Hägglunds-Bosch Rexroth, aplicación Huinche Tensor ......................... 21
6) Datos técnicos ........................................................................................................................22
6.1 Elección del aceite hidráulico .......................................................................................... 22
6.2 Requerimientos de limpieza del aceite hidráulico ............................................................23
6.3 Recomendaciones para mantener un nivel de limpieza adecuado .................................. 23
6.4 Control de parámetros del sistema hidráulico .................................................................. 24
7) Manipulación........................................................................................................................... 25
7.1 Almacenaje de los componentes embalados .................................................................. 25

PRAXA INGENIERÍA SpA

Uno Norte #180 KM 10 Camino a Coronel Barrio Industrial Logistock Bodega 2 San Pedro De La Paz, Concepción
MANUAL DE OPERACIÓN Y MANTENCIÓN SISTEMA Código
HUINCHES TENSORES LINEA CRITICA Versión 1.0

CORREAS CV112 – CV113 – CV114 Página 3 de 51

8) Instalación............................................................................................................................... 26
8.1 Instrucciones de instalación Central Hidráulica ............................................................... 26
8.2 Posicionamiento recomendado de la central hidráulica ................................................... 26
8.3 Montaje de la unidad hidráulica ....................................................................................... 27
8.4 Montaje del enfriador de aceite ....................................................................................... 27
8.5 Conexiones hidráulicas ................................................................................................... 28
8.6 Conexiones eléctricas ..................................................................................................... 29
8.7 Enfriador de aceite .......................................................................................................... 29
8.8 Calefactor de aceite ........................................................................................................30
8.9 Motor Eléctrico de la Bomba Hidráulica ........................................................................... 30
8.10 Tuberías .......................................................................................................................... 30
8.11 Almacenaje de los componentes suministrados ..............................................................30
8.12 Manipulación de las piezas .............................................................................................30
8.13 Piezas soldadas .............................................................................................................. 31
9) Puesta en marcha ................................................................................................................... 32
9.1 Antes de la puesta en marcha ......................................................................................... 32
9.2 Procedimiento de arranque inicial ................................................................................... 33
9.3 Ajuste de Presión de Trabajo ..........................................................................................36
10) Mantenimiento Preventivo .................................................................................................. 37
10.1 Mantenimiento Diario ...................................................................................................... 37
10.2 Tabla de mantenimiento periódico................................................................................... 37
10.3 Controles diarios, primera semana después de la puesta en marcha.............................. 37
10.4 Controles frecuentes ....................................................................................................... 37
10.5 Mantenimiento programado............................................................................................. 38
11) Tabla para inspección principal y reemplazo ...................................................................... 39
12) Cambio del elemento de filtro de aceite .............................................................................. 39
13) Inspección del aceite hidráulico .......................................................................................... 40
14) Cambio del filtro respiradero ............................................................................................... 40
15) Limpieza del enfriador de aceite ......................................................................................... 41
15.1 Limpieza de las aspas del ventilador ............................................................................... 41
16) Mantenimiento Correctivo ................................................................................................... 41
16.1 Antes de desmontar ........................................................................................................ 41
16.2 Desmontaje ..................................................................................................................... 41
16.3 Montaje ........................................................................................................................... 42
17) Cambio de la unidad de motor eléctrico/bomba .................................................................. 42

PRAXA INGENIERÍA SpA

CORREAS CV112 – CV113 – CV114 Página 4 de 51

18) Localización de averías ......................................................................................................43

19) Diagrama Hidráulico y Lista de partes ................................................................................47
20) Arreglo General Unidad Hidraulica .....................................................................................48
21) Arreglo General Huinche Y lista de Partes ..........................................................................49
22) Planos eléctricos de Fuerza y Control.................................................................................50
23) Ficha técnica de Componentes........................................................................................... 51

PRAXA INGENIERÍA SpA

CORREAS CV112 – CV113 – CV114 Página 5 de 51

1) GENERALIDADES

Es de suma importancia seguir siempre las instrucciones de este manual e información

técnica respectiva, si no se siente seguro de algo, relacionado con este proyecto, por favor
consulte inmediatamente a Praxa Ingeniería SpA

Asegurarse de que tengan acceso al equipo solamente personas autorizadas, para realizar
operaciones en el sistema hidráulico, mecánico, eléctrico y de control.

El servicio y la reparación de las funciones eléctricas, hidráulicas y mecánicas, además de

los mandos y los ajustes, requiere personal calificado, entrenado, autorizado y consciente
de los riesgos involucrados en la manipulación de este tipo de componentes.

Se deberá disponer del equipo necesario para prevenir accidentes durante el montaje y el
mantenimiento, según las normas correspondientes y exigencias particulares de Codelco
Chile – División Radomiro Tomic.

PRAXA INGENIERÍA SpA

CORREAS CV112 – CV113 – CV114 Página 6 de 51

2) ADVERTENCIAS ANTES DE MANIPULAR LOS EQUIPOS

 Para identificar las características del equipo, referirse al código de pedido y a la

documentación técnica.
 Leer la documentación técnica y familiarizarse con el sistema hidráulico, eléctrico,
mecánico y de control del equipo.
 Usar equipo de seguridad tal como casco, protector ocular, calzado de seguridad y
protectores de oídos y todo lo requerido por Codelco Chile – división RT.
 Antes de realizar medida alguna, asegurarse siempre de que no haya energía
acumulada en las líneas de alta presión.
 Asegurarse de que esté desconectada toda la energía eléctrica.

a) Alimentación de electricidad
Se deberá disponer del equipo de seguridad necesario según la legislación vigente y
normativas propias de Codelco Chile – división RT.

Todos los niveles de alimentación eléctrica deberán estar dentro de los límites de
diseño del equipo.

b) Montaje
Seguir las instrucciones de montaje y tener en cuenta los pesos y fuerzas al efectuar
maniobras con cargas suspendidas. El montaje y ajuste incorrectos de las funciones
eléctricas, hidráulicas, mecánicas, eléctricas y de los controles, puede causar daños
personales y/o materiales.

c) Antes de poner en funcionamiento

Antes de poner en servicio los componentes, deben ser comprobados los controles y
dispositivos de seguridad.

d) Mantenimiento y servicio
Obsérvense los intervalos especiales de mantenimiento para el sistema hidráulico,
según los intervalos máximos de la tabla de mantenimiento de este manual. Mantener
un registro del mantenimiento efectuado, el mantenimiento y el servicio regulares y
correctos son condiciones necesarias para el funcionamiento confiable y seguro,
utilizando solamente piezas de repuesto originales.

e) Aceite hidráulico
Obsérvese que la mayoría de los aceites hidráulicos pueden causar daños personales
y grandes daños medioambientales. Recomendamos, consultar los letreros de

PRAXA INGENIERÍA SpA

CORREAS CV112 – CV113 – CV114 Página 7 de 51

advertencia en el recipiente del aceite y las especificaciones técnicas del proveedor.

Este sistema Oleohidráulico está diseñado para operar con aceite hidráulico mineral
ISO VG 68, a una temperatura entre 10°C y 63°C

f) Campana soporte
Obsérvese que dentro de la campana soporte ubicada entre el motor eléctrico y la
bomba principal de la unidad hidráulica, hay piezas que giran durante el trabajo, como
también los tambores del Huinche. Tener cuidado al efectuar el control por el agujero
de inspección de la unidad hidráulica, poner la tapa en la abertura de registro y evitar
estar dentro del rango de seguridad del huiche, cuando este esté en operación.

g) Superficies calientes
Algunas superficies pueden tener una temperatura local de más de 70°C (158°F).

h) Situaciones de emergencia
Parada de emergencia: Tiene que ser posible cortar la energía eléctrica en situaciones
de emergencia.
Extintor: Usar sólo extintores contra incendios adaptados para uso con productos de
aceites olehidráulicos y equipos eléctricos.

PRAXA INGENIERÍA SpA

CORREAS CV112 – CV113 – CV114 Página 8 de 51

3) COMPONENTES PRINCIPALES Y PRINCIPIO DE FUNCIONAMIENTO SISTEMA

TENSOR

Fabricante : Praxa ingeniería SpA.

Número Orden de Compra : 4600017842
Orden de Trabajo : 932-19
Función : Sistema Tensor Correas CV112-CV113-CV114
Línea Critica - Codelco División Radomiro Tomic

El suministro cuenta con una central de bombeo independiente, que incluye una bomba
hidráulica, un motor eléctrico que acciona la bomba, un estanque de aceite, un enfriador de
aceite por aire forzado a través de un radiador, válvulas para regulación y control, sensores
varios de los parámetros hidráulicos para monitorear y asegurar una operación confiable.

El Sistema Huinche Tensor, con accionamiento Oleohidráulico se compone de una bomba

hidráulica principal, marca Bosch Rexroth, la cual, se encuentra en el gabinete hidráulico y
al costado derecho del estanque hidráulico, y su diseño corresponde al tipo pistones axiales
con desplazamiento volumétrico variable y compensada en presión, que es accionada por
un motor eléctrico, diseño IEC, de alta eficiencia.

PRAXA INGENIERÍA SpA

CORREAS CV112 – CV113 – CV114 Página 9 de 51

La bomba hidráulica trabaja en un circuito hidráulico cerrado, suministrando un flujo de

aceite variable, a un Motor hidráulico Hägglunds, del tipo pistones radiales, de alto torque y
bajas rpm.

La alimentación de la bomba hidráulica se realiza desde un estanque de aceite, fabricado

en acero inoxidable, cuya capacidad es de 120 lts y dispone de calefactor eléctrico, un
Enfriador de Aceite por aire, filtros de aceite e instrumentación electrónica de última
generación, para monitoreo y control de nivel, temperatura y presión, que aseguran una
operación óptima y confiable.

La bomba hidráulica trabaja en circuito hidráulico cerrado, suministrando el flujo de aceite

requerido por el motor hidráulico, según la velocidad requerida en el Huinche Tensor.

El sistema cuenta con un freno mecánico de parqueo con discos múltiples accionado por
resortes (tipo fail-safe), instalado en el huinche hidráulico al lado opuesto del motor
hidráulico, y es activado y desactivado mediante válvulas electrohidráulicas, en forma
automática según la condición operacional del Huinche.

El fluido hidráulico antes de ingresar al estanque pasa por un filtro, instalado en la línea de
retorno, el cual permite retener el material particulado que ingresa al sistema. Este filtro
hidráulico cuenta con un sensor de Presión Diferencial, el cual, monitorea la condición de
saturación, enviando una señal on/off al Sistema de Control, el cual, entrega una señal de
Alerta, que indica cambiar elementos de filtros de aceite de la unidad Hidráulica.

La Unidad Hidráulica integra además Transmisores de Presión, los cuales, monitorean la

Presión de Trabajo del Sistema, y presión de freno, enviando una señal de 4-20 (mA) al
Sistema de Control Spider, el cual, entrega una señal de Alerta, que indica una condición
de Alta Presión de Trabajo.

El Sistema dispone de un enfriador de aceite por aire (tipo ventilador), el cual es activado
por el Sistema Control, cuando la temperatura de aceite sobrepasa los 40°C y es
desactivado cuando la temperatura del aceite disminuye por debajo de los 37°C. Esto
permite mantener la temperatura del aceite hidráulico, por debajo de temperaturas
excesivamente altas, las cuales pueden provocar daños a los sellos de los componentes
del sistema hidráulico.

La unidad hidráulica cuenta, además, con un Calefactor Eléctrico del tipo inmersión,
instalado en el depósito de Aceite hidráulico, el cual, entra en operación cada vez que la
temperatura del aceite del depósito baje de 15°C y se detiene una vez que el aceite
hidráulico, alcanza una temperatura de 20°C. Esto permite mantener siempre el aceite
hidráulico a la temperatura adecuada para el funcionamiento de la unidad Hidráulica.

El Nivel en el depósito de aceite, es monitoreado con un Transmisor de Nivel, el cual, envía

una señal tipo 4-20 (mA) al Sistema Control, entregando señales de alerta (warning) de

PRAXA INGENIERÍA SpA

CORREAS CV112 – CV113 – CV114 Página 10 de 51

máximo y mínimo nivel de Aceite y una señal de alarma (trip), que indica una condición de
Mínimo Nivel Aceite.

La Temperatura del aceite, es monitoreado con un Transmisor digital de Temperatura, el

cual, envía una señal de 4-20 (mA), al Sistema de Control, configurando una señal de alerta
a 55°C, que indica una condición de Alta Temperatura de Aceite, una señal de alarma (trip)
a 63°C, que indica una condición de Máxima Temperatura de Aceite, una señal de alarma
(trip) a 10°C, que indica una condición de Mínima Temperatura de Aceite y señales de
control para el comando automático de la unidad Enfriamiento (40°C) y Calefacción(15°C)
de Aceite de la unidad Hidráulica.

3.1 Huinche Tensor:

1 1
3
5
4
2

1) Tambores del Huinche, son accionados por un motor hidráulico de alto torque a
baja velocidad, montado directamente en el eje del tambor, sin caja reductora.

2) El motor hidráulico Hägglunds Viking MK 64-16300 montado a un extremo del

Huinche, mueve los dos tambores que pueden girar en ambas direcciones de
rotación, para el enrollado y desenrollando del cable de 11/8” Ǿ (29 mm). La
velocidad de rotación del tambor en ambos sentidos de rotación es controlada
linealmente entre 0 y 15 (RPM), mediante el control proporcional de la bomba,
controlando el flujo de aceite que alimenta al motor hidráulico, según los
comandos del sistema de control de tensión proporcional instalado en la unidad
hidráulica de bombeo.

PRAXA INGENIERÍA SpA

CORREAS CV112 – CV113 – CV114 Página 11 de 51

3) Freno tipo multidisco, para detener el tambor y mantenerlo estacionado en

posición de parqueo. El freno se activa por la fuerza de expansión de resortes en
su interior que acoplan los discos. Para poner el tambor en operación, los discos
del freno son dejados libres para girar, mediante la presión de aceite hidráulico
que contrarresta el empuje de los resortes, por lo tanto, se dispone de un freno de
tipo "seguridad" (fail-safe), que se activa en caso de falla o interrupción de la
alimentación de la fuerza eléctrica con una capacidad de 250 kN.

4) Speed encoder, para medir la velocidad y/o posición del Huinche y además
controlar la longitud de cable enrollado y/o desenrollado, en caso de ser necesario.

5) Descanso Central del Huinche marca FSQ modelo SD3134, con caja de
rodamientos de rodillos a rotula con manguito cónico para diámetro de eje de 150
mm, montado directamente sobre el eje, sobre estructura metálica.

3.1.1 Descripción motor hidráulico Hägglunds Viking MK 64

El motor Hägglunds Viking de pistones radiales, está soportado por dos
rodamientos principales en el block de cilindros estacionario (5). Los pistones
(3), en número par, están alojados en los cilindros del block en posición radial.
El bloque contiene también los pórticos de presión y retorno de aceite al motor
(A y C). Cada pistón está acoplado por una biela (2) a un gorrón transversal (6)
en el que hay cuatro rodillos de leva (7). Los dos rodillos de leva interiores
presionan contra el anillo de leva (8), en tanto que los dos rodillos exteriores
trabajan en las placas de guía (1). El anillo de leva está anclado en la carcasa rotativa.
El distribuidor (4) dirige el aceite entrante a los pistones durante sus emboladas
de trabajo y devuelve el aceite de retorno al depósito. El distribuidor está
acoplado a la carcasa rotativa con un acoplamiento de seguridad (9).

PRAXA INGENIERÍA SpA

CORREAS CV112 – CV113 – CV114 Página 12 de 51

3.1.2 Descripción Freno MDA 21

El freno MDA es de seguridad, tipo multidisco. En un funcionamiento normal,

la presión hidráulica mantiene separados los discos en el interior del freno,
permitiendo la rotación del eje. Si no hay presión hidráulica, los muelles hacen
que los discos se unan, parando la rotación del eje. Los frenos están
diseñados para trabajar con aceites hidráulicos convencionales, a base de
petróleo.

PRAXA INGENIERÍA SpA

CORREAS CV112 – CV113 – CV114 Página 13 de 51

3.2 Unidad Hidráulica

1) Una bomba hidráulica de pistones Axiales

2) Un motor eléctrico
3) Enfriador de aceite (costado)
2
4) Filtro de aceite enfriamiento
9
5) Filtro de aceite drenaje
6) Filtro de aire
7) Válvula con Succión con Switch 5
8) Calefactor de aceite
9) Indicador de saturación
10) Válvula vaciado estanque de aceite
11) Conector rápido de llenado. 6
12) Indicador de nivel de aceite.
13) Válvula direccional de Freno 1
14) Transmisor de Nivel Estanque. 14
15) Transmisor de Temperatura. 16
16) Transmisor Presión Trabajo 12
17) Transmisor Presión Freno 9
18) Transmisor Presión Carga 13
19) Depósito de Aceite. 4
17

11 8 7

El propósito de la central hidráulica es proporcionar al huinche hidráulico, el caudal y la

presión de aceite necesario y requerido, según la condición operacional. La central
hidráulica tiene una bomba principal y es accionada por un motor eléctrico trifásico.
La bomba principal es de tipo de pistones axiales con caudal variable, la cual, trabaja en
circuito cerrado y entrega el flujo de aceite en forma proporcional al Motor hidráulico,
dependiendo del porcentaje de velocidad requerido (0-100%).

La bomba hidráulica posee un limitador de presión externo, llamado compensador

hidráulico, que nos permite controlar la máxima presión del sistema hidráulico, en todas las
etapas de funcionamiento del huinche, y que en resumen nos permite controlar el Torque
desarrollado por el Sistema Hidráulico. La central hidráulica, dispone de un conjunto de
componentes hidráulicos que también permiten controlar el freno del huinche, el cual, por
medio de una válvula direccional hidráulica controlada en forma automática, permite la
segura y confiable operación del freno de seguridad y parqueo del Huinche.

La instrumentación existente en la central hidráulica nos permite monitorear variables

especificas; Nivel Estanque, Temperatura Aceite, Presión Trabajo, Presión Carga, Presión

PRAXA INGENIERÍA SpA

CORREAS CV112 – CV113 – CV114 Página 14 de 51

Freno, condición filtros aceite y condición válvula succión, que en conjunto con el sistema
de control Spider, permiten monitorear y controlar las diferentes condiciones de interlock y
seguridad del sistema hidráulico, pudiendo trabajar dentro de los rangos operacionales
establecidos para la aplicación.

PRAXA INGENIERÍA SpA

CORREAS CV112 – CV113 – CV114 Página 15 de 51

4) COMPONENTES SISTEMA HUINCHE TENSOR

4.1 Huinche Tensor:

Marca : Praxa Ingeniería
Modelo : HTC PR-9-23-75-2x639/600
Serie : 932-19-002/003/004
Tiro máximo del Huinche : 167 kN (17 Ton)
Tiro máximo frenado : 167 kN (17 Ton)
Presión con tiro máximo : 250 bar
Presión con tiro de trabajo : 200 bar
Velocidad variable, linealmente : desde 0 a 0.5 m/s
Diámetro cable : 11/8” (29mm)
Capacidad longitud de cable enrrollado : 36 mts., por Tambor
Diámetro Nominal tambor : 639 mm
Largo tambor : 600 mm

4.2 Motor Hidráulico, Freno y Encoder

Motor Hidráulico:
Marca : Hägglunds
Modelo : Viking MK 64 16300
Tipo : Pistones Radiales
Desplazamiento : 16340 cc/rev
Torque : 260 Nm/bar
Máx. Presión : 250 bar

Freno:
Marca : Hägglunds
Modelo : MDA 21 N 0 00
Máx. Torque : 81.800 Nm
Máx. presión : 50 Bar

Speed Encoder:
Marca : Hägglunds
Modelo : SPLL85D-2500
Tipo : 2500 PPR

Descanso central Huinche:

Marca : FSQ
Modelo : SD3134
Tipo : Rodamiento rodillo a rotula con
manguito de montaje

PRAXA INGENIERÍA SpA

CORREAS CV112 – CV113 – CV114 Página 16 de 51

4.3 Sistema Hidráulico:

 Central hidráulica

Marca : Bosch Rexroth

Modelo : PUC-0202-575VAC/50Hz
Serie : 932UH0121-01 / 02 / 03
Peso sin aceite : 2.300 kg
Voltaje Principal : 575 Vac/50 Hz
Volumen del estanque : 120 litros

 Bomba hidráulica:
Marca : Bosch Rexroth
Modelo : SP180-SR-V-EP
Caudal máximo a 1485 rpm : ~260 l/min
Máxima presión : 350 bar
Presión del compensador interno : 200 bar
Presión de carga : 20 bar

 Sensor de Temperatura y Nivel:

Marca : Bosch Rexroth
Modelo : ABZMS-41-1X/0500/RTA/DC-K24

 Sensor de Presión Carga:

Marca : Bosch Rexroth
Modelo : HM 20-2X/250
Rango : 0-250 Bar / 4-20 ma

 Sensor de Presión Trabajo:

Marca : Bosch Rexroth
Modelo : HM 20-2X/400
Rango : 0-400 Bar / 4-20 ma

 Sensor de Presión Freno:

Marca : Bosch Rexroth
Modelo : HM 20-2X/250
Rango : 0-250 Bar / 4-20 ma

 Calefactor de Aceite:
Marca : Bosch Rexroth
Modelo : OE331/K7-575V-670W
Potencia : 0,67Kw / 575 Vac

PRAXA INGENIERÍA SpA

CORREAS CV112 – CV113 – CV114 Página 17 de 51

 Enfriador de Aceite:
Marca : Bosch Rexroth
Modelo : HDC080A4O83
Potencia : 1,16 Kw / 575 Vac

4.4 Motor Eléctrico:

Marca : Siemens
Modelo : 1LE1603-2DB09-0GB4-Z
Potencia : 75 kW / 575 Vac / 50 Hz
Velocidad : ~1485 rpm

4.5 Sistema de Control:

Marca : Hagglunds-Bosch Rexroth

Modelo : XM21
Alimentación : 110 / 220 Vac – 50 Hz
Bus Comunicación : Profi Bus TCP/IP
Pantalla HMI : VR21 7”
Módulo Control : Spider II.
Tablero Control : Nema 4X

PRAXA INGENIERÍA SpA

CORREAS CV112 – CV113 – CV114 Página 18 de 51

5) SISTEMA DE MONITOREO Y CONTROL – BOSCH REXROTH -HAGGLUNDS

La unidad hidráulica cuenta con un moderno Sistema de Control, desarrollado por

HAGGLUNDS, para controlar el desplazamiento volumétrico de la bomba hidráulica
principal y el monitoreo de las funciones operacionales y seguridad. Es un sistema de
control electrónico de última generación, compacto y configurable, capaz de controlar y
monitorear los parámetros y variables, de la unidad hidráulica y el Huinche Tensor.

Este moderno Sistema de Control Spider, monitorea en forma permanente, las variables de
Presión de Trabajo, Presión de Carga, Temperatura y Nivel de Aceite del depósito, Presión
Diferencial de los Filtros de Aceite, Válvulas de Succión Cerradas, Presión Sistema de
Freno, etc, entregando señales de alerta y alarma (trip) de cada una de estas variables,
deteniendo la unidad hidráulica, cada vez que las señales de alarma indiquen un
funcionamiento anormal del sistema.

El Sistema de Control Spider, permite el control proporcional del Huinche Tensor, mediante
la utilización de señales de Control proporcional y se encuentra instalado en un Tablero de
Control (Nema4X), ubicado al costado derecho del Gabinete hidráulico.

La integración del sistema de control dedicado de las unidades Hägglunds, con un PLC
Bosch Rexrroth, permite generar una plataforma de comunicación y control.
Para el control del sistema se integra una Pantalla táctil, de 7 pulgadas, de interface con el
usuario para operaciones locales.

La comunicación ethernet, permite el monitoreo de las distintas variables, el control remoto

y el almacenamiento y/o gestión de la información en plataformas de bases de datos.

Recomendamos consultar siempre la documentación técnica adjunta, para identificar las

características del sistema hidráulico.

PRAXA INGENIERÍA SpA

CORREAS CV112 – CV113 – CV114 Página 19 de 51

5.1 Descripción Señales de Interlock del Sistema hidráulico:

El Sistema Hidráulico, cuenta con señales de interlock de seguridad y operación, las cuales,
mediante señales eléctricas tipo análogas y discretas, permiten monitorear las diferentes
condiciones de funcionamiento del Sistema Hidráulico, de acuerdo con la siguiente
clasificación.

Señal de Interlock Seguridad Setting Unidad Función

Mínima Temperatura Aceite 10 ºC Alarma

Máxima Temperatura Aceite 60 ºC Alarma
Mínimo Nivel Aceite 250 mm Alarma
Baja Presión de Carga 10 Bar Alarma
Válvula Succión Cerrada off 0/1 Alarma
Alta Temperatura Aceite 55 ºC Alerta
Bajo Nivel aceite 200 mm Alerta
Filtro Retorno Saturado 2,2 Bar Alerta
Filtro Drenaje Saturado 2,2 Bar Alerta
Filtro Carga Saturado 2,2 Bar Alerta
Bajo % Cable Huinche 20 % Alerta
Alto % Cable Huinche 90 % Alerta
Freno Aplicado 20 Bar Enclavamiento
Min % Cable Huinche 10 % Enclavamiento
Max % Cable Huinche 100 % Enclavamiento
Temperatura control Calefactor 15 ºC Operación
Temperatura control Enfriador 40 ºC Operación

Nota:
Los Interlock con función “Alarma” (trip), generan una detención del Sistema Hidráulico,
registrando la condición de falla en la pantalla de registro de alarmas de la HMI y del control
Spider II.

Los Interlock con función “Alerta”, generan una señal de alerta del Sistema Hidráulico,
registrando la condición de indicación en el display del Control Spider II.

Los Interlock con función “Enclavamiento”, generan una detención del Huinche Tensor,
registrando la condición de falla en ambos display’s.

PRAXA INGENIERÍA SpA

CORREAS CV112 – CV113 – CV114 Página 20 de 51

5.2 Descripción del Sistema de Monitoreo y Control:

Sistema de Control SPIDER, modelo SPIDER II;

El Sistema de Control se compone de un equipo electrónico Hägglunds, Modelo spider II,

el cual, se encuentra integrado en un Tablero eléctrico dispuesto en la unidad hidráulica
PUC 0202 y realiza las siguientes funciones;

 Monitorear en forma continua todas las señales de Interlock de la Unidad hidráulica y

Huinche Tensor, informando su condición en forma local y remota.
 Controlar la operación segura y confiable de los accionamientos
eléctricos del sistema (Bomba hidráulica, Enfriador y calefactor).
 Controlar el desplazamiento volumétrico de la bomba hidráulica, en forma local y
remota.
 Controlar la operación automática del freno, instalado en él Huinche Tensor.
 Proveer comunicación, con el PLC para realizar el control remoto del sistema, desde
el DCS de la Planta, utilizando bus de comunicación PROFIBUS TCP/IP.

El sistema de control Spider, se suministra en un tablero de control Nema 4X, que requiere
una alimentación de 110 vac/220 vac-50 hz, para su normal funcionamiento.

PRAXA INGENIERÍA SpA

CORREAS CV112 – CV113 – CV114 Página 21 de 51

5.3 Sistema Control Hägglunds-Bosch Rexroth, aplicación Huinche Tensor

Sistema de Control Tensión – HBR SPIIXM21;

El Sistema de Control Tensión, se encuentra implementado en el Sistema integrado

SPIIXM21 y su correspondiente Panel de Operación Bosch Rexroth, en un Tablero de
Control de la Unidad Hidráulica y realizan las siguientes funciones;

 Monitorear en forma continua, las señales de Interlock del Huinche Tensor.

 Controlar la Tensión en el Cable del Huinche, durante todas las fases de operación;
Partida, Operación y Detención.
 Monitoreo y visualización de “Variables Operacionales” del Huinche Tensor.
 Registro Histórico de alarmas y advertencias de parámetros operacionales

Unidad HMI Control Tensión Huinche

PRAXA INGENIERÍA SpA

CORREAS CV112 – CV113 – CV114 Página 22 de 51

6) DATOS TÉCNICOS
6.1 Elección del aceite hidráulico
El sistema Huiche tensor hidráulico, con motor Hägglunds está diseñado para funcionar con
aceites hidráulicos convencionales basados en petróleo de viscosidad ISO VG 68. Para
elegir la marca del aceite hidráulico puede consultar con el proveedor de aceite de Codelco,
teniendo presentes los siguientes requisitos:
El aceite debe cumplir los requisitos de FZG (90) grado mínimo 11, descritos en IP 334 (DIN
51354). Asimismo, debe contener inhibidores de oxidación, corrosión y espuma. La
viscosidad del aceite mineral depende en gran medida de la temperatura. La elección
definitiva del aceite dependerá de la temperatura de trabajo prevista o determinada del
sistema, y no del depósito de aceite. Las temperaturas altas en el sistema reducen en gran
medida la vida de servicio del aceite y las juntas de goma y también reducen la viscosidad
con el consiguiente empeoramiento de la lubricación. El contenido de agua debe ser inferior
al 0,05%.
Cada depósito de aceite de las unidades hidráulicas de los Huinches tensores tiene una
capacidad de 120 lts.

PRAXA INGENIERÍA SpA

CORREAS CV112 – CV113 – CV114 Página 23 de 51

6.2 Requerimientos de limpieza del aceite hidráulico

El sistema hidráulico está equipado con un filtro dúplex en la línea de Drenaje y un Filtro
dúplex en la línea de enfriamiento, con elementos de fibra sintética de 10 micras absolutas,
con objeto de retener el material particulado antes del ingreso del aceite al estanque.

Además, el depósito de aceite cuenta begiga y filtro de venteo presurizado, que limita el
ingreso de material particulado al interior del depósito de aceite, durante la operación del
equipo.

El nivel de contaminación de material particulado máximo permitido para este sistema no

debe exceder la norma ISO 4406, código 18/16/13.

El contenido de agua deberá ser inferior al 0,1%, y en aplicaciones industriales con

elevadas demandas de vida de servicio inferior al 0,05%.

6.3 Recomendaciones para mantener un nivel de limpieza adecuado

 Limpiar el sistema antes del arranque. Ver sección «Limpieza antes del arranque».

 Cuando se llena el depósito con aceite hidráulico, es importante hacerlo por la

conexión especial para llenado de aceite incorporado en circuito de central hidráulica,
ubicado inmediatamente antes del filtro de retorno. Esto permitirá que el aceite nuevo
o de relleno de la unidad sea pre filtrado en el filtro dúplex del sistema, antes del
ingreso al depósito de aceite.

 Realizar limpieza interior (Flushing) de los flexibles hidráulicos, cada vez que se
realice el remplazo de uno de ellos.

 Emplear siempre elementos de filtro recomendados y originales.

 Analizar el aceite hidráulico según los intervalos de mantenimiento especiales para el

sistema hidráulico (ver «Tabla de mantenimiento»).

 Tener especial cuidado al desmontar componentes para la reparación o el

mantenimiento, para evitar que entre material contaminante al sistema hidráulico.

 Limpiar siempre en forma cuidadosa y prolija antes de intervenir el equipo.

PRAXA INGENIERÍA SpA

CORREAS CV112 – CV113 – CV114 Página 24 de 51

6.4 Control de parámetros del sistema hidráulico

En la unidad hidráulica, se incluye el sistema de control para la función de controlar los

parámetros de funcionamiento de la unidad, utilizando el sistema de control HBR.

El control de las señales interlock de la central hidráulica, están agrupados en tres niveles,
Alertas, Alarmas e Interlock, según lo siguiente;

 La indicación de alerta tiene por objeto advertir de algún problema en el sistema

hidráulico, pero no requiere acción inmediata y la unidad puede continuar en operación
hasta terminar el proceso e inmediatamente después se debe corregir la condición
que genera la señal de alerta.

 La indicación de alarma (trip) indica una situación grave y la necesidad de detener

inmediatamente el funcionamiento de la unidad hidráulica. La secuencia de control
una vez detectada una señal de alarma detiene inmediatamente el motor eléctrico de
la bomba.

 La indicación de Interlock, indica una condición anormal en el Huinche, su activación

detiene en forma inmediata el Huinche, pero la Unidad Hidráulica se mantiene en
operación, un reset de esta condición, permitirá nuevamente poner en operación el
Huinche, previo trabajo de solución del problema detectado.

PRAXA INGENIERÍA SpA

CORREAS CV112 – CV113 – CV114 Página 25 de 51

7) MANIPULACIÓN
7.1 Almacenaje de los componentes embalados

Los componentes hidráulicos están protegidos interiormente con una película de aceite (con
aditivos anticorrosión), que proporciona protección suficiente para el almacenaje en locales
con aire acondicionado durante aproximadamente 12 meses.

La central de bombeo, y sus partes correspondientes deben almacenarse bajo techo, en un

entorno seco y libre de vibraciones y polvo. No debe almacenarse durante más de tres
meses en locales que carezcan de aire acondicionado.

Si el tiempo almacenaje excede los límites, será necesario poner los equipos en
servicio, de forma que se lubrique el sistema con aceite nuevo.

Localizar la central hidráulica donde no esté expuesta a la luz solar fuerte ni al frío excesivo,
para evitar la condensación.

PRAXA INGENIERÍA SpA

CORREAS CV112 – CV113 – CV114 Página 26 de 51

8) INSTALACIÓN

Instrucciones de instalación
Para que el sistema hidráulico funcione adecuadamente, es necesario instalar los
componentes de acuerdo con las indicaciones de los planos certificados y según las
condiciones en las que va a funcionar, teniendo en cuenta para la central hidráulica de
bombeo las siguientes indicaciones para su localización:

8.1 Instrucciones de instalación Central Hidráulica

No instalar nunca la central hidráulica directamente contra una pared u obstrucción

similar, ya que, no podrá tener ventilación satisfactoria e interferirá durante las
labores de mantención y/o reparación.

Ubicación de la central hidráulica:

 Sobre una base sólida y nivelada (para evitar las vibraciones).

 De forma que se facilite el mantenimiento y el servicio.
 De forma que se garantice la ventilación libre para la refrigeración del motor
eléctrico y del enfriador de aire-aceite.
 De forma que se minimice la longitud de las tuberías.

8.2 Posicionamiento recomendado de la central hidráulica

Hay que asegurar el siguiente espacio mínimo alrededor del grupo hidráulico, para
garantizar la ventilación libre y proporcionar suficiente espacio de trabajo para facilitar el
mantenimiento. El mantenimiento de mayor envergadura, tal como el cambio de los motores
o de las bombas, requiere más espacio de trabajo.

Distancias mínimas recomendadas:

A) 700 mm.
B) 1.300 mm.
C) 900 mm.
D) 200 mm.
E) 700 mm.

PRAXA INGENIERÍA SpA

CORREAS CV112 – CV113 – CV114 Página 27 de 51

8.3 Montaje de la unidad hidráulica

La base de la unidad hidraulica posee perforación para anclar la unidad al piso o la

estructura existente. Esto permite reducir vibraciones y fijar la unidad de manera segura al
edificio.

a) Montar y fijar la unidad hidraulica, antes de llenar el depósito de aceite.

b) Levantar la central hidráulica según se indica en «Métodos de elevación y pesos».

Prestar especial atención a las instrucciones de seguridad.

c) Nivelar la central hidráulica antes de fijar a la estructura.

8.4 Montaje del enfriador de aceite

El enfriador de aceite hidráulico se envia instalado en la unidad hidráulica desde fábrica, sin
embargo para procesos de mantención en los cuales se necesite retirar el enfriador, se
deben seguir los siguientes pasos:

 Montar los soportes con los pernos suministrados (en los agujeros taladrados) en la
estructura de la central hidráulica.

 Elevar el enfriador de aceite. No levantarlo nunca desde el motor eléctrico.

 Montar el enfriador de aceite en los soportes con los pernos suministrados.

 Comprobar que todos los pernos estén debidamente apretados. Obsérvese que si se
suelta el enfriador de aceite, puede causar graves daños personales.

PRAXA INGENIERÍA SpA

CORREAS CV112 – CV113 – CV114 Página 28 de 51

 Conectar las mangueras hidráulicas suministrados. Las protecciones de las

mangueras se deben mantener con los tapones hasta el montaje final, para impedir
su exposición a la contaminación del ambiente.

 Para conexiones eléctricas, conectores y canalizaciones, ver los instructivos

correspondientes.

8.5 Conexiones hidráulicas

Para el montaje de las conexiones hidráulicas, se deben tener en cuenta los puntos
siguientes:

 Dejar las protecciones en su sitio hasta el montaje final.

 Es importante montar la tuberia y los flexibles que unen la unidad hidraulica con el
Huinche, de acuerdo a las buenas ptacticas, aplinado los torques corerspondientes,
utilizando llaves de torque certificadas y posterioemente realizar flushing y pruebas de
presion, según lo siguiente:

Circular aceite con flujo turbulento a alta velocidad con Re ≥ 4000 por cada una de las
siguientes líneas hidráulicas, cada vez que se cambie algún flexible del circuito, hasta
conseguir un código de limpieza según ISO 4406 nivel 18/16/13 o mejor.

No hacer nada si el sistema hidráulico está presurizado.

Todas las intervenciones del sistema hidráulico deberán ser efectuadas por personal de
servicio calificado que sea consciente de los riesgos. Las conexiones A y B (alta presión)
requieren un alto nivel de cuidado y seguridad.

Durante la operación de la unidad hidraulica, los flexibles y piping de unidad quedan

presurizados, por lo cual no se deben manipular las conexiones y/o flexibles del
sistema, sin antes detener el equipo y evacuar la presión remanente.

Especial cuidado se debe tener al desconectar los flexibles hidráulicos y/o piping,
que unen la unidad hidráulica con el huinche hidráulico.

PRAXA INGENIERÍA SpA

CORREAS CV112 – CV113 – CV114 Página 29 de 51

8.6 Conexiones eléctricas

Instrucciones de seguridad
 Todo el equipo eléctrico está diseñado para que lo instale y lo use personal calificado que
esté familiarizado con los requerimientos de seguridad aplicables.

 Es necesario tener un equipo de seguridad para la prevención de accidentes en el lugar de

la instalación y sitio de trabajo según la legislación vigente en el país correspondiente.

 Efectuar la conexión a tierra según la normativa local antes de conectar el equipo eléctrico
a la tensión de la red.

 Todos los niveles de alimentación eléctrica han de estar dentro de los límites de diseño del
equipo. Ver documentación técnica y placa de valores límite.

Caja de conexiones

Conectar los cables en los terminales del interior de la caja de conexiones según el plano
eléctrico en la documentación técnica adjunta.

8.7 Enfriador de aceite

El voltaje y el tipo de conexión se encuentran en la placa de datos del motor eléctrico,

correspondiendo a 3x575vac/50 hz – 1,2 KW. Este componentes se encuentra cableado y
probado de fábrica, sin embargo en caso de mantención, donde se haya desconectado
eléctricamente, se debe comprobar el sentido de rotación, según flecha de la corriente de
aire en la figura posterior a la conexion.

PRAXA INGENIERÍA SpA

CORREAS CV112 – CV113 – CV114 Página 30 de 51

8.8 Calefactor de aceite

El Calefactor de Aceite, se entrega instalado en el estanque de aceite hidráulico de la HPU

y conectado al Tablero de Fuerza, correspondiendo a una conexión eléctrica trifásica
575VAC/50 Hz – 670W

8.9 Motor Eléctrico de la Bomba Hidráulica

El motor eléctrico, se entrega instalado en la Unidad Hidráulica y conectado al Tablero de

Fuerza, correspondiendo a una conexión eléctrica trifásica 575VAC/50 Hz – 75KW.

8.10 Tuberías

No trabajar en las tuberías mientras esté presurizado el

sistema hidráulico. Usar el equipo de seguridad necesario
durante la instalación de las tuberías.

Durante la operación de la unidad hidráulico, los flexibles

y piping quedan presurizados, a pesar de estar detenida
la unidad hidráulica, por lo cual no se deben manipular las
conexiones y/o flexibles.

8.11 Almacenaje de los componentes suministrados

Almacenar los componentes suministrados en la entrega según lo indicado en Almacenaje

de la central hidráulica embalada. Obsérvese que no deberá quitarse el embalaje durante
el periodo de almacenaje.

8.12 Manipulación de las piezas

Generalidades

Inspeccionar visualmente las superficies de los conectores antes de montarlos. Deberán

estar libres de daños. Manejar los conectores con cuidado. Si se cae un conector o se le da

PRAXA INGENIERÍA SpA

CORREAS CV112 – CV113 – CV114 Página 31 de 51

un golpe, inspeccionarlo en forma cuidadosa visualmente, comprobar que los sellos (si hay)
se encuentren en la posición correcta, libre de daños y estén con aceite.
Las protecciones y los embalajes de los accesorios deben mantenerse hasta el final del
montaje.

8.13 Piezas soldadas

Por ningún motivo usar soldadura para la unión de la tubería hidráulica, este tipo de unión
provoca contaminación que se introduce en el sistema hidráulico y daña sus componentes.

PRAXA INGENIERÍA SpA

CORREAS CV112 – CV113 – CV114 Página 32 de 51

9) PUESTA EN MARCHA

9.1 Antes de la puesta en marcha

Generalidades

 El comisionamiento y puesta en marcha debe ser efectuado por personal capacitado

y autorizado para realizar este tipo de actividades, siguiendo todas las indicaciones
del este manual y el resto de la documentación técnica.

 Realizar Inspección visual del sistema completo para ver si presenta fugas de aceite,
antes de poner en marcha el equipo.

Tuberías y Flexibles
 ¿Están debidamente apretados los conectores?
 ¿Están debidamente limpias las tuberías y flexibles?
 ¿Están montadas las tuberías y flexibles sin tensiones?

Equipo eléctrico

 Comprobar que los motores eléctricos, el Tablero de Control y otros componentes

eléctricos están conectados al voltaje correcto.

Llenado del sistema con aceite hidráulico

Antes del llenado

 Comprobar que se dispone del aceite hidráulico del tipo y calidad correctos, de
acuerdo a lo especificado para este sistema hidráulico. No mezclar aceite hidráulico
de distintos tipos sin consultar primero a los fabricantes. Para esta aplicación s
especifico aceite hidráulico ISO VG68

 Comprobar que el tambor de aceite hidráulico, el depósito y las mangueras no están

contaminados con agua ni con ninguna otra sustancia.

 Usar una bomba de llenado externa, con un filtro de 10 micras o más fino.

 Bombear el aceite por el acoplamiento rápido debidamente marcado. El fluido llenado

en el sistema será filtrado por el filtro de la línea de retorno para obtener mejores
resultados.

 Llenar el depósito con aceite hasta 20 mm (0,79 pulg.) por debajo del nivel de la mirilla
de nivel visual del depósito antes de arrancar por primera vez el equipo.

PRAXA INGENIERÍA SpA

CORREAS CV112 – CV113 – CV114 Página 33 de 51

 Controlar el funcionamiento del interruptor de nivel y la indicación de este mientras se

llena el depósito.

 Evitar el contacto de larga duración de la piel con el aceite hidráulico.

 Evitar el vertido de aceite hidráulico en el suelo, ya que implica un gran riesgo de

resbalones y caídas.

Normalmente, el aceite nuevo no está filtrado e introducirá suciedad en el sistema.

Por ello, siempre se recomienda utilizar un equipo de trasvasije externo con filtro
independiente, tal como muestra la figura. No verter nunca aceite hidráulico en el
depósito por el filtro de aire.

9.2 Procedimiento de arranque inicial

 Asegurarse de que la unidad hidráulica y el Huinche están conectados, y están listos

para la operación.

 Avisar a todo el personal en la zona de la inminencia del arranque y segregar el área

si fuera necesario según los protocolos de seguridad de la empresa.

 Seguir y respetar todas y cada una de las Instrucciones de seguridad.

 No utilizar nunca instrumentos o elementos de control defectuosos.

PRAXA INGENIERÍA SpA

CORREAS CV112 – CV113 – CV114 Página 34 de 51

 Mantener los materiales inflamables alejados del sistema hidráulico.

 Durante el periodo de arranque, se debe verificar que se han eliminado las partículas
de suciedad incorporadas en el sistema hidráulico. Para ello se debe vigilar los
indicadores de filtro durante todo el procedimiento de puesta en marcha.

 Al arrancar en frío, los filtros pueden indicar apertura del bypass. Al cabo de unos
minutos de funcionamiento, Si esta situación no cambia al aumentar la temperatura
del aceite, será necesario cambiar los elementos de filtro.

ETAPA 1
Justo antes de arrancar

 Controlar el nivel del fluido en el depósito y rellenar hasta unos 20 mm (0,79 pulg.) por
debajo del nivel del indicador visual de nivel del depósito.

 Comprobar el equipo de seguridad.

 Asegurarse de que está abierta la válvula en la línea de succión (en el caso de bomba
instalada fuera del estanque).

Asegurarse inmediatamente del que el sentido de giro del motor eléctrico sea en
sentido Horario.

ETAPA 2
Controlar el nivel de aceite en el estanque.

Puede ser necesario rellenar debido a que se han llenado de aceite partes vacías del
sistema.

 Comprobar si hay vibraciones o ruidos anormales.

 Comprobar que se mantienen los niveles especificados para presión, temperatura y

nivel de aceite, según los valores indicados en el esquema hidráulico de la
documentación técnica adjunta. Los niveles de presión están ajustados en fábrica y
normalmente no es necesario reajustarlos en terreno.

 Comprobar si hay fugas.

PRAXA INGENIERÍA SpA

CORREAS CV112 – CV113 – CV114 Página 35 de 51

ETAPA 3
Controlar las Variables Operacionales Hidráulicas.

 Controlar el correcto rango de Temperatura del Aceite Hidráulico.

 Controlar el correcto rango de Presión de carga y Trabajo de la HPU.

 Controlar el correcto rango de Nivel de Aceite de la HPU.

 Controlar el funcionamiento de los indicadores de saturación de los filtros de Aceite

de la HPU.

 Controlar el correcto funcionamiento del calefactor eléctrico de la HPU.

 Controlar el correcto funcionamiento del enfriador de aceite de la HPU.

ETAPA 4
Controlar el funcionamiento del sistema.

 Verificar la presión máxima de trabajo de la unidad hidráulica ajustada en el

compensador de la bomba y que los interlock están ajustados a niveles correctos para
la unidad accionada. En el suministro, estos niveles de presión se ajustan a los niveles
especificados por el cliente, y normalmente no es necesario reajustarlos.

 Accionar el Control y verificar el correcto sentido de accionamiento del huinche

hidráulico. Puede ser necesario cambiar las conexiones hidráulicas o cambiar la
posición de las bobinas en la válvula proporcional.

 Comprobar si hay vibraciones o ruidos anormales en la unidad hidráulica, piping o

huinche hidráulico.

 Comprobar que se mantienen los niveles especificados para presión, temperatura y

 Comprobar si hay fugas en la central hidráulica o en piping que conecta al huinche

hidráulico.

PRAXA INGENIERÍA SpA

CORREAS CV112 – CV113 – CV114 Página 36 de 51

9.3 Ajuste de Presión de Trabajo

La presión del compensador de las bombas se ajustó durante las pruebas efectuadas en
Terreno y están especificadas en los protocolos de pruebas de los equipos, se recomienda
comprobar siempre los niveles de presión en la documentación técnica. El ajuste de las
presiones en las bombas deberá ser realizado por personal calificado y autorizado,
que esté familiarizado con las funciones y los riesgos de las bombas.

Las presiones se ajustan en operación y con el sistema a la temperatura de trabajo.

Obsérvese que la presión puede cambiar con las diferentes viscosidades.

Para ajustar en terreno los niveles de presión de trabajo:

1) Asegurarse de que las tuberías y la estructura de la máquina pueden soportar

presiones más elevados desarrollados por la unidad hidráulica.

2) La presión de trabajo se ajusta en el compensador de la bomba, para lo cual se debe

activar o mover la señal de entrada al control, de forma que aumente la presión en la
línea de alta presión hasta el ajuste de la limitadora de presión. Se habrá alcanzado
el ajuste de la limitadora de presión, cuando esta no suba más y permanezca estable
(comprobar los manómetros).

3) Para ajustar el compensador o limitador de presión en las salidas A y B se efectúa

retirando la tuerca de protección, luego aflojar la tuerca de seguridad y ajustar la
presión con una llave Allen (tamaño 5/32"). El giro del tornillo de ajuste en sentido
horario aumenta la presión.

4) Una vez ajustada la presión de trabajo a la deseada, se debe apretar nuevamente la

tuerca de seguridad y montar la tuerca de protección y registrar los nuevos valores de
la presión en el informe diario o en la documentación técnica correspondiente.

PRAXA INGENIERÍA SpA

CORREAS CV112 – CV113 – CV114 Página 37 de 51

10) MANTENIMIENTO PREVENTIVO

10.1 Mantenimiento Diario

Recomendamos que se tenga un registro diario de mantenimiento para anotar todas las
intervenciones efectuadas al equipo y su sistema hidráulico, indicando la fecha junto a cada
nota, observación o comentario.

10.2 Tabla de mantenimiento periódico

El objetivo de la planificación del mantenimiento de los sistemas mecánicos, eléctricos,
hidráulicos y de control, está concebido para prevenir las fallas imprevistas y mantener el
sistema funcionando eficazmente según la especificación. Los procedimientos específicos
dependerán de la naturaleza del equipo, el entorno de trabajo y el ciclo de trabajo, teniendo
en cuenta las consecuencias de una falla y su impacto en la producción. Para optimizar
económicamente los intervalos de mantenimiento, se recomienda hacer un análisis de costo
beneficio en el ciclo de vida útil de los componentes.

10.3 Controles diarios, primera semana después de la puesta en marcha

 Fugas de aceite.
 Nivel de aceite en el estanque.
 Temperatura de trabajo.
 Presión de trabajo del sistema.
 Rendimiento y estado general del sistema.
 Ruidos y vibraciones anormales.
 Nivel de Saturación del filtro.

10.4 Controles frecuentes

 Vibraciones anormales.
 Ruidos anormales.
 Fugas de aceite.
 Nivel de aceite en el estanque.
 ¿Está el grupo relativamente limpio? ¿La entrada de aire del ventilador esta libre?
 ¿Es normal y estable la presión de trabajo?
 ¿Son normales y estables las velocidades de los huinches hidráulicos?
 ¿La temperatura de trabajo se mantiene dentro de los rangos predefinidos?
 ¿Funciona suavemente la unidad accionada?
 Indicadores de contaminación en los filtros.

PRAXA INGENIERÍA SpA

CORREAS CV112 – CV113 – CV114 Página 38 de 51

10.5 Mantenimiento programado

Mantenimiento programado a intervalos de tiempo específicos, incluyendo los siguientes

controles y acciones:

 Todos los puntos de control frecuente.

 Controlar todos los niveles de presión.
 Controlar la estabilidad de los niveles de temperatura alrededor del sistema.
 Controlar el motor eléctrico.
 Controlar el funcionamiento del equipo de control, los interruptores, etcétera.
 Limpiar las zonas donde se está acumulando suciedad
 Controlar los cables.
 Controlar los caudales de drenaje y el estado de la tubería.
 Controlar las mangueras, las conexiones y las bombas, con respecto a grietas,
fugas y estado.
 Controlar el acoplamiento del eje por el agujero de inspección.
Advertencia: Piezas giratorias en el interior del agujero de inspección.
 Comprobar que el aislamiento en el interior del depósito, no se ha despegado
(especialmente en el techo).
 Controlar que las puertas y la tapa del grupo motor no presentan daños.
 Verificar que el código de limpieza del aceite hidráulico se mantiene, por debajo del
máximo permitido.
 Verificar el estado de la Instrumentación de la Unidad Hidráulica.
 Verificar el Voltaje y Corriente en funcionamiento.
 Controlar el funcionamiento del Sistema de Control;
 Partida y detención del calefactor eléctrico.
 Partida y detención del enfriador de aceite.
 Partida y detención automática de la unidad hidráulica

 Verificar estado del cableado de fuerza y de control.

 Controlar el estado de los componentes y del piping hidráulico.
 Controlar estado de las mangueras hidráulicas; verificar que no existan globos,
picaduras en el recubrimiento, fugas entre capas.

NOTA: Nunca usar un sistema de lavado de alta presión, dirigido directamente a la

instrumentación de la unidad hidráulica.

PRAXA INGENIERÍA SpA

CORREAS CV112 – CV113 – CV114 Página 39 de 51

11) TABLA PARA INSPECCIÓN PRINCIPAL Y REEMPLAZO

12) CAMBIO DEL ELEMENTO DE FILTRO DE ACEITE

1. Presionar hacia adentro la palanca compensadora de presión en la parte inferior de

la palanca de cambio y sujetarla. Ver figura.
2. Sacar el pasador de seguridad, girar la palanca de cambio situándola al otro lado
purga.
3. Aflojar el tornillo de purga, sólo en el lado donde se va a cambiar el filtro, (ver figura),
2 o 3 vueltas (máximo hasta el tope de seguridad).
4. Quitar la carcasa del filtro y cambiar el cartucho de filtro.

PRAXA INGENIERÍA SpA

CORREAS CV112 – CV113 – CV114 Página 40 de 51

Es muy importante durante el montaje no exponer el cartucho a suciedad alguna.

Para ello mantenerlo en la funda de plástico

Controlar el aro tórico y el anillo de retención para ver si presentan daños, cambiándolos
en caso necesario.

5. Montar la carcasa del filtro. Apretarlo con la mano hasta tope y girarlo en sentido
opuesto 1/8 de vuelta.
6. Rellenar el filtro presionando la palanca compensadora y sujetándola hasta que no
salgan burbujas por el agujero de purga.
7. Apretar el tornillo de purga. Controlar si hay fugas en el filtro presionando de nuevo la
palanca compensadora.

13) INSPECCIÓN DEL ACEITE HIDRÁULICO

Recomendamos analizar el aceite hidráulico cada 6 meses. El análisis deberá cubrir

viscosidad, oxidación, contenido de agua, aditivos y suciedad. Si el análisis revela que las
propiedades del fluido hidráulico no cumplen con los requerimientos, no deberá seguir
usándose, sino que deberá cambiarse o limpiarse inmediatamente.

14) CAMBIO DEL FILTRO RESPIRADERO

 Limpiar la zona alrededor de la ubicación del filtro de aire.

 Desenroscar el filtro.
 Montar filtro nuevo.

PRAXA INGENIERÍA SpA

CORREAS CV112 – CV113 – CV114 Página 41 de 51

15) LIMPIEZA DEL ENFRIADOR DE ACEITE

15.1 Limpieza de las aspas del ventilador

 La forma más simple de limpiar las aspas del ventilador es usando aire comprimido o
limpiar con agua.

 La suciedad se puede eliminar usando un disolvente y un sistema de lavado de alta

presión. Cuando se use un sistema de lavado de alta presión, apuntar el chorro con
cuidado y paralelamente a las aspas del ventilador.

 La acumulación de suciedad en el enfriador disminuye su rendimiento y no permite

que el sistema de enfriamiento opere en forma óptima.

16) MANTENIMIENTO CORRECTIVO

Antes de intervenir la unidad hidráulica, desconectar y bloquear el sistema eléctrico e

hidráulico, evacuar presión remanente del sistema.

16.1 Antes de desmontar

 Efectuar la localización de falla en el sistema hidráulico y hacer las pruebas

apropiadas.

 Limpiar todos los conjuntos y componentes, adoptando todas las precauciones

necesarias para que no entre suciedad en el sistema.

 El desmontaje sólo deberá hacerlo personal calificado y autorizado.

16.2 Desmontaje
 Etiquetar todas las piezas y proteger las partes del polvo o golpes.

 Registrar secuencia de desarme, utilizando registro fotográfico, si es necesario.

 Inspeccionar todas las piezas durante el proceso de desmontaje, en busca de

desperfectos o desgaste.

PRAXA INGENIERÍA SpA

CORREAS CV112 – CV113 – CV114 Página 42 de 51

 Si se va a vaciar y reutilizar el aceite hidráulico, asegurarse de que los recipientes

están limpios y tapados cuando no se usen.

 Limpiar todas las piezas de metal usando un solvente adecuado antes del desmontaje.
Ponerlas a un lado sobre un paño limpio y que no suelte pelusas.

16.3 Montaje

 Lubricar con aceite hidráulico las zonas de contacto y sellos.

 Sustituir todos los sellos, de las partes desarmadas.

 Iniciar el armado en secuencia contraria al sentido de desarme, anteriormente

registrado.

 Asegurar la hermeticidad total en las conexiones.

 Verificar etiquetado de las partes a instalar.

 Inspeccionar visualmente los componentes a instalar, en busca de defectos no

detectados anteriormente.

 Rellenar el depósito de aceite, si es necesario

17) CAMBIO DE LA UNIDAD DE MOTOR ELÉCTRICO/BOMBA

 El método más común para cambiar la bomba es levantar el conjunto de motor

 eléctrico/bomba y quitar entonces la bomba.

 El motor eléctrico y la bomba van montados como una unidad sobre la placa de
soporte del motor, unidos al bastidor mediante elementos antivibración.

1. Quitar el techo y el amortiguador de ruidos:

2. Soltar la placa de soporte del motor: Soltar del bastidor la placa de soporte
del motor.

3. Montar los elementos de levante: Montar los elementos de levante en los

cuatro agujeros de las esquinas de la placa de soporte del motor.

PRAXA INGENIERÍA SpA

CORREAS CV112 – CV113 – CV114 Página 43 de 51

4. Elevar la unidad de motor eléctrico/bomba: Tener cuidado y tomar en

consideración el peso y el centro de gravedad. No dejar nunca que la unidad de
motor eléctrico/bomba descanse sobre la bomba de carga.

5. Montaje: Montar en el orden opuesto, según los puntos anteriores

18) LOCALIZACIÓN DE AVERÍAS

Averías Causa probable Solución

El motor eléctrico no tiene Buscar la causa en la red de energía
El grupo motor
tensión de red. eléctrica.
no arranca.
Buscar la causa en la red de alimentación de
energía eléctrica.
Falta de tensión de control.
Examinar el sistema de control en el grupo
hidráulico. Si se ha disparado el sistema de
control, averiguar la causa.
No hay presión en el servo. No hay corriente en el control
El grupo motor no
electrohidráulico de cilindrada. Examinar la
suministra caudal función del control o la tarjeta electrónica.
de aceite.
Acoplamiento de bomba/motor Controlar por el agujero de inspección de la
eléctrico defectuoso. campana.
Sentido de rotación incorrecto Controlar el sentido de rotación.
de la bomba hidráulica.
La carga es demasiado grande. Comprobar que la presión de trabajo puede
ser demasiado baja, de forma que dispara el
compensador, reduciendo el caudal de la
bomba.
La tubería de aspiración está cerrada. Abrir la válvula de la línea de aspiración.
Ruido anormal.
Presión de alimentación demasiado Comprobar que es correcta la presión de
baja o ausente. alimentación.

Entrada de aire. Comprobar que la bomba de alimentación no

Cavitación de la bomba. aspira aire la tubería de aspiración. Probar
vertiendo aceite sobre las juntas de los tubos
y escuchando cambios del ruido de la bomba.

Filtro de aire obturado en el depósito. Cambiar el filtro.

Estrella del acoplamiento elástico Cambiar la estrella.
gastado.
Sentido de rotación incorrecto. Invertir el sentido de rotación.

PRAXA INGENIERÍA SpA

CORREAS CV112 – CV113 – CV114 Página 44 de 51

Averías Causa probable Solución

No hay presión El grupo hidráulico no alimenta aceite. Realizar las medidas descritas anteriormente.
en el sistema.
El control piloto de alta presión no
cierra. Limpiar y reparar el control piloto de alta presión

Válvulas adicionales en la bomba. Controlar las válvulas adicionales en la bomba.

Desgaste Viscosidad demasiado baja. Comparar con nuestras recomendaciones para

excesivo. el aceite.
Controlar la temperatura del aceite y el circuito
de refrigeración.

Material abrasivo que circula por la Controlar los filtros y cambiar si es necesario.
bomba con el fluido hidráulico. Comprobar que se efectúan los cambios en los
intervalos prescritos.
Aire en el sistema hidráulico. Localizar y remediar fuga de aire en el sistema.
Cavitación de la bomba. Purgar el aire del sistema.
Contenido de agua demasiado alto Inspeccionar el fluido hidráulico y cambiar el
en el fluido hidráulico. aceite.
Alta temperatura Capacidad de refrigeración Controlar el caudal de agua de refrigeración, el
del aceite. deficiente. enfriador, la válvula de agua y el filtro de agua
o el enfriador de aire (opcional).
Fuga interna en la bomba. Cambiar o reparar la bomba.
Una cantidad demasiada pequeña Controlar que la bomba de carga proporciona
de aceite de reemplazo en el suficiente aceite de enjuague.
sistema hidráulico.
Alta temperatura No hay intercambio de aceite en el Comprobar la presión de alimentación y el
del aceite en el circuito cerrado. taraje de la válvula selectora.
circuito cerrado.

PRAXA INGENIERÍA SpA

CORREAS CV112 – CV113 – CV114 Página 45 de 51

Fallo Causa probable Medida

Controlar la presión del sistema. Si la
Parada mecánica en el siste-
presión ha alcanzado valor de ajuste de la
ma.
válvula de seguridad, sacar la carga del
sistema.
El motor no proporciona par
suficiente debido a presión Controlar el nivel de presión en el sistema.
diferencial baja por el motor en Corregir el ajuste de la válvula de seguridad
relación con la carga. si se necesario.
El motor del Huinche no
Desmontar el acoplamiento de seguridad y el
funciona
distribuidor. Si los semiacoplamientos se han
desplazado entre sí, devolverlos a la
Se han cambiado los ajustes posición original usando el agujero de
del distribuidor. indicación (Ø 3 mm).
Luego, colocar pasadores nuevos:
CP 6 x 14 mm.
con el mismo radio que los pasadores
originales.
El motor no recibe aceite o Revisar el sistema hidráulico. Ver si hay
recibe aceite insuficiente. fugas externas en el motor (conexión “D”)

El motor gira en sentido Conexiones de aceite incorrectas. Cambiar les conexiones.

incorrecto
Desmontar el distribuidor y el acoplamiento
Distribuidor mal montado.
de seguridad y montarlos para la rotación
correcta.
Fluctuaciones de presión o Revisar el sistema hidráulico o la
caudal ene l sistema hidráulico. transmisión mecánica.
Desmontar el acoplamiento de seguridad y el
El motor marcha irregular distribuidor. Si los semiacoplamientos se han
mente desplazado entre sí, devolverlos a la
Se han cambiado los ajustes posición original usando el agujero de
del distribuidor. indicación (Ø 3 mm).
Luego, colocar pasadores nuevos:
CP 6 x 14 mm
taladrando con el mismo radio que los
pasadores originales.

PRAXA INGENIERÍA SpA

CORREAS CV112 – CV113 – CV114 Página 46 de 51

El motor funciona con presión Ajustar al nivel correcto. Ver 2.1” Presión
de suministro demasiado baja. de suministro recomendada”.
Desmontar el acoplamiento de seguridad y el
distribuidor. Si los semi acoplamientos se
han desplazado entre sí, devolverlos a la
Se han cambiado los ajustes posición original usando el agujero de
del distribuidor. indicación (Ø 3 mm).
Ruido en el motor Luego, colocar pasadores nuevos:
CP 6 x 14 mm
con el mismo radio que los pasadores
originales.
Si es posible, examinar el aciete de drenaje.
Poner un imán en el flujo de aceite y
examinar cualquier material que se adhiera
Fallo interno del motor.
en el mismo. Las partícu- las de acero
indican avería. Nota: las partículas de hierro
fundido fino se sueltan continuamente y, por
tanto, no indican necesariamente una avería
interna.
Fugas de aceite externas
El retén del extremo delantero
en el motor. Cambiar el retén.
está gastado.

PRAXA INGENIERÍA SpA

CORREAS CV112 – CV113 – CV114 Página 47 de 51

19) DIAGRAMA HIDRÁULICO Y LISTA DE PARTES

PRAXA INGENIERÍA SpA

Uno Norte #180 KM 10 Camino a Coronel Barrio Industrial Logistock Bodega 2 San Pedro De La Paz, Concepción
Caution!
Connections depending
on rotation and mounting.
D1
A C

D2
10.027 Air/Oil cooler: HDC 080-4
Ambient temperature, design: max 30°C
10.004
Ø3/4"
Electrical motor power: 1,2 kW; 575V/50Hz
Weight: ~105 kg F
24.03 *MDA brake not mounted on
the motor, but same shaft.
10.026 24.04
24.05 24.01 24.02
Ø11/4" Ø11/4"
Ø1/2" 24.04

D RF2 C2 C1 RB1 11/4" cod.62 A B 11/4" cod.62

10.015
8 bar

10.025
12.214
11.034 11.018 3

03.008

03.007
P A B T
25 bar
12.215 SP 180
M NG6 03.006
12.153 02.082 02.083 02.086 01.002

P A B T
12.222 PUMP SP180
V = 180 cm³/rev
P = 75 kW; 575V/50Hz 01.001
12.210 n = 1480 rpm
p_max 350 bar 02.226 02.081

P 5 02.080
02.064
02.068 02.070
12.152 02.001
4

13.011
12.154 02.066
0,5 bar
13.007 02.039 02.058
19.003 P
0,5 bar 6 2

13.075 13.032 02.222 2

Oil filling
02.224
13.033

13.081 19.001

9
02.060 02.062
P
5* 1
13.001

13.070 19.035

02.037
13.074
13.080
13.071
Oil level settings Temperature settings 13.012 11.049
9 Level from tank top: Max (Alarm): 63°C 02.035
Max (Warning): 115mm High (Interlock): 60°C 0,5 bar
Low(Warning): 220mm High (Warning): 55°C
Min (Alarm): 273mm Start cooling: 40°C 16.006 11.045
11.023 16.002
Start heating: 15°C
Min (Alarm): 10°C
5 bar
4-20 mA 16.005
11.051 11.071
11.019 16.004 11.010 Power:670W
4-20 mA
Voltage: 575 VAC
11.004
Tank oil volume: 120 l
Oil type, design: ISO VG 68 09.001

PUMP SETTINGS Filters 9. 23.020

1. Charge pressure: 20 bar
CUSTOMER CONNECTION POINTS
Contamination switch: Δp 2.2 bar Weight complete DU, oil tank empty: 2250 kg
2. High pressure relief valves (Crossover relief valves): 300 bar CONNECTIONS LABEL
By-pass: Δp 3.5 bar
3. Pump compensator pressure: 200 bar "A" 1 1/4" SAE J518C FLANGE Pump SP180, A-Port
4. Control pressure, internal: 30 bar
(Signal lock-out at oil temperature < 30°C) "B" CODE 62 - 6000 PSI Pump SP180, B-Port
5. Charge and brake pressure transmitter: 4-20 mA / 0-250 bar "C1" ISO 8434-1 42L Male Oil OUT to cooler
"C2" Oil IN from cooler
6. System pressure transmitter: 4-20 mA / 0-400 bar
7. Variable compensation pressure 4-20 mA / 10-350 bar "D" ISO 8434-1 35L Male Drain from hydraulic motor
"RF2" ISO 8434-1 28L Male Oil OUT flushing motor
* Alarm at 8 Bar falling "RB1" ISO 8434-1 12L Male Oil OUT Brake hyd. motor

Número Orden de Trabajo: Item: Cantidad: Número Licitación: Descripción: Orden de trabajo:
4600017842 Huinche Hidráulico
Fecha: Referencia: Date: Titulo:
División Radomiro Tomic HU6 0750 2020-03-12 Diagrama Hidraulico UH 932-19
Departamento: Peso kg: Dibujo: Revisado: Aprobado: Proyecto: Revisión: Escala:

J.M.A. J.M.A. A.A.S. Sistema tensor Correa CV112, Línea Critica 0

Área: Diseñado: Número Plano: Fase: Hoja:

Praxa PRAXA 1
93219-01-01
Ingeniería
Por Firma Apr. Firma Número Plano: Fecha: N° de hojas:
Rev. N° Fecha Revisión Documentos de Referencia Nro. Documento NOTAS
Praxa Praxa 08/07/2021 0 3
Caution!
Connections depending
on rotation and mounting.
D1
A C

D RF2 C2 C1 RB1 11/4" cod.62 A B 11/4" cod.62

10.015
8 bar

10.025
12.214
11.034 11.018 3

03.008

03.007
P A B T
25 bar
12.215 SP 180
M NG6 03.006
12.153 02.082 02.083 02.086 01.002

P A B T
12.222 PUMP SP180
V = 180 cm³/rev
P = 75 kW; 575V/50Hz 01.001
12.210 n = 1480 rpm
p_max 350 bar 02.226 02.081

P 5 02.080
02.064
02.068 02.070
12.152 02.001
4

13.011
12.154 02.066
0,5 bar
13.007 02.039 02.058
19.003 P
0,5 bar 6 2

13.075 13.032 02.222 2

Oil filling
02.224
13.033

13.081 19.001

9
02.060 02.062
P
5* 1
13.001

13.070 19.035

PUMP SETTINGS Filters 9. 23.020

1. Charge pressure: 20 bar
CUSTOMER CONNECTION POINTS
Contamination switch: Δp 2.2 bar Weight complete DU, oil tank empty: 2250 kg
2. High pressure relief valves (Crossover relief valves): 300 bar CONNECTIONS LABEL
By-pass: Δp 3.5 bar
3. Pump compensator pressure: 211 bar "A" 1 1/4" SAE J518C FLANGE Pump SP180, A-Port
4. Control pressure, internal: 30 bar
(Signal lock-out at oil temperature < 30°C) "B" CODE 62 - 6000 PSI Pump SP180, B-Port
5. Charge and brake pressure transmitter: 4-20 mA / 0-250 bar "C1" ISO 8434-1 42L Male Oil OUT to cooler
"C2" Oil IN from cooler
6. System pressure transmitter: 4-20 mA / 0-400 bar
7. Variable compensation pressure 4-20 mA / 10-350 bar "D" ISO 8434-1 35L Male Drain from hydraulic motor
"RF2" ISO 8434-1 28L Male Oil OUT flushing motor
* Alarm at 8 Bar falling "RB1" ISO 8434-1 12L Male Oil OUT Brake hyd. motor

J.M.A. J.M.A. A.A.S. Sistema tensor Correa CV113, Línea Critica 0

Área: Diseñado: Número Plano: Fase: Hoja:

Praxa PRAXA 2
93219-01-01
Ingeniería
Por Firma Apr. Firma Número Plano: Fecha: N° de hojas:
Rev. N° Fecha Revisión Documentos de Referencia Nro. Documento NOTAS
Praxa Praxa 08/07/2021 0 3
Caution!
Connections depending
on rotation and mounting.
D1
A C

D2
10.027 Air/Oil cooler: HDC 080-4
Ambient temperature, design: max 30°C
10.004
Ø3/4"
Electrical motor power: 1,2 kW; 575V/50Hz
Weight: ~105 kg F
26.03 *MDA brake not mounted on
the motor, but same shaft.
10.026 26.04
26.05 26.01 26.02
Ø11/4" Ø11/4"
Ø1/2" 26.04

D RF2 C2 C1 RB1 11/4" cod.62 A B 11/4" cod.62

10.015
8 bar

10.025
12.214
11.034 11.018 3

03.008

03.007
P A B T
25 bar
12.215 SP 180
M NG6 03.006
12.153 02.082 02.083 02.086 01.002

P A B T
12.222 PUMP SP180
V = 180 cm³/rev
P = 75 kW; 575V/50Hz 01.001
12.210 n = 1480 rpm
p_max 350 bar 02.226 02.081

P 5 02.080
02.064
02.068 02.070
12.152 02.001
4

13.011
12.154 02.066
0,5 bar
13.007 02.039 02.058
19.003 P
0,5 bar 6 2

13.075 13.032 02.222 2

Oil filling
02.224
13.033

13.081 19.001

9
02.060 02.062
P
5* 1
13.001

13.070 19.035

PUMP SETTINGS Filters 9.

1. Charge pressure: 20 bar
CUSTOMER CONNECTION POINTS 23.020
Contamination switch: Δp 2.2 bar Weight complete DU, oil tank empty: 2250 kg
2. High pressure relief valves (Crossover relief valves): 300 bar CONNECTIONS LABEL
By-pass: Δp 3.5 bar
3. Pump compensator pressure: 205 bar "A" 1 1/4" SAE J518C FLANGE Pump SP180, A-Port
4. Control pressure, internal: 30 bar
(Signal lock-out at oil temperature < 30°C) "B" CODE 62 - 6000 PSI Pump SP180, B-Port
5. Charge and brake pressure transmitter: 4-20 mA / 0-250 bar "C1" ISO 8434-1 42L Male Oil OUT to cooler
"C2" Oil IN from cooler
6. System pressure transmitter: 4-20 mA / 0-400 bar
7. Variable compensation pressure 4-20 mA / 10-350 bar "D" ISO 8434-1 35L Male Drain from hydraulic motor
"RF2" ISO 8434-1 28L Male Oil OUT flushing motor
* Alarm at 8 Bar falling "RB1" ISO 8434-1 12L Male Oil OUT Brake hyd. motor

J.M.A. J.M.A. A.A.S. Sistema tensor Correa CV114, Línea Critica 0

Área: Diseñado: Número Plano: Fase: Hoja:

Praxa PRAXA 3
93219-01-01
Ingeniería
Por Firma Apr. Firma Número Plano: Fecha: N° de hojas:
Rev. N° Fecha Revisión Documentos de Referencia Nro. Documento NOTAS
Praxa Praxa 08/07/2021 0 3
Nro OT 4600017842 Página: 1
Nro Praxa LM93219-01-01 Cant. Pág.: 3
Nro Codelco Pl. Referencia: 93219-01-01
Numero Ref. Lista de Componentes
dd00108708 Unidad Hidraulica de Sistema Tensor
Correas CV112, CV113 y CV114
Codelco División Radomiro Tomic
Rev. 1 Generado por J.M.A. Modelo Huinche HTC-12-75-2X639/600
Fecha 8/7/2021 Aprobado por A.A.S [Link] Hid. PUC-102-180-75-575/50HZ
Pos. Cant. Unid. Codigo Descripción Modelo Marca
1.001 1 c/u PUC93219-0101-1.001 [Link],3-PHASE 1LE1603-2DB09-0GB4-Z B02+M1Y+Q02+R53 BOSCH REXROTH
1.002 1 c/u PUC93219-0101-1.002 COUPLING R75.75 L=85 BOSCH REXROTH
2.001 1 c/u PUC93219-0101-2.001 AXIAL-PISTON PUMP SP 180-SR-V-EP2435703 BOSCH REXROTH
2.035 1 c/u PUC93219-0101-2.035 HOSE G4H-38/0900/P86-24-42/P613-24-16 BOSCH REXROTH
2.037 1 c/u PUC93219-0101-2.037 HOSE R1-12/1550/P86-12-22/P87-12-22 BOSCH REXROTH
2.039 1 c/u PUC93219-0101-2.039 HOSE R1-12/1100/P86-12-22L/P87-12-22L BOSCH REXROTH
2.058 1 m PUC93219-0101-2.058 MEASURING COUPLING MCS20-24SWOS-Z-10S-ST3N00Z-M BOSCH REXROTH
2.06 1 c/u PUC93219-0101-2.06 MEASURING COUPLING MCS20-24SWOS-Z-10S-ST3N00Z-M BOSCH REXROTH
2.062 1 c/u PUC93219-0101-2.062 MEASURING COUPLING MCS20-24SWOS-Z-10S-ST3N00Z-M BOSCH REXROTH
2.064 1 c/u PUC93219-0101-2.064 MEASURING COUPLING MCS20-SDS-F-U9/16-18-ST3N00Z-M BOSCH REXROTH
2.066 1 c/u PUC93219-0101-2.066 MEASURING COUPLING MCS20-SDS-F-U9/16-18-ST3N00Z-M BOSCH REXROTH
2.068 1 c/u PUC93219-0101-2.068 MEASURING COUPLING MCS20-SDS-E-M14X1,5-ST3N00Z-M BOSCH REXROTH
2.07 1 c/u PUC93219-0101-2.07 MEASURING COUPLING MCS20-SDS-F-U9/16-18-ST3N00Z-M BOSCH REXROTH
2.082 1 c/u PUC93219-0101-2.082 CONTROL MODULE A4VSG125/180EPD/30X-V BOSCH REXROTH
2.083 1 c/u PUC93219-0101-2.083 PROPORTIONAL SOLENOID A4CSG 125 355 EP BOSCH REXROTH
2.086 1 c/u PUC93219-0101-2.086 PROPORTIONAL SOLENOID A4CSG 125 355 EP BOSCH REXROTH
2.222 1 c/u PUC93219-0101-2.222 HOSE R1-04/0600/P86-04-08L/P87-04-08L BOSCH REXROTH
2.224 1 c/u PUC93219-0101-2.224 HOSE R1-04/0300/P86-04-08L/P87-04-08L BOSCH REXROTH
3.006 1 c/u PUC93219-0101-3.006 HUB R75.2.3/50X2 X24X7H L=75 BOSCH REXROTH
3.007 1 c/u PUC93219-0101-3.007 RING GEAR ROTEX75-98SHA/T-PUR BOSCH REXROTH
3.008 4 c/u PUC93219-0101-3.008 SHOCK ABSORBER RA-800 B BOSCH REXROTH
9.001 1 c/u PUC93219-0101-9.001 RADIATOR OE331/K7-575V-670W BOSCH REXROTH
10.004 1 c/u PUC93219-0101-10.004 OIL-AIR COOLER HDC 080 A 4 O 03 20 40 0 4 0 00 BOSCH REXROTH
10.015 1 m PUC93219-0101-10.015 HY-CHECK VALVE VU1F1FU BOSCH REXROTH
10.025 1 c/u PUC93219-0101-10.025 HOSE R1-16/0600/P86-16-28/P86-16-28 BOSCH REXROTH
10.026 1 c/u PUC93219-0101-10.026 HOSE R1-16/1150/P86-16-28/P87-16-28 BOSCH REXROTH
10.027 1 c/u PUC93219-0101-10.027 HOSE R1-16/1100/P86-16-28/P88-16-28 BOSCH REXROTH
11.004 1 c/u PUC93219-0101-11.004 BALL VALVE 1'' BOSCH REXROTH
11.01 1 c/u PUC93219-0101-11.01 OIL GAUGE AB31-21/254 BOSCH REXROTH
11.018 1 c/u PUC93219-0101-11.018 HOSE R1-24/0800/P86-24-42/P88-24-42 BOSCH REXROTH
Nro OT 4600017842 Página: 2
Nro Praxa LM93219-01-01 Cant. Pág.: 3
Nro Codelco Pl. Referencia: 93219-01-01
Numero Ref. Lista de Componentes
dd00108708 Unidad Hidraulica de Sistema Tensor
Correas CV112, CV113 y CV114
Codelco División Radomiro Tomic
Rev. 1 Generado por J.M.A. Modelo Huinche HTC-12-75-2X639/600
Fecha 8/7/2021 Aprobado por A.A.S [Link] Hid. PUC-102-180-75-575/50HZ
Pos. Cant. Unid. Codigo Descripción Modelo Marca
11.019 1 c/u PUC93219-0101-11.019 HOSE R1-24/1300/P86-24-42/P87-24-42 BOSCH REXROTH
11.023 1 c/u PUC93219-0101-11.023 HY-CHECK VALVE VU112F112FM BOSCH REXROTH
11.034 1 c/u PUC93219-0101-11.034 HOSE R1-16/0900/P86-16-28/P87-16-28 BOSCH REXROTH
11.045 1 c/u PUC93219-0101-11.045 HOSE R1-04/1300/P86-04-10L/P86-04-10L BOSCH REXROTH
11.049 1 c/u PUC93219-0101-11.049 HY-CHECK VALVE VU38F38FB BOSCH REXROTH
11.051 1 c/u PUC93219-0101-11.051 BUTTERFLY VALVE SDA00063AB01/AF-63 BOSCH REXROTH
11.071 1 c/u PUC93219-0101-11.071 POSITION SWITCH AZD1051 BOSCH REXROTH
12.152 1 c/u PUC93219-0101-12.152 HOSE R1-06/0600/P86-06-10L/P87-06-10L BOSCH REXROTH
12.153 1 c/u PUC93219-0101-12.153 HOSE R1-06/1700/P86-06-12L/P87-06-12L BOSCH REXROTH
12.154 1 c/u PUC93219-0101-12.154 HOSE R1-06/1100/P86-06-15/P87-06-15 BOSCH REXROTH
12.21 1 c/u PUC93219-0101-12.21 PRESSURE TRANSDUCER HM 20-2X/250-C-K35-N BOSCH REXROTH
12.214 1 c/u PUC93219-0101-12.214 DIRECTIONAL SPOOL VALVE 4WE 6 D6X/EG24N9K4 BOSCH REXROTH
12.215 1 c/u PUC93219-0101-12.215 PRESSURE REDUCING VALVE ZDR 6 DP2-4X/75YM BOSCH REXROTH
12.222 1 c/u PUC93219-0101-12.222 MEASURING COUPLING MCS20-24SWOS-Z-08L-ST3N00Z-M BOSCH REXROTH
13.001 1 c/u PUC93219-0101-13.001 FILTER HDF D 050 250 10 1 00 00 BOSCH REXROTH
13.007 1 c/u PUC93219-0101-13.007 HY-CHECK VALVE VU114F114FB BOSCH REXROTH
13.011 1 c/u PUC93219-0101-13.011 HOSE R1-20/1350/P86-20-35/P86-20-35 BOSCH REXROTH
13.012 1 c/u PUC93219-0101-13.012 HOSE R1-24/1450/P86-24-42/P87-24-42 BOSCH REXROTH
13.032 1 c/u PUC93219-0101-13.032 CONNECTOR PLUG 10 795 6103 SERIE 795 BOSCH REXROTH
13.033 1 c/u PUC93219-0101-13.033 COUPLING BOX 10 795 1103 SERIE 795 BOSCH REXROTH
13.07 1 c/u PUC93219-0101-13.07 FILTER INSERT 250-10-BR BOSCH REXROTH
13.071 1 c/u PUC93219-0101-13.071 FILTER INSERT 250-10-BR BOSCH REXROTH
13.074 1 c/u PUC93219-0101-13.074 FILTER HDF D 050 250 10 1 00 00 BOSCH REXROTH
13.075 1 c/u PUC93219-0101-13.075 HY-CHECK VALVE VU114F114FB BOSCH REXROTH
13.08 1 c/u PUC93219-0101-13.08 CLOGGING INDICATOR WE-2SPSU-M12X1 BOSCH REXROTH
Nro OT 4600017842 Página: 3
Nro Praxa LM93219-01-01 Cant. Pág.: 3
Nro Codelco Pl. Referencia: 93219-01-01
Numero Ref. Lista de Componentes
dd00108708 Unidad Hidraulica de Sistema Tensor
Correas CV112, CV113 y CV114
Codelco División Radomiro Tomic
Rev. 1 Generado por J.M.A. Modelo Huinche HTC-12-75-2X639/600
Fecha 8/7/2021 Aprobado por A.A.S [Link] Hid. PUC-102-180-75-575/50HZ
Pos. Cant. Unid. Codigo Descripción Modelo Marca
13.081 1 c/u PUC93219-0101-13.081 CLOGGING INDICATOR WE-2SPSU-M12X1 BOSCH REXROTH
16.002 1 c/u PUC93219-0101-16.002 FLOAT SWITCH ABZMS-41-1X/0500/RTA/DC-K24 BOSCH REXROTH
16.004 1 c/u PUC93219-0101-16.004 COMPENSATOR FSC0006-2-01-01 BOSCH REXROTH
16.005 1 c/u PUC93219-0101-16.005 AIR FILTER BFP 3G3W1,0 BOSCH REXROTH
16.006 1 c/u PUC93219-0101-16.006 AIR FILTER BF P 3 G 3 W 6.0 /-RV BOSCH REXROTH
19.001 1 c/u PUC93219-0101-19.001 PRESSURE TRANSDUCER HM 20-2X/250-C-K35-N BOSCH REXROTH
19.003 1 c/u PUC93219-0101-19.003 PRESSURE TRANSDUCER HM 20-2X/400-C-K35 BOSCH REXROTH
19.035 1 c/u PUC93219-0101-19.035 MEASURING COUPLING MCS20-24SWOS-Z-10S-ST3N00Z-M BOSCH REXROTH
23.02 4 c/u PUC93219-0101-23.02 MACHINE FOOT TF 1200 BOSCH REXROTH
24.01 1 c/u PUC93219-0101-24.01 HOSE R2AT-1"/3300/HG28L/HG1"JIC PRAXA
24.02 1 c/u PUC93219-0101-24.02 HOSE R2AT-1/2"/3200/HG12L/HG1/2"JIC PRAXA
24.03 1 c/u PUC93219-0101-24.03 HOSE R2AT-3/4"/1000/HG3/4"JIC/90°HG3/4"JIC PRAXA
24.04 2 c/u PUC93219-0101-24.04 HOSE R13-11/4"/3700/90°11/4"cod.62/HG11/4"JIC PRAXA
24.05 1 c/u PUC93219-0101-24.05 HOSE R2AT-11/4"/3300/HG35L/HG11/4"JIC PRAXA
25.01 1 c/u PUC93219-0101-25.01 HOSE R2AT-1"/2400/HG28L/HG1"JIC PRAXA
25.02 1 c/u PUC93219-0101-25.02 HOSE R2AT-1/2"/2400/HG12L/HG1/2"JIC PRAXA
25.03 1 c/u PUC93219-0101-25.03 HOSE R2AT-3/4"/1000/HG3/4"JIC/90°HG3/4"JIC PRAXA
25.04 2 c/u PUC93219-0101-25.04 HOSE R13-11/4"/2700/90°11/4"cod.62/HG11/4"JIC PRAXA
25.05 1 c/u PUC93219-0101-25.05 HOSE R2AT-11/4"/2400/HG35L/HG11/4"JIC PRAXA
26.01 1 c/u PUC93219-0101-26.01 HOSE R2AT-1"/2100/HG28L/HG1"JIC PRAXA
26.02 1 c/u PUC93219-0101-26.02 HOSE R2AT-1/2"/2200/HG12L/HG1/2"JIC PRAXA
26.03 1 c/u PUC93219-0101-26.03 HOSE R2AT-3/4"/1000/HG3/4"JIC/90°HG3/4"JIC PRAXA
26.04 2 c/u PUC93219-0101-26.04 HOSE R13-11/4"/2400/90°11/4"cod.62/HG11/4"JIC PRAXA
26.05 1 c/u PUC93219-0101-26.05 HOSE R2AT-11/4"/2100/HG35L/HG11/4"JIC PRAXA
MANUAL DE OPERACIÓN Y MANTENCIÓN SISTEMA Código
HUINCHES TENSORES LINEA CRITICA Versión 1.0

CORREAS CV112 – CV113 – CV114 Página 48 de 51

20) ARREGLO GENERAL UNIDAD HIDRAULICA

PRAXA INGENIERÍA SpA

Uno Norte #180 KM 10 Camino a Coronel Barrio Industrial Logistock Bodega 2 San Pedro De La Paz, Concepción
FRONT VIEW SIDE VIEW LEFT Air inlet BACK VIEW
Electric motor
cable entry
~2522
2268

2125
1950
1850
1740
1700
320
90

50 CC 1900 min 30 746

2000 50 CC 1400 1061
1500 ~42 1921
~2603 ~2240

TOP VIEW
min 900

C1 C2
VIEWS WITHOUT DOORS AND PANELS D

RF2
RB1
Ø400
Cut out for motor fan cover

min 1100 min 700

275 (Inner ceiling placement)

~2307
CUSTOMER CONNECTION POINTS
CONNECTIONS LABEL
"A" 1 1/4" SAE J518C FLANGE Pump SP180, A-Port
"B" CODE 62 - 6000 PSI Pump SP180, B-Port
"C1" ISO 8434-1 42L Male Oil OUT to cooler
"C2" Oil IN from cooler

1225
"D" ISO 8434-1 35L Male Drain from hydraulic motor
A "RF2" ISO 8434-1 28L Male Oil OUT flushing hydr. motor
B

~729
A B "RB1" ISO 8434-1 12L Male Oil OUT to brake
min 1500

~678 ~708 83

For location of major components and

interface connections, see INSTALLATION
AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL DUE.
Número Orden de Trabajo: Item: Cantidad: Número Licitación: Descripción: Orden de trabajo:
4600017842 Huinche Hidráulico
Fecha: Referencia: Date: Titulo:
División Radomiro Tomic HU6 0749 2020-03-12 Arreglo General UH 932-19
Departamento: Peso kg: Dibujo: Revisado: Aprobado: Proyecto: Revisión: Escala:

J.M.A. A.A.S. Sistema tensor Correa CV112-113-114 DRT 1

Área: Diseñado: Número Plano: Fase: Hoja:

Praxa PRAXA 1
93219-02-10
Ingeniería
Por Firma Apr. Firma Número Plano: Fecha: N° de hojas:
Rev. N° Fecha Revisión Documentos de Referencia Nro. Documento NOTAS
Praxa Praxa 16/08/2021 0 1
MANUAL DE OPERACIÓN Y MANTENCIÓN SISTEMA Código
HUINCHES TENSORES LINEA CRITICA Versión 1.0

CORREAS CV112 – CV113 – CV114 Página 49 de 51

21) ARREGLO GENERAL HUINCHE Y LISTA DE PARTES

PRAXA INGENIERÍA SpA

Uno Norte #180 KM 10 Camino a Coronel Barrio Industrial Logistock Bodega 2 San Pedro De La Paz, Concepción
09 14 04 03 01
07 06 20 19 18 07 06
15 02
08

ELEVACION CONJUNTO HUINCHE ELEVACION MOTOR HUINCHE

esc.: 1/7.5 esc.: 1/7.5

10 11 12 14

21 16 21

ELEVACION MOTOR HUINCHE

esc.: 1/7.5

PLANTA CONJUNTO HUINCHE

esc.: 1/7.5

Número Orden de Trabajo: Item: Cantidad: Número Licitación: Descripción: Orden de trabajo:
Huinche Hidráulico
Fecha: Dirección: Titulo:
División Radomiro Tomic Plano de Conjunto Huinche 932-19
Departamento: Peso kg: Dibujo: Revisado: Aprobado: Proyecto: Revisión: Escala:

J.M.A. A.A.S. Sistema tensor Correa CV112-113-114 DRT 1

Área: Diseñado: Número Plano: Fase: Hoja:

. Praxa PRAXA 1
93219-02-01
Ingeniería
Por Firma Apr. Firma Número Plano: Fecha: N° de hojas:
Rev. N° Fecha Revisión Documentos de Referencia Nro. Documento NOTAS
Praxa Praxa 16/08/2021 0 1
Nro OT 4600017842 Página: 1
Nro Praxa 932-19 Cant. Pág.: 1 de 1
Nro Codelco Pl. Referencia: 93219-02-01
Nombre Documento Lista de Componentes
Huinche para Sistema Tensor
Correas CV112, CV113 y CV114
Codelco División Radomiro Tomic
Rev. 1 Generado por J.M.A. Modelo Huinche HTC-12-75-2X639/600
Fecha 16/8/2021 Aprobado por A.A.S [Link] Hid. PUC-102-180-75-575/50HZ
Pos. Cant. Unid. Codigo Descripción Modelo Marca
01 1 c/u HTC 932-19-01 MOTOR HIDRÁULICO VIKING MK 64 16300 A0 XN 01 00 BOSH REXROTH
02 1 c/u HTC 932-19-02 FRENO MOTOR HIDRÁULICO MDA 21 95 N 0 00 BOSH REXROTH
03 1 c/u HTC 932-19-03 SPEED ENCODER SPLL85D-2500 BOSH REXROTH
04 1 c/u HTC 932-19-04 KID MONTAJE SPEED ENCODER SM 64 100 BOSH REXROTH
05 1 c/u HTC 932-19-05 EJE TAMBOR 93219-02-08 PRAXA
06 2 c/u HTC 932-19-06 CONJUNTO TAMBOR 93219-02-02 PRAXA
CASCABEL 6x36
07 40 m HTC 932-19-07 CABLE 1 1/8"(29mm)EXTRA MEJORADO KUPFER
WARRINGTON SEALE (ca-56)
08 1 c/u HTC 932-19-08 SOPORTE MOTOR HIDRÁULICO 93219-02-05 PRAXA
09 1 c/u HTC 932-19-09 SOPORTE FRENO HIDRÁULICO 93219-02-03 PRAXA
10 1 c/u HTC 932-19-10 CONSOLA EJE MOTOR - HUINCHE 93219-02-04 PRAXA
11 4 c/u HTC 932-19-11 PERNO PARKER M12X50 C/GOLILLA [Link]. DIN 912x10,9 PRAXA
12 4 c/u HTC 932-19-12 PERNO PARKER M12X50 C/GOLILLA [Link]. DIN 912x10,9 PRAXA
13 1 c/u HTC 932-19-13 PLACA BASE 93219-02-06 PRAXA
14 24 c/u HTC 932-19-14 PERNO PARKER M20x75 C/GOLILLA [Link]. DIN 912x12,9 PRAXA
15 22 c/u HTC 932-19-15 PERNO PARKER M20x80 C/GOLILLA [Link]. DIN 912x10,9 PRAXA
16 4 c/u HTC 932-19-16 PERNO PARKER M24x120 C/GOLILLA [Link]. DIN 912x10,9 PRAXA
17 10 c/u HTC 932-19-17 PERNO CABEZA HEX 1 1/2x 5" C/TUERCA GOLILLA [Link]. DIN 931x8,8 PRAXA
18 1 c/u HTC 932-19-18 GRASERA M6x1 PRAXA
19 1 c/u HTC 932-19-19 DESCANSO SD3134 PRAXA
20 1 c/u HTC 932-19-20 RODAMIENTO 23134K PRAXA
21 4 c/u HTC 932-19-21 RODAMIENTO 23134K PRAXA
22 8 c/u HTC 932-19-22 PERNO PARKER M12X30 C/GOLILLA [Link]. DIN 912x10,9 PRAXA
MANUAL DE OPERACIÓN Y MANTENCIÓN SISTEMA Código
HUINCHES TENSORES LINEA CRITICA Versión 1.0

CORREAS CV112 – CV113 – CV114 Página 50 de 51

22) PLANOS ELÉCTRICOS DE FUERZA Y CONTROL

PRAXA INGENIERÍA SpA

Uno Norte #180 KM 10 Camino a Coronel Barrio Industrial Logistock Bodega 2 San Pedro De La Paz, Concepción
DRIVE UNIT
SPIDER CONTROL SYSTEM
MOUNTED ON LEFT OUTSIDE OF DRIVE UNIT I/O BOX 01
01 011
BLUE 0VDC 0V 1/3 (TYPE 5, Xm)
(0VDC) DI1:1
BROWN +24VDC Un 1/1 BROWN
(+24VDC) DI1:2
WHITE OIL TANK LEVEL (4-20mA) 1/4 1/4 BLACK OIL LEVEL SENSOR
(Ain9+) AI3:9 16.002
GRAY/PINK OIL TANK TEMPERATURE (4-20mA) 1/2 1/2 WHITE
(Ain8+) AI3:7
GREEN/YELLOW PE PE 1/5 TANK TEMPERATURE SENSOR
012
(TYPE 5, Xm)
2/3 BLUE 3
-
2/1 BROWN
+
GREEN DRAIN FILTER 1 75% FULL 2/4 2/4 BLACK DRAIN FILTER 1 13.080
(Din1) DI1:3 75%
RED/BLUE DRAIN FILTER 1 100% FULL 2/2 2/2 WHITE 2
(Din2) DI1:4 100%
2/5

3/3
3/1
YELLOW 3/4 3/4
WHITE/GREEN 3/2 3/2
3/5

014
4/3 (TYPE 6, Xm)
4/1 BROWN 3
GRAY SUCTION LINE PUMP 1 BLOCKED 4/4 4/4 BLACK 4 SUCTION LINE 1 11.071
(Din3) DI1:5
BROWN/GREEN 4/2 4/2
4/5

015
5/3 (TYPE 2, Xm)
AI3:1 (0VDC) 5/1 BROWN 1
PINK BRAKE PRESSURE DRIVE 1 (4-20mA) 5/4 5/4 BLACK 2 BRAKE PRESSURE DRIVE 1 12.210
AI3:6 (Ain7-) (Ain3+) AI2:5
WHITE/YELLOW 5/2 5/2
AI3:8 (Ain8-)
5/5
AI3:10 (Ain9-)
AI2:12 (Ain6-) 6/3
AI2:10 (Ain5-) 6/1
AI2:8 (Ain4-) RED 6/4 6/4
YELLOW/BROWN 6/2 6/2
AI2:6 (Ain3-)
6/5

7/3
017
DO1:11 DO1:12 7/1 (TYPE 4, Xm)
FU2 2AT DOUT5 BLACK OPEN BRAKE DRIVE 1 24VDC 7/4 7/4 BLACK 1
(+24VDC) DC1:4
WHITE/GRAY 0VDC 7/2 7/2 WHITE 2 OPEN BRAKE DRIVE 1 12.214
(0VDC) DC1:1
7/5

018
8/3 (TYPE 2, Xm)
8/1 BROWN 1
VIOLET ACCUMULATOR PRESSURE DRIVE 1 (4-20mA) 8/4 8/4 BLACK 2 ACCUMULATOR DRIVE 1 12.276
(Ain4+) AI2:7
GRAY/BROWN 8/2 8/2 BRAKE CIRCUIT
8/5

4 3 2 1 SERIAL NUMBER SERIAL NUMBER

PSU: DC1:
CONTROL SYSTEM DRIVEUNIT
(+) 4 C02619 D02473
L 24VDC (+) 3 C02620 D02474
C02621 D02475
N 0VDC (-) 2

PE (-) 1
PS 376 0071-801
AUTORANGING
PE 90-132 / 180-264VAC

Número Orden de Trabajo: Item: Cantidad: Número Licitación: Descripción: Orden de trabajo:
4600017842 Diagrama de conexion interna
Fecha: Referencia: Date: Titulo:
División Radomiro Tomic Instrumentacion Tanque y Freno 932-19
Departamento: Peso kg: Dibujo: Revisado: Aprobado: Proyecto: Revisión: Escala:

A.C.S. J.M.A. A.A.S. 2

Área: Diseñado: Número Plano: Fase: Hoja:

Praxa PRAXA 1
93219-03-01
Ingeniería
Por Firma Apr. Firma Número Plano: Fecha: N° de hojas:
Rev. N° Fecha Revisión Documentos de Referencia Nro. Documento NOTAS
Praxa Praxa 16/08/2021 0 5
DRIVE UNIT
SPIDER CONTROL SYSTEM
MOUNTED ON LEFT OUTSIDE OF DRIVE UNIT

002
4X0,5mm2, screened
WHITE 0VDC FEED
CA:1
BROWN BUS SIGNAL HIGH
CA:2
GREEN BUS SIGNAL LOW
CA:3
YELLOW +24VDC FEED
CA:4

SPIDER CONTROL PANEL

(OUTSIDE ON DU TANK DOOR)

+24 VDC
CAN L
CAN H
0 VDC

SERIAL NUMBER SERIAL NUMBER

CONTROL SYSTEM DRIVEUNIT
C02619 D02473
C02620 D02474
C02621 D02475

Número Orden de Trabajo: Item: Cantidad: Número Licitación: Descripción: Orden de trabajo:
4600017842 Diagrama de conexion interna
Fecha: Referencia: Date: Titulo:
División Radomiro Tomic Panel Spider Control 932-19
Departamento: Peso kg: Dibujo: Revisado: Aprobado: Proyecto: Revisión: Escala:

A.C.S. J.M.A. A.A.S. 2

Área: Diseñado: Número Plano: Fase: Hoja:

Praxa PRAXA 2
93219-03-01
Ingeniería
Por Firma Apr. Firma Número Plano: Fecha: N° de hojas:
Rev. N° Fecha Revisión Documentos de Referencia Nro. Documento NOTAS
Praxa Praxa 16/08/2021 0 5
DRIVE UNIT
SPIDER CONTROL SYSTEM
MOUNTED ON LEFT OUTSIDE OF DRIVE UNIT I/O BOX 11
11 111
BLUE 0VDC 0V 1/3 (TYPE 5, Xm)
(0VDC) DI2:1
BROWN +24VDC Un 1/1 BROWN 1
(+24VDC) DI2:2
WHITE PRESSURE PUMP 1 (4-20mA) 1/4 1/4 BLACK 2 WORK PRESSURE SENSOR PUMP 1 19.003
(Ain6) AI2:11
GRAY/PINK 1/2 1/2
GREEN/YELLOW PE PE 1/5

112
2/3 (TYPE 5, Xm)
2/1 BROWN 1
GREEN CHARGE PRESSURE PUMP 1 (4-20mA) 2/4 2/4 BLACK 2 CHARGE PRESSURE SENSOR PUMP 1 19.001
(Ain7) AI3:5
RED/BLUE 2/2 2/2
2/5

3/3
113
3/1 (TYPE 6, Xm)
YELLOW HIGH TEMPERATURE ELECTRIC MOTOR 1 3/4 3/4 BLACK TH1
(Din7) DI2:4
WHITE/GREEN +12VDC 3/2 3/2 WHITE TH2 [Link] 1 THERMISTOR 01.001
+12VDC DE1:3
3/5

4/3
4/1
GRAY 4/4 4/4
BROWN/GREEN 4/2 4/2
4/5
115
(TYPE 5, Xm)
5/3 BLUE
-
5/1 BROWN
+
PINK RETURN FILTER 1 75% FULL 5/4 5/4 BLACK RETURN FILTER PUMP 1 13.081
(Din8) DI2:5 75%
WHITE/YELLOW RETURN FILTER 1 100% FULL 5/2 5/2 WHITE 2
(Din9) DI2:6 100%
5/5

6/3
6/1
RED 6/4 6/4
YELLOW/BROWN 6/2 6/2
6/5

7/3
7/1
BLACK 7/4 7/4
WHITE/GRAY 7/2 7/2
7/5

8/3
8/1
VIOLET 8/4 8/4
GRAY/BROWN 8/2 8/2
8/5

SERIAL NUMBER SERIAL NUMBER

CONTROL SYSTEM DRIVEUNIT
C02619 D02473
C02620 D02474
C02621 D02475

Número Orden de Trabajo: Item: Cantidad: Número Licitación: Descripción: Orden de trabajo:
4600017842 Diagrama de conexion interna
Fecha: Referencia: Date: Titulo:
División Radomiro Tomic Conexion Filtro Retorno y transmisores de P° 932-19
Departamento: Peso kg: Dibujo: Revisado: Aprobado: Proyecto: Revisión: Escala:

A.C.S. J.M.A. A.A.S. 2

Área: Diseñado: Número Plano: Fase: Hoja:

Praxa PRAXA 4
93219-03-01
Ingeniería
Por Firma Apr. Firma Número Plano: Fecha: N° de hojas:
Rev. N° Fecha Revisión Documentos de Referencia Nro. Documento NOTAS
Praxa Praxa 16/08/2021 0 5
DRIVE UNIT
SPIDER CONTROL SYSTEM
MOUNTED ON LEFT OUTSIDE OF DRIVE UNIT I/O BOX 12
12
BLUE 0V 1/3 121
BROWN Un 1/1 (TYPE 1, Xm)
WHITE HYDRAULIC STROKER PUMP 1, FORWARD 1/4 1/4 BLACK 1
(Pump1 A+) PO1:1
GRAY/PINK HYDRAULIC STROKER PUMP 1, FORWARD 1/2 1/2 WHITE 2 FLOW A-PORT PUMP 1 02.083
(Pump1 A-) PO1:2
GREEN/YELLOW PE PE 1/5

2/3 122
2/1 (TYPE 1, Xm)
GREEN HYDRAULIC STROKER PUMP 1, REVERSE 2/4 2/4 BLACK 1
(Pump1 B+) PO1:3
RED/BLUE HYDRAULIC STROKER PUMP 1, REVERSE 2/2 2/2 WHITE 2 FLOW B-PORT PUMP 1 02.086
(Pump1 B-) PO1:4
2/5

3/3
3/1
YELLOW 3/4 3/4
WHITE/GREEN 3/2 3/2
3/5

4/3
4/1
GRAY 4/4 4/4
BROWN/GREEN 4/2 4/2
4/5

SERIAL NUMBER SERIAL NUMBER

CONTROL SYSTEM DRIVEUNIT
C02619 D02473
C02620 D02474
C02621 D02475

Número Orden de Trabajo: Item: Cantidad: Número Licitación: Descripción: Orden de trabajo:
4600017842 Diagrama de conexion interna
Fecha: Referencia: Date: Titulo:
División Radomiro Tomic Control Bomba 932-19
Departamento: Peso kg: Dibujo: Revisado: Aprobado: Proyecto: Revisión: Escala:

A.C.S. J.M.A. A.A.S. 2

Área: Diseñado: Número Plano: Fase: Hoja:

Praxa PRAXA 5
93219-03-01
Ingeniería
Por Firma Apr. Firma Número Plano: Fecha: N° de hojas:
Rev. N° Fecha Revisión Documentos de Referencia Nro. Documento NOTAS
Praxa Praxa 16/08/2021 0 5
Tablero de Fuerza
PARTIDOR MOTOR SISTEMA DE CONTROL SPIDER

MOTOR ELECTRICO FUNCIONANDO

24VDC EI/EM:5 (+24VDC)
CONTACT SECO, DEBE NC
MOTOR_ELECTRICO_FUNCIONANDO
ABRIR SI EL MOTOR EI/EM:6 (MOTOR E. FUNCIONANDO)
ELECTRICO ESTA
ENCENDIDO.

INTERLOCK MOTOR ELECTRICO

Max. 100 mA load

UN CONTACTO NORMAL
ABIERTO DE ESTE RELE
DEBE SER CONECTADO AL INTERLOCK_MOTOR_ELECTRICO EO1:4 * EO1:3 EO1:2 (+24_VDC)
CIRCUITO DE CONTROL DEL
MOTOR ELECTRICO. 0VDC
EO1:1 (O_VDC)

DO1:3
RC DOUT 1
DO1:4
*
DO1:5
RH DOUT 2
DO1:6
*
DO1:7
DOUT 3
DO1:8
*

RELES DE INTERPOSICION DE CONTROL DE MOTORES

SERIAL NUMBER SERIAL NUMBER

CONTROL SYSTEM DRIVEUNIT
C02619 D02473
C02620
C02621
D02474
D02475
Puerta interior
Tablero de control

Número Orden de Trabajo: Item: Cantidad: Número Licitación: Descripción: Orden de trabajo:
4600017842 Unidad Hidraulica
Fecha: Referencia: Date: Titulo:
División Radomiro Tomic Conexion Interlock Motor Principal 932-19
Departamento: Peso kg: Dibujo: Revisado: Aprobado: Proyecto: Revisión: Escala:

A.C.S. J.M.A. A.A.S. 2

Área: Diseñado: Número Plano: Fase: Hoja:

Praxa PRAXA 1
93219-03-02
Ingeniería
Por Firma Apr. Firma Número Plano: Fecha: N° de hojas:
Rev. N° Fecha Revisión Documentos de Referencia Nro. Documento NOTAS
Praxa Praxa 16/08/2021 0 7
SEÑALES DISPONIBLES
SISTEMA DE CONTROL SPIDER

AI1:5 (SP D1+)

SPEED COMMAND DRIVE 1 (4-20mA) DISPONIBLE
AI1:6 (SP D1-)
+
AI1:7 (SP D2 +)
PUMP PRESSURE COMPENSATOR COMMAND (4-20mA / 70-350BAR) DISPONIBLE
AI1:8 (SP D2 -)

+ 24 VDC FEEDER
EI/EM:1_(+24VDC)
PARADA_EMERGENCIA_DISPONIBLE
EI/EM:2_(PARADA_EMERGENCIA)

+24VDC SUPPLY
DI5:2_(+24VDC)
DISPONIBLE
DI5:3_DIN34
DISPONIBLE
DI5:4_DIN35
DISPONIBLE
DI5:5_DIN35

FASE L1
POWER SUPPLY INPUT
NEUTRO N
110_VAC_50/60HZ
MAX_350VA PE PE

SPECIFICATION, CONNECTION CABLES

Tablero de control SUPPLY VOLTAGE: 3x1.0 mm 2
OTHERS : 0.5 mm 2, SHIELDED

SERIAL NUMBER SERIAL NUMBER

CONTROL SYSTEM DRIVEUNIT
C02619 D02473
C02620 D02474
C02621 D02475

Número Orden de Trabajo: Item: Cantidad: Número Licitación: Descripción: Orden de trabajo:
4600017842 Unidad Hidraulica
Fecha: Referencia: Date: Titulo:
División Radomiro Tomic Cableados Entrada Spider 932-19
Departamento: Peso kg: Dibujo: Revisado: Aprobado: Proyecto: Revisión: Escala:

A.C.S. J.M.A. A.A.S. 2

Área: Diseñado: Número Plano: Fase: Hoja:

Praxa PRAXA 2
93219-03-02
Ingeniería
Por Firma Apr. Firma Número Plano: Fecha: N° de hojas:
Rev. N° Fecha Revisión Documentos de Referencia Nro. Documento NOTAS
Praxa Praxa 16/08/2021 0 7
SEÑALES DISPONIBLES
SISTEMA DE CONTROL SPIDER

TABLERO DE FUERZA DO1:3

CLOSES FOR COOLING START DOUT 1
DO1:4
*
DO1:5
CLOSES FOR HEATER START DOUT 2
DO1:6
*
DO1:7
CLOSES FOR ELECTRIC MOTOR START DOUT 3
DO1:8
*

DO2:3
DOUT 7
CLOSES WHEN ALARM DO2:4
*
DO2:5
DOUT 8
CLOSES WHEN WARNING DO2:6
CUSTOMER INDICATION *
OUTPUTS DO2:7
DOUT 9
CLOSES WHEN READY TO USE DO2:8
*
DO2:9
DOUT 10
CLOSES WHEN STARTED DO2:10
*

+
AO1:4 (Aout1)
_ DRIVE 1 WORK PRESSURE (4-20mA, 0-400 bar)
ANALOGUE OUTPUT SIGNALS
( MAX LOAD = 500 OHM / OUTPUT ) +
AO1:6 (Aout2)
_ TANK TEMPERATURE (4-20mA, 0-100°C)
AO1:1 (0VDC Aout 1-2)

* MAX LOAD: 3A, 30VDC, 250VAC (Dout 11-13 = MAX IN TOTAL).

IMPORTANT WHEN CONNECTING AN OUTPUT:
A VOLTAGE SUPPRESSOR MUST ALWAYS BE CONNECTED SERIAL NUMBER SERIAL NUMBER
CONTROL SYSTEM DRIVEUNIT
ACROSS AN INDUCTIVE LOAD (RELAY COIL, SOLENOID etc.) :
C02619 D02473
- A LOAD SUPPLIED BY DC MUST INCL A FREE WHEELING DIODE C02620 D02474
- A LOAD SUPPLIED BY AC MUST INCLUDE A VARISTOR C02621 D02475

SPECIFICATION, CONNECTION CABLES

SUPPLY VOLTAGE: 3x1.0 mm 2
OTHERS : 0.5 mm 2, SHIELDED

Número Orden de Trabajo: Item: Cantidad: Número Licitación: Descripción: Orden de trabajo:
4600017842 Unidad Hidraulica
Fecha: Referencia: Date: Titulo:
División Radomiro Tomic Cableados Salidas Spider 932-19
Departamento: Peso kg: Dibujo: Revisado: Aprobado: Proyecto: Revisión: Escala:

A.C.S. J.M.A. A.A.S. 2

Área: Diseñado: Número Plano: Fase: Hoja:

Praxa PRAXA 3
93219-03-02
Ingeniería
Por Firma Apr. Firma Número Plano: Fecha: N° de hojas:
Rev. N° Fecha Revisión Documentos de Referencia Nro. Documento NOTAS
Praxa Praxa 16/08/2021 0 7
HUINCHE TENSOR

SPIDER CONTROL SYSTEM

MOUNTED ON LEFT OUTSIDE OF DRIVE UNIT

0 VDC
F DE1:1 (0VDC)
DRIVE 1 E
+24 VDC
DE1:2 (+24VDC)
SPEED ENCODER D
1
DE1:4 (Pulse1)
SPLL85D-2500 C
INV. 1
DE1:5 (Pulse1 inv.)
2
A DE1:6 (Pulse2)
(MOUNTED ON HYDRAULIC MOTOR) INV. 2
B DE1:7 (Pulse2 inv.)

Sala Electrica 150

HMI
PROFIBUS CARD

D-SUB 9-POLE
( FEMALE )

A-LINE #8 A-LINE #8
B-LINE #3 B-LINE #3

PROFIBUS DP-SIGNAL
PROFIBUS-DP
SLAVE

Tablero de control UNIDAD HIDRAULICA

Número Orden de Trabajo: Item: Cantidad: Número Licitación: Descripción: Orden de trabajo:
4600017842 Unidad Hidraulica
Fecha: Referencia: Date: Titulo:
División Radomiro Tomic Conexion de comunicacion y encoder 932-19
Departamento: Peso kg: Dibujo: Revisado: Aprobado: Proyecto: Revisión: Escala:

A.C.S. J.M.A. A.A.S. 2

Área: Diseñado: Número Plano: Fase: Hoja:

Praxa PRAXA 4
93219-03-02
Ingeniería
Por Firma Apr. Firma Número Plano: Fecha: N° de hojas:
Rev. N° Fecha Revisión Documentos de Referencia Nro. Documento NOTAS
Praxa Praxa 16/08/2021 0 7
Tablero de Fuerza
M

SERIAL NUMBER SERIAL NUMBER

CONTROL SYSTEM DRIVEUNIT
C02619 D02473
C02620 D02474
C02621 D02475

Número Orden de Trabajo: Item: Cantidad: Número Licitación: Descripción: Orden de trabajo:
4600017842 Unidad Hidraulica
Fecha: Referencia: Date: Titulo:
División Radomiro Tomic Conexion de Motores y Calefactor 932-19
Departamento: Peso kg: Dibujo: Revisado: Aprobado: Proyecto: Revisión: Escala:

A.C.S. J.M.A. A.A.S. 2

Área: Diseñado: Número Plano: Fase: Hoja:

Praxa PRAXA 5
93219-03-02
Ingeniería
Por Firma Apr. Firma Número Plano: Fecha: N° de hojas:
Rev. N° Fecha Revisión Documentos de Referencia Nro. Documento NOTAS
Praxa Praxa 15/11/2020 0 7
TABLERO DE CONTROL
SISTEMA DE CONTROL SPIDER
XK3101

AI1:12 +AI2 SEÑAL DE PESO

AI1:11 -AI2 SEÑAL DE PESO

Celda de Carga 1 Celda de Carga 2

UNIDAD HIDRAULICA
HUINCHE

Número Orden de Trabajo: Item: Cantidad: Número Licitación: Descripción: Orden de trabajo:
4600017842 Unidad Hidraulica
Fecha: Referencia: Date: Titulo:
División Radomiro Tomic Celdas de Carga 932-19
Departamento: Peso kg: Dibujo: Revisado: Aprobado: Proyecto: Revisión: Escala:

A.C.S. J.M.A. A.A.S. 2

Área: Diseñado: Número Plano: Fase: Hoja:

Praxa PRAXA 6
93219-03-02
Ingeniería
Por Firma Apr. Firma Número Plano: Fecha: N° de hojas:
Rev. N° Fecha Revisión Documentos de Referencia Nro. Documento NOTAS
Praxa Praxa 16/08/2021 0 7
Tablero de control CV112

HMI

A-LINE #8
B-LINE #3

Sala Electrica 150

PROFIBUS DP-SIGNAL

Tablero de control CV113

HMI

A-LINE #8
B-LINE #3

PROFIBUS DP-SIGNAL

Tablero de control CV114

HMI

A-LINE #8
B-LINE #3

PROFIBUS DP-SIGNAL

Número Orden de Trabajo: Item: Cantidad: Número Licitación: Descripción: Orden de trabajo:
4600017842 Unidad Hidraulica
Fecha: Referencia: Date: Titulo:
División Radomiro Tomic Conexion de comunicacion y encoder 932-19
Departamento: Peso kg: Dibujo: Revisado: Aprobado: Proyecto: Revisión: Escala:

A.C.S. J.M.A. A.A.S. 2

Área: Diseñado: Número Plano: Fase: Hoja:

Praxa PRAXA 7
93219-03-02
Ingeniería
Por Firma Apr. Firma Número Plano: Fecha: N° de hojas:
Rev. N° Fecha Revisión Documentos de Referencia Nro. Documento NOTAS
Praxa Praxa 16/08/2021 0 7
Número Orden de Trabajo: Item: Cantidad: Número Licitación: Descripción: Orden de trabajo:
4600017842 Unidad Hidraulica
Fecha: Referencia: Date: Titulo:
División Radomiro Tomic Diagrama de Fuerza 932-19
Departamento: Peso kg: Dibujo: Revisado: Aprobado: Proyecto: Revisión: Escala:

A.C.S. J.M.A. A.A.S. 2

Área: Diseñado: Número Plano: Fase: Hoja:

Praxa PRAXA 1
93219-03-03
Ingeniería
Por Firma Apr. Firma Número Plano: Fecha: N° de hojas:
Rev. N° Fecha Revisión Documentos de Referencia Nro. Documento NOTAS
Praxa Praxa 16/08/2021 0 3
Número Orden de Trabajo: Item: Cantidad: Número Licitación: Descripción: Orden de trabajo:
4600017842 Unidad Hidraulica
Fecha: Referencia: Date: Titulo:
División Radomiro Tomic Diagrama de Fuerza 932-19
Departamento: Peso kg: Dibujo: Revisado: Aprobado: Proyecto: Revisión: Escala:

A.C.S. J.M.A. A.A.S. 2

Área: Diseñado: Número Plano: Fase: Hoja:

Praxa PRAXA 2
93219-03-03
Ingeniería
Por Firma Apr. Firma Número Plano: Fecha: N° de hojas:
Rev. N° Fecha Revisión Documentos de Referencia Nro. Documento NOTAS
Praxa Praxa 16/08/2021 0 3
Número Orden de Trabajo: Item: Cantidad: Número Licitación: Descripción: Orden de trabajo:
4600017842 Unidad Hidraulica
Fecha: Referencia: Date: Titulo:
División Radomiro Tomic Diagrama de Fuerza 932-19
Departamento: Peso kg: Dibujo: Revisado: Aprobado: Proyecto: Revisión: Escala:

A.C.S. J.M.A. A.A.S. 2

Área: Diseñado: Número Plano: Fase: Hoja:

Praxa PRAXA 3
93219-03-03
Ingeniería
Por Firma Apr. Firma Número Plano: Fecha: N° de hojas:
Rev. N° Fecha Revisión Documentos de Referencia Nro. Documento NOTAS
Praxa Praxa 16/08/2021 0 3
oil cooler

PROFIBUS DP-SIGNAL
Motor Ppal.
-
+
75%
100%
3
4
PROFIBUS CARD

D-SUB 9-POLE
( FEMALE )

A-LINE #8
B-LINE #3

PROFIBUS-DP
SLAVE

Número Orden de Trabajo: Item: Cantidad: Número Licitación: Descripción: Orden de trabajo:
4600017842 Unidad Hidraulica
Fecha: Referencia: Date: Titulo:
División Radomiro Tomic Diagrama de Fuerza 932-19
Departamento: Peso kg: Dibujo: Revisado: Aprobado: Proyecto: Revisión: Escala:

A.C.S. J.M.A. A.A.S. 2

Área: Diseñado: Número Plano: Fase: Hoja:

Praxa PRAXA 1
93219-03-04
Ingeniería
Por Firma Apr. Firma Número Plano: Fecha: N° de hojas:
Rev. N° Fecha Revisión Documentos de Referencia Nro. Documento NOTAS
Praxa Praxa 16/08/2021 0 1
Descripción: NEMA 4X
TABLERO DE FUERZA 575 VAC
Titulo:
TABLERO DE FUERZA CORREA CV 112
Proyecto:
SIST. TENSOR DE CORREAS AREA CRITICA
TAG:
0932-HU-4005-01TDF 001
Nivel de Voltaje : 575 VAC
Potencia : 90 KW
Frecuencia : 50 HZ
Corriente Nominal : 150 AMPERES
Capacidad de cortocircuito : Icu = 25 ka
Grado de Protección : NEMA 4X
Proyecto Praxa Ingeniería : 932-11-21

PRAXA Ingeniería SpA

Av . Un o No rt e # 1 8 0 KM 10 Camino a Coronel
Praxa Sa n Pe d ro De L a Paz, Concepción
Ingeniería
☎ C e l u l a r : ( + 5 6 ) 9 98852340
l e - m a i l : a l e x i s . a r a y a @ p r a x a i ng e n i e r i a . c o m
w w w . p r a x a i n g e ni e r i a . c om

Número Orden de Trabajo: Item: Cantidad: Número Licitación: Descripción: Orden de trabajo:
4600017842 Unidad Hidraulica
Fecha: Referencia: Date: Titulo:
División Radomiro Tomic Tablero de Fuerza 932-19
Departamento: Peso kg: Dibujo: Revisado: Aprobado: Proyecto: Revisión: Escala:

A.C.S. J.M.A. A.A.S. 2

Área: Diseñado: Número Plano: Fase: Hoja:

Praxa PRAXA 1
93219-03-05
Ingeniería
Por Firma Apr. Firma Número Plano: Fecha: N° de hojas:
Rev. N° Fecha Revisión Documentos de Referencia Nro. Documento NOTAS
Praxa Praxa 16/08/2021 0 2
Número Orden de Trabajo: Item: Cantidad: Número Licitación: Descripción: Orden de trabajo:
4600017842 Unidad Hidraulica
Fecha: Referencia: Date: Titulo:
División Radomiro Tomic Listado de Materiales Tablero de Fuerza 932-19
Departamento: Peso kg: Dibujo: Revisado: Aprobado: Proyecto: Revisión: Escala:

A.C.S. J.M.A. A.A.S. 2

Área: Diseñado: Número Plano: Fase: Hoja:

Praxa PRAXA 2
93219-03-05
Ingeniería
Por Firma Apr. Firma Número Plano: Fecha: N° de hojas:
Rev. N° Fecha Revisión Documentos de Referencia Nro. Documento NOTAS
Praxa Praxa 16/08/2021 0 2
Número Orden de Trabajo: Item: Cantidad: Número Licitación: Descripción: Orden de trabajo:
4600017842 Unidad Hidraulica
Fecha: Referencia: Date: Titulo:
División Radomiro Tomic Tablero de Control 932-19
Departamento: Peso kg: Dibujo: Revisado: Aprobado: Proyecto: Revisión: Escala:

A.C.S. J.M.A. A.A.S. 2

Área: Diseñado: Número Plano: Fase: Hoja:

Praxa PRAXA 1
93219-03-06
Ingeniería
Por Firma Apr. Firma Número Plano: Fecha: N° de hojas:
Rev. N° Fecha Revisión Documentos de Referencia Nro. Documento NOTAS
Praxa Praxa 16/08/2021 0 2
Número Orden de Trabajo: Item: Cantidad: Número Licitación: Descripción: Orden de trabajo:
4600017842 Unidad Hidraulica
Fecha: Referencia: Date: Titulo:
División Radomiro Tomic Listado de Materiales Tablero de Control 932-19
Departamento: Peso kg: Dibujo: Revisado: Aprobado: Proyecto: Revisión: Escala:

A.C.S. J.M.A. A.A.S. 2

Área: Diseñado: Número Plano: Fase: Hoja:

Praxa PRAXA 2
93219-03-06
Ingeniería
Por Firma Apr. Firma Número Plano: Fecha: N° de hojas:
Rev. N° Fecha Revisión Documentos de Referencia Nro. Documento NOTAS
Praxa Praxa 16/08/2021 0 2
Número Orden de Trabajo: Item: Cantidad: Número Licitación: Descripción: Orden de trabajo:
4600017842 Unidad Hidraulica
Fecha: Referencia: Date: Titulo:
División Radomiro Tomic Diagrama de Alimentaciones de Control 932-19
Departamento: Peso kg: Dibujo: Revisado: Aprobado: Proyecto: Revisión: Escala:

A.C.S. J.M.A. A.A.S. 2

Área: Diseñado: Número Plano: Fase: Hoja:

Praxa PRAXA 1
93219-03-07
Ingeniería
Por Firma Apr. Firma Número Plano: Fecha: N° de hojas:
Rev. N° Fecha Revisión Documentos de Referencia Nro. Documento NOTAS
Praxa Praxa 16/08/2021 0 1
MANUAL DE OPERACIÓN Y MANTENCIÓN SISTEMA Código
HUINCHES TENSORES LINEA CRITICA Versión 1.0

CORREAS CV112 – CV113 – CV114 Página 51 de 51

23) FICHA TÉCNICA DE COMPONENTES

PRAXA INGENIERÍA SpA

Uno Norte #180 KM 10 Camino a Coronel Barrio Industrial Logistock Bodega 2 San Pedro De La Paz, Concepción
Data sheet for three-phase Squirrel-Cage-Motors
Hoja de datos de motores de jaula de ardilla trifásicos
MLFB-Ordering data: 1LE1603-2DB09-0GB4-Z Safe Area
Datos de pedido: B02+M1Y+Q02+R53

Motor type: 1CV3280B

Client order no. / Número de pedido del cliente: Item no. / Nº. de item:
Order no. / Nº. de pedido Siemens: Consignment no. / Número de envío:
Offer no. / Número de oferta: Project / Proyecto:
Remarks / Nota:
U Δ/Y f P P I n M NOM. EFF at ... load [%] Power factor at ... load IA/IN MA/MN MK/MN IE-CL
[V] [Hz] [kW] [hp] [A] [1/min] [Nm] 4/4 3/4 2/4 4/4 3/4 2/4 II/IN TI/TN TB/TN

575 Δ 50 75.00 -/- 92.00 1485 480.0 95.0 95.3 95.0 0.86 0.83 0.75 6.9 2.5 3.0 IE3

IM V1 / IM 3011 FS 280 S 570 kg IP55 IEC/EN 60034 IEC, DIN, ISO, VDE, EN

These values are calculated. The final rating plate data will be calculated when the order is placed
The efficiency values and efficiency class according to EuP directive are valid for standard power ratings under standard conditions.
Se trata de valores calculados. En caso de pedido se determinan los datos finales para la placa de características
Los valores de eficiencia y clase de efciencia según Directiva Europe son válidos para potencias nominales y condiciones estándar.

Mechanical data / Datos mecánicos Terminal box / Caja de bornes

Sound pressure level 50Hz/60Hz (load) Terminal box position top
69 dB(A) 1) 77 dB(A) 1) arriba
Nivel de presión sonora (LpfA) 50Hz/60Hz (carga) Posición de la caja de bornes
Moment of inertia 1.39 kg m² Material of terminal box cast iron
Momento de inercia Material de la caja de bornes Fundición gris
Bearing DE | NDE 6317 C3 6317 C3 Type of terminal box
Rodamiento LA | LCA TB1 N61
Tipo
Relubrication interval/quantity (AS|BS) 30 g | 30 g Contact screw thread
Intervalo/Cantidad de relubricación (AS|BS) 8000 h M10
Rosca del tornillo de contacto
Lubricants Unirex N3 Max. cross-sectional area
Lubricante 120.0 mm²
Sección de conductor, máx.
Regreasing device Yes (standard)
Sí (estándar)
Cable diameter from ... to ... 34.0 mm - 42.0 mm
Dispositivo de relubricación
Diámetro de cable de... a...
Grease nipple M10x1 DIN 3404 A
Boquilla de engrase Cable entry -/-
Entrada de cable
Type of bearing Locating bearing NDE
Tipo de rodamientos Rodamiento fijo en LCA/NDE Cable gland -/-
Condensate drainage holes Yes (standard) Pasacables
Agujeros drenaje de condensado Sí (estándar)
External earthing terminal Yes (standard)
Borne de tierra externo Sí (estándar)
Vibration severity grade
Nivel de intensidad de vibración
A Special design / Versiones especiales (4)
Insulation 155(F) to 130(B) B02 Acceptance test certificate 3.1 acc. to EN 10204
Aislamiento 155(F) a 130(B) Certificado de ensayo (protocolo de pruebas) 3.1 según EN 10204
Duty type S1
Tipo de servicio M1Y Non-standard winding: 575VD_50Hz_75kW
Arrollamiento no estándar: 575VD_50Hz_75kW
Direction of rotation bidirectional
Sentido de giro ambas direcciones Q02 Anti-condensation heating for 230 V (2 terminals)
Frame material cast iron Calefección anticondensaciones para 230 V (2 bornes)
Material de la carcasa fundición gris
R53 Undrilled removable cable entry plate
Data of anti condensation heating 230 V, 109 W Placa de entrada sin taladrar y extraíble
Datos del tiempo de parada del calentador
Coating (paint finish) Special paint finish C3
Pintura Pintura especial C3
Color, paint shade RAL7030
Color
Motor protection (B) 3 PTC thermistors - for tripping (standard) (2
Proteccion del motor terminals)
Method of cooling IC411 - self ventilated, surface cooled
Método de refrigeración IC411 - ventilación propia, refrigeración superficial

Environmental conditions / Condiciones ambientales

Ambient temperature -20 °C - +40 °C
Temperatura ambiente
Altitude above sea level 1000 m
Altitud sobre nivel del mar

Notes
IA/IN = locked rotor current / current MK/MN = break down torque / nominal torque
MA/MN = locked rotor torque / torque 1) Value is valid only for DOL operation with motor design

Technical data are subject to change! There may be discrepancies between calculated and rating plate values. Page 1/1 Version: 2016.10
Datos técnicos de pedido sujetos a cambios sin previo aviso. Pueden haber discrepancias entre los valores calculados y los datos de placa! Generated / Generado: 07.08.2020 [Link]
Confié à titre de secret d'entreprise. Tous droits réservés. Weitergabe sowie Vervielfältigung, Verbreitung und/oder Bearbeitung die- Transmittal, reproduction, dissemination and/or editing of this document as
Comunicado come secredo empresarial. Reservados todos os direitos. ses Dokumentes, Verwertung und Mitteilung seines Inhaltes sind verboten, well as utilization of its contents and communication thereof to others
Доверяется в качестве производстве нного секрета. soweit nicht ausdrücklich gestattet. Zuwiderhandlungen verpflichten zu without express authorization are prohibited. Offenders will be held liable
Все права сохраняются за нами. Schadenersatz. Alle Rechte für den Fall der Patenterteilung, Gebrauchs- for payment of damages. All rights created by patent grant or registra-
Confiado como secreto de empresa. Nos reservamos todos los derechos. muster- oder Geschmacksmutereintragung vorbehalten tion of a utility model or design patent are reserved.

B02+M1Y+Q02+R53
1LE1603-2DB09-0GB4-Z

-
DTK

07/08/20

-
Maßzeichnung
Dimensional drawing
-

A3
mm

1 1
de
en
SP pumps
Product manual

Variable displacement pump

SP
Nominal pressure 350 bar
Peak pressure 400 bar
Closed circuit operation

Features, size 40...180

– Variable displacement axial piston pump of swashplate
design for hydrostatic closed circuit transmissions
– Flow is proportional to drive speed and displacement and
is infinitely variable through adjustment of the swivel angle
– The charge pump and auxiliary control valves, necessary
for closed circuit operation are included in scope of supply
– One common pump for charge and EP displacement con-
trol
– Low noise level
– Long service life
– High efficiency
– New electro-hydraulic EP control with proportional sole-
noid and zero position at power loss

Features, size 250...750

– Variable displacement axial piston pump of swashplate
design for hydrostatic closed circuit transmissions
– Flow is proportional to drive speed and displacement and is
infinitely variable
– Output flow increases with swivel angle from 0 to its maxi-
mum value
– Swivelling the pump over centre smoothly changes the
direction of flow
– A highly adaptable range of control and regulating devices
is available
– The pump is equipped with two pressure relief valves on
the high pressure ports to protect the hydrostatic transmis-
sion (pump and motor) from overloads
– All valves needed for the charge and flushing circuit are
integrated
– Compact overall design
– Low noise emission
– High efficiency
– Throughdrive for multiple pump combinations also possible
with integrated charge pump up to 100%

The contents of this information are subject to change without notice or obligation. Information herein should be confirmed before placing orders.

Hägglunds Drives AB, S-890 42 Mellansel, SWEDEN 1(34)

SP pumps

Content
Size 40...180

Ordering code 3
Fluid 4
Technical data 5
Control and adjustment devices 8
Hydraulic circuit 9
Mounted charge pump and control valves 10
Unit dimensions, size 40 12
Unit dimensions, size 71 13
Unit dimensions, size 125 15
Unit dimensions, size 180 17
Installation and commissioning instructions 19

Size 250...750

Technical data 20
Control options 23
Hydraulic circuit 24
Integrated charge pump and control valves 25
Unit dimensions, size 250 26
Unit dimensions, size 355 28
Unit dimensions, size 500 30
Unit dimensions, size 750 32
Installation and commissioning instructions 34

The contents of this information are subject to change without notice or obligation. Information herein should be confirmed before placing orders.

Hägglunds Drives AB, S-890 42 Mellansel, SWEDEN 2(34)

SP pumps

Ordering code
SP 125 — S R — V — EP — R901234567

Axial piston pump

Size
Displacement Vgmax [cm3] 40 250
71 355
125 500
180 750

Shaft end

Splined to DIN 5480 S

Direction of rotation
clockwise R
counter clockwise L

Seals
FKM Fluor rubber V

Control and adjustment device

Electro-hydr. with prop. solenoid EP
Hydr. control, pilot press. dependent HD

Identnumber

The contents of this information are subject to change without notice or obligation. Information herein should be confirmed before placing orders.

Hägglunds Drives AB, S-890 42 Mellansel, SWEDEN 3(34)

SP pumps

Fluid
For extensive information on the selection of hydraulic fluids and for application conditions, please consult Hägglunds
Drives. The variable pump SP is suitable for operation on mineral oil. When operating with biodegradable fluids possible
reduction of the operating specifications may be required, please consult with us. When ordering; state the type of fluid in
clear text.

Operating viscosity range

For optimum efficiency and service life we recommend that the operating viscosity should (at operating temperature) be
selected in the range noper = 40...150 (cSt) referred to closed circuit temperature.

Viscosity limits
The limiting values for viscosity are as follows:
nmin = 10 (cSt)
short period (t < 3 min)
at max. perm. leakage fluid temperature of 90 °C.
nmax = 2000 (cSt)
for short period on cold start only (cold start, optimum operating viscosity should be reached after 15 min)
tmin > – 25o C

Temperature range (see selection diagram)

tmin = – 25° C
tmax = + 90° C

Notes on the selection of hydraulic fluids

In order to select the correct fluid, it is necessary to know the operating temperature in the closed circuit in relation to the
ambient temperature. The hydraulic fluid should be selected so that within the operating temperature range, the viscosity
lies within the optimum range (noper ; see shaded section of the selection diagram). We recommend that the higher viscos-
ity grade is selected in each case.

Example: At an ambient temperature of X °C the operating temperature in the circuit is 60 °C. In the optimum viscosity
range noper (shaded area) this corresponds to viscosity grades VG 46 or VG 68, VG 68 should be selected.

The leakage fluid temperature is influenced by pressure and speed and is typically higher than the circuit temperature.
However the maximum temperature at any point in the circuit may not exceed 90°C.

If the above mentioned conditions cannot be met due to extreme operating parameters or high ambient temperatures,
please consult Hägglunds Drives.
Filtration
The finer the filtration the better the achieved cleanliness of the fluid and the longer the life of the axial piston unit.
To ensure a reliable functioning of the axial piston unit, a minimum cleanliness of 19/16/13 (NAS 1638, class 7) acc. to
ISO 4406 is necessary. If above cleanliness class cannot be met, please consult Hägglunds Drives.
Selection diagram
- 20° 0° 20° 40° 60° 80° 100°
2000 2000
1000
600
400
200
VG
VG 6
VG 8
VG 00
Viscosity n [cSt]

1
15
4
6

100
80
60
40

20
15 Fluid temperature range

10 10
- 25° - 10° 10° 30° 50° 70° 90°

tmin = - 25 °C tmax = + 90 °C

The contents of this information are subject to change without notice or obligation. Information herein should be confirmed before placing orders.

Hägglunds Drives AB, S-890 42 Mellansel, SWEDEN 4(34)

SP pumps

Technical data (valid for operation on mineral oil)

Operating pressure range

Inlet Outlet
(Pressures acc. to DIN 24312) (Pressures acc. to DIN 24312)
Required static charge pressure (MK4) Variable pump:
pb min_ ___________________________________________________________________15 bar Pressure at port A or B
nominal pressure pN_ ___________________________________________350 bar
Heavy duty pressure
peak pressure pmax_ _____________________________________________400 bar
pb max___________________________________________________________________ 20 bar

Minimum static charge pressure (short periods), relief valve

Case drain pressure
setting Max. case pressure (housing pressure)
at pb min__________________________________________________________________ 8 bar pL continous_ _______________________________________________________________ 5 bar
pL abs max_ ________________________________________________________________ 8 bar
Maximum static charge pressure
T1 ,T2 and T3 must be unloaded to tank.
pb max___________________________________________________________________ 20 bar

Dynamic charge pressure (fluctuations)

min.______________________________________________________________________ 4 bar
max.___________________________________________________________________ 40 bar
Depending on the behaviour of the transmitted hydraulic en-
ergy in the system, charge pressure fluctuations can occur.
In order to prevent damage to the system, charge pressure
protection, which monitors the static charge pressure part is
necessary. Port MK4 is suitable to monitor the charge pres-
sure. It is recommended to check regularly the charge pres-
sure for the permissible max. and min. spikes with suitable
measuring equipment.
In order to prevent excessive charge pressure spikes, a
low pressure accumulator can be connected to ports E2 or
K4. Accumulator sizing as well as the selection for the best
connecting location depend on the system behaviour and
the operating conditions under consideration of the available
charge flow. Depending on the total systems leakage flow, it
may be necessary to increase the charge flow by means of a
larger or additional charge pump.

Inlet pressure at port S1 (auxiliary pump)

pS min ________________________________________________________________≥ 0,8 bar
pS max_____________________________________________________________________ 2 bar

The contents of this information are subject to change without notice or obligation. Information herein should be confirmed before placing orders.

Hägglunds Drives AB, S-890 42 Mellansel, SWEDEN 5(34)

SP pumps

Technical data
Table of values (theoretical values, without considering hmh and hv; values rounded)
Size 40 71 125 180
Displacement Variable pump Vg max cm 3
40 71 125 180
Auxiliary pump Vg H cm3 20 25 38 45
Speed max. speed nmax rpm 3000 3000 2600 2400

min. speed nmin rpm 500 500 500 500
Flow, max. (variable pump) at nmax qv max l/min 120 213 325 432
at nE = 1500 rpm l/min 60 107 188 270
Power, max. at no max Po max kW 86 132 190 252
at (Dp = 350 bar) at nE = 1500 rpm kW 35 62 109 158
Torque at Vg max Dp = 350 bar Tmax Nm 223 395 696 1002
Variable pump (without aux. pump) Dp = 100 bar T Nm 64 113 199 286
Moment of inertia about drive axis J kgm2 0,0049 0,0121 0,03 0,055
Case volume l 2 2,5 5 4
Weight approx. (pump with EP control, incl. aux. pump) kg 77 94 135 150

Calculation of size

Vg • n • h v
Flow qv =_ [l/min] Vg = geometrical displacement per revolution in cm3
1000
D p = pressure differential in bar
1,59 • Vg • Dp
Drive torque T= [Nm] n = drive speed in rpm
100 · hmh
hv = volumetric efficiency

2p • T • n qv • Dp hmh = mechanical-hydraulic efficiency

Drive power P= = [kW]
60 000 600 • h t h t = overall efficiency (ht = hv • hmh)

Permissible forces on drive shaft

Size 40 71 125 180

Permissible radial force Fq max N 1000 1200 1600 2000
Permissible axial force ± Fax max N 600 800 1000 1400

Application of forces Fq

± Fax

X/2 X/2
X

The contents of this information are subject to change without notice or obligation. Information herein should be confirmed before placing orders.

Hägglunds Drives AB, S-890 42 Mellansel, SWEDEN 6(34)

SP pumps

Technical data
Bearing flushing
For the following operating conditions bearing flushing is required for reliable continuous operation:
– Applications with special fluids (non mineral oils), due to limited lubricity and narrow operating temperature range
– Operation with critical conditions of temperature and viscosity with mineral oil
Flushing is carried out via U-port, which is located in the front flange area of the pump. The flushing oil flows through the
front bearing and leaves the system together with the leakage oil at the case drain port.

The following flushing flows are recommended for the various pump sizes:

Size 40 71 125 180

Flushing flow qfl l/min 3 4 5 7

These flushing flows create a pressure drop of approximately 3 bar between U-port and pump housing (including fitting).

Note. When using bearing flushing at U-port the throttle screw, which can be found at U-port, has to be turned in all the
way to the stop.

The contents of this information are subject to change without notice or obligation. Information herein should be confirmed before placing orders.

Hägglunds Drives AB, S-890 42 Mellansel, SWEDEN 7(34)

SP pumps

Control and adjustment devices

EP - Electro-hydraulic control with proportional solenoid
The EP control adjusts the pump displacement proporti-
onal to the solenoid current. The pump displacement is
therefore stepless variable. One proportional solenoid is
assigned to each direction of flow.

Operating voltage: 24 V
Nominal current:
size 40, 71 : 600 mA
size 125, 180 : 800 mA
Nominal resistance at 20 °C: 19 Ω

HD1 Hydraulic control, pilot pressure dependent

The positioning cylinder of the pump and therefore the swivel
angle is varied in proportion to the difference in pilot pres-
sure applied to the two control ports (X1 and X2). The pump
displacement is therefore stepless variable. One pilot line is
assigned to each direction of flow.

Pilot pressure range: 10-45 bar

Pilot pump

The contents of this information are subject to change without notice or obligation. Information herein should be confirmed before placing orders.

Hägglunds Drives AB, S-890 42 Mellansel, SWEDEN 8(34)

SP pumps

Hydraulic circuit
Example size 125/180

Electro-hydraulic control Pressure control Pressure compensa- Pressure control

with proportional solenoid valve A tor adjustment valve B
and remote pressure control XA2 XAB XB2

Check valves charge flow

B MB1 MA1 A

Mounted charge pump

U T 2 M1 K2 K T R(L) M2 S1
E2
E1
ME3
ME Control pressure relief valve

Bypass valve

High pressure relief valves

T3 Flushing valve
MB2 MA2

K4 MK4 Charge pressure relief valve

T1
K1

Ports
A, B Pressure port U Bearing flushing port (plugged)

S Inlet port ME,ME3 Test points charge pressure (plugged)

MA1,MA2,M B1,M B2 Test points operating press. (plugged) K4 Accumulator port (plugged)

T Oil drain port (plugged) M K4 Test point charge pressure (plugged)

E1 To filter (plugged) M1, M2 Test point control pressure (plugged)

E2 From filter (plugged) X A2,XB2,X AB Ports for remote pressure pilot valves (plugged)

K1 Flushing port T1,T3 Ports for unloading of high pressure relief valves and
charge pressure relief valve.
K2, K3 Flushing port (plugged)
T2 Port for unloading of shaft seal
R(L) Oil fill and air bleed

The contents of this information are subject to change without notice or obligation. Information herein should be confirmed before placing orders.

Hägglunds Drives AB, S-890 42 Mellansel, SWEDEN 9(34)

SP pumps

Mounted charge pump and control valves

High pressure relief valves
Two pilot operated relief valves.
The valves prevent pump damage from excessive pressure levels. Each pressure side has its own relief valve, which is
vented to the low pressure side of the loop.
These relief valves are normally set to 350 bar. If another setting is required, please state that in clear text.

Charge pressure relief valve

The flushing pressure relief valve is direct operated. T1 needs external
drain.
Setting range Dpfl 12...21 bar
Standard setting 15 bar.

Control pressure relief valve

Control pressure: To adjust the control, measure the control pressure in E2-port (minimess connection). Adjust the pressure
to 30 bar + (pn - ps) with the pump in neutral.
To get the value pn, measure the pressure in ME3-port (minimess connection) with the pump in neutral.
To get the value ps, measure the pressure in ME3-port (minimess connection) with the pump swivelled out pump to the >50 %
stroke. Secure that the flushing valve has moved.

pn - ps, should be about 5-12 bar depending on the pump size.

The contents of this information are subject to change without notice or obligation. Information herein should be confirmed before placing orders.

Hägglunds Drives AB, S-890 42 Mellansel, SWEDEN 10(34)

SP pumps

Unit dimensions size 40 Before finalising your design please request a

certified installation drawing. Dimensions in mm.
Example: electro-hydraulic control with prop. solenoidand remote pressure control EP

256 Pilot valve for pressure control

232
160
XB2
XAB
R(L) M1 XA2 MB1

269
M10; 14 deep
243

18
208

47.6 Auxiliary pump

163

U size 20
134

B
A

ø18
22.2
18.75
85

T2 S1
MA1

194
197
32
T
38
90

ME3 K1 T1
178
227 W
232
290
299
342
400

Solenoid A

Solenoid plugs
14
7
DIN EN 175301-803 / ISO 4400
15°�

Protection class IP 65

Shown without auxiliary pump

ø125 h8

L R
15�
15� 0

37
46
79

S1
R(L)
144 16
333 Solenoid B

The contents of this information are subject to change without notice or obligation. Information herein should be confirmed before placing orders.

Hägglunds Drives AB, S-890 42 Mellansel, SWEDEN 11(34)

SP pumps

Unit dimensions, size 40 Before finalising your design please request a

certified installation drawing. Dimensions in mm.
175 175
26
12.5 XB2
XAB View W

View X
XA2 W Charge pressure relief valve

High press. relief valve A T1

X 80.5
K1
ø20 Control press. relief valve
B 3/8-16UNC-2B; MB2
21deep 10 h9
ø16
K2 Pump center
K3 ME3

62
0
33 33

34
23.8

35-0.2

17
150
17
T3 K4

85
�
45°� 45°�
A MA2

150
174

175
50.8

ø15
MK4
40 67

High press. relief valve B

E 37
E1 50 E2
150
79 79

Shaft ends
S Splined to DIN 5480
W32x2x30x14x9g
M10

22
36
38
54

Ports Tightening torque, max. 1)

A, B Pressure port, high press. range SAE J518c 3/4 in, code 62 –
fixing thread A/B ISO 68 3/8-16UNC-2B 21 deep
S1 Inlet port, standard press. range SAE J518c 3/4 in, code 61 –
fixing thread DIN 13 M10;min14 deep
MA1, MB1 Test points press. ports ISO 11926 7/16-20UNF-2B;12 deep 2) 40 Nm
MA2,MB2 Test points press. ports DIN 3852 M14x1,5; 12 deep 2) 80 Nm
T Oil drain ISO 11926 7/8-14UNF-2B; 17 deep 2) 240 Nm
E1 To filter DIN 3852 M14x1,5; 12 deep 2) 80 Nm
E 2 From filter DIN 3852 M14x1,5; 12 deep 2) 80 Nm
K1 Flushing port ISO 11926 7/8-14UNF-2B; 17 deep 240 Nm
K 2, K3 Flushing port ISO 11926 7/8-14UNF-2B; 17 deep 2) 240 Nm
R(L) Oil fill and air bleed ISO 11926 7/8-14UNF-2B; 17 deep 240 Nm
U Bearing flushing port) ISO 11926 9/16-18UNF-2B; 13 deep 2) 80 Nm
ME, ME3 Test point charge pressure ISO 11926 9/16-18UNF-2B; 13 deep 2) 80 Nm
K4 Accumulator port ISO 11926 1 5/16-12UN-2B; 25 deep 2)
540 Nm
MK4 Test point charge pressure ISO 11926 9/16-18UNF-2B; 13 deep 2) 80 Nm
M1 Test point control pressure DIN 3853 S8 Form W 2)

X A2, XB2, X AB Ports for remote press. pilot valves ISO 11926 9/16-18UNF-2B; 13 deep 2) 80 Nm
T1, T3 Ports for unloading of high pres. relief valves ISO 11926 9/16-18UNF-2B; 13 deep 80 Nm
T2 Port for unloading of shaft seal ISO 11926 9/16-18UNF-2B; 13 deep 80 Nm
1)
Adhere to the manufacturers data of the used fittings 2)
plugged

The contents of this information are subject to change without notice or obligation. Information herein should be confirmed before placing orders.

Hägglunds Drives AB, S-890 42 Mellansel, SWEDEN 12(34)

SP pumps

Unit dimensions, size 71 Before finalising your design please request a

certified installation drawing. Dimensions in mm.
Example: electro-hydraulic control with prop. solenoid and remote pressure control EP

283 Pilot valve for pressure control

259
XB2
XAB
R(L) M1 XA2
M10;14 deep
MB1

285
259

18 Auxiliary pump
224

52.4 size 25
179

U
152

B
A

ø26
26.2
18.75
106
97

T2 S1

197
200
MA1
35
T
40
101
ME3
K1 T1
203
257
W
258.5
322
324
377
437.8

Solenoid A

15 Solenoid plugs
8 DIN EN 175301-803 / ISO 4400
Protection class IP 65
15°
ø140 h8

15� 0 15�
L R

Shown without auxiliary pump

45
46
92

S1
35 R(L)

166 20
Solenoid B
358

The contents of this information are subject to change without notice or obligation. Information herein should be confirmed before placing orders.

Hägglunds Drives AB, S-890 42 Mellansel, SWEDEN 13(34)

SP pumps

Unit dimensions, size 71 Before finalising your design, please request a

certified installation drawing. Dimensions in mm.
175 175
26
12.5 XB2
XAB View W
XA2
View X WCharge pressure relief valve
X High press. relief valve A 80.5 T1
K1
ø25 Control press. relief valve MB2
B 7/16-14UNC-2B; 12 h9
14 deep K2 Pump center
ø18 ME3

62
0
37.5 37.5

34
43-0.2

170
T3
K4

ø15
K3

152.5
�
45°� 45° MA2

177.5
176.5

ME
27.8

A 57.2 MK4
40 67
High press. relief valve B
E
E1 37 E2
50
170
93 93

Shaft ends
S splined to DIN 5480
W40x2x30x18x9g
M12

28
45
47
62

Ports Tightening torque, max. 1)

A, B Pressure port, high press. range SAE J518c 1 in, code 62 –

fixing thread A/B ISO 68 7/16-14UNC-2B; 14 deep
S1 Inlet port, standard press. range SAE J518c 1 in, code 61 –
fixing thread DIN 13 M10; 14 deep
MA1, MB1 Test points pressure ports ISO 11926 7/16-20UNF-2B; 12 deep 2) 40 Nm
MA2,MB2 Test points pressure ports DIN 3852 M14x1,5; 12 deep 2) 80 Nm
T Oil drain ISO 11926 1 1/16-12UN-2B; 20 deep 2) 360 Nm
E1 To filter DIN 3852 M14x1,5; 12 deep 2) 80 Nm
E2 From filter DIN 3852 M14x1,5; 12 deep 2) 80 Nm
K1 Flushing port ISO 11926 7/8-14UNF-2B; 17 deep 240 Nm
K 2, K3 Flushing port ISO 11926 1 1/16-12UN-2B; 20 deep 2) 360 Nm
R(L) Oil fill and air bleed ISO 11926 1 1/16-12UN-2B; 20 deep 360 Nm
U Bearing flushing port ISO 11926 9/16-18UNF-2B; 13 deep 2)
80 Nm
ME, ME3 Test point charge pressure ISO 11926 9/16-18UNF-2B; 13 deep 2) 80 Nm
K4 Accumulator port ISO 11926 1 5/16-12UN-2B; 25 deep 2)
540 Nm
MK4 Test point charge pressure ISO 11926 9/16-18UNF-2B; 13 deep 2) 80 Nm
M1 Test point control pressure DIN 3853 S8 Form W 2)
X A2, XB2, X AB Ports for remote pressure pilot valves ISO 11926 9/16-18UNF-2B; 13 deep 80 Nm
T1, T3 Ports for unloading of high pres. relief valves ISO 11926 9/16-18UNF-2B; 13 deep 80 Nm
T2 Port for unloading of shaft seal ISO 11926 9/16-18UNF-2B; 13 deep 80 Nm
1)
Adhere to manufacturers data of the used fittings 2)
plugged

The contents of this information are subject to change without notice or obligation. Information herein should be confirmed before placing orders.

Hägglunds Drives AB, S-890 42 Mellansel, SWEDEN 14(34)

SP pumps

Unit dimensions, size 125 Before finalising your design please request a
certified installation drawing. Dimensions in mm.
Example: electro-hydraulic control with prop. solenoid and remote pressure control EP

446
411
366 XAB
203 Pilot valve for pressure control
M1, M2 MB1 XA2 XB2
R(L)

22 M10; 14 deep

216
26.2 Auxiliary pump

192
186

Size 38
B
U

52.4
K

ø26
T2
120

A
S1

217
220
34 T MA1
55
125
K1 T1
257 W
311
315
378
379
391.5
445.5
522

243
163 Solenoid A
M1
Solenoid plugs
13 DIN EN 175301-803 / ISO 4400
7 Protection class IP 65
15°

50 51.5
13
ø160 h8

Shown without aux. pump

L R

55
112

130

S1
34 U R(L) M2

14
203
472
Solenoid B
X

The contents of this information are subject to change without notice or obligation. Information herein should be confirmed before placing orders.

Hägglunds Drives AB, S-890 42 Mellansel, SWEDEN 15(34)

SP pumps

Before finalising your design please request a

Unit dimensions size, 125 certified installation drawing. Dimensions in mm.

279 252

View W
View X
45° 45°�
W
High press. relief valve A Charge press. relief valve
X
14 h9 80.5 T1
ø20 Control press. relief valve K1
B ø32 K3 0 K2

ø20
53.5-0.2
1/2-13UNC-2B; MK4 MB2

200
19 tief Pump center
ME3

114.5
41.5 41.5

62
27

172.5
T3
196.5

197.5

32.5
ME
31.8

A 66.7 K4 MA2
40 65
E
37
E1 50 E2 High press. relief valve B
200
111.5 111.5

Shaft ends
S splined to DIN 5480
W50x2x30x24x9g
M6

36
54
69

Ports Tightening torque, max. 1)

A, B Pressure port, high press. range SAE J518c 1 1/4 in, code 62 –
fixing thread A/B ISO 68 1/2-13UNC-2B 19 deep
S1 Inlet port, standard press. range SAE J518c 1 in, code 61 –
fixing thread DIN 13 M10; 14 deep
MA1, MB1 Test points pressure ports ISO 11926 7/16-20UNF-2B; 12 deep 2) 40 Nm
MA2,MB2 Test points pressure ports DIN 3852 M14x1,5; 12 deep2) 80 Nm
T Oil drain ISO 11926 1 5/16-12UN-2B 18 deep 2) 540 Nm
E1 To filter DIN 3852 M14x1,5; 12 deep 2) 80 Nm
E2 From filter DIN 3852 M14x1,5; 12 deep 2) 80 Nm
K1 Flushing port ISO 11926 7/8-14UNF-2B; 17 deep 240 Nm
K 2, K3 Flushing port ISO 11926 1 5/16-12UN-2B; 18 deep2) 540 Nm
R(L) Oil fill and air bleed ISO 11926 1 5/16-12UN-2B; 18 deep 540 Nm
U Bearing flushing port ISO 11926 9/16-18UNF-2B; 13 deep 2) 80 Nm
ME, ME3 Test points charge pressure ISO 11926 9/16-18UNF-2B; 13 deep 2) 80 Nm
K4 Accumulator port ISO 11926 1 5/16-12UN-2B; 25 deep 2) 540 Nm
MK4 Test point charge pressure ISO 11926 9/16-18UNF-2B; 13 deep 2) 80 Nm
M1, M2 Test point control pressure DIN 3852 M14x1,5; 12 deep 2)
80 Nm
X A2, XB2, X AB Ports for remote pressure pilot valves ISO 11926 9/16-18UNF-2B; 13 deep 2) 80 Nm
T1, T3 Ports for unloading of high pres. relief valves ISO 11926 9/16-18UNF-2B; 13 deep 80 Nm
T2 Port for unloading of shaft seal ISO 11926 9/16-18UNF-2B; 13 deep 80 Nm
1)
Adhere to manufacturers data of the used fittings 2)
plugged

The contents of this information are subject to change without notice or obligation. Information herein should be confirmed before placing orders.

Hägglunds Drives AB, S-890 42 Mellansel, SWEDEN 16(34)

SP pumps

Unit dimensions, size 180 Before finalising your design please request a
certified installation drawing. Dimensions in mm.
Example: electro-hydraulic control with prop. solenoid and remote pressure control EP

446
411
366
189 XAB Pilot valve for pressure control
M 1 ,M 2 MB1 XA2 XB2
R(L)
M10; 16 tief
22
Auxiliary pump

216
26.2

192
size 45
186

B
K

52.4
U

ø26
T2
120

217
220
S1
T MA1
34
55
125
203 K1 T1
257 W
311
315
378
391.5
472.5
552.1

243
163 Solenoid A

M1 Solenoid plugs
DIN EN 175301-803 / ISO 4400
Protection class IP 65
15.5
7
15°

Shown without auxiliary pump

50 51.5
13
ø160 h8
ø100

L R

15 0 15

55
112

140

S1
34 U R(L)
M2
14
203
472
Magnet B

The contents of this information are subject to change without notice or obligation. Information herein should be confirmed before placing orders.

Hägglunds Drives AB, S-890 42 Mellansel, SWEDEN 17(34)

SP pumps

Unit dimensions, size 180 Before finalising your design please request a
certified installation drawing. Dimensions in mm.

279 252

View X View W

Charge pressure relief valve

W
14 h9 High press. relief valve B 80.5 T1
X ME3 ø20 K1
ø32 0 K2 Control press. relief valve
B MA2

53.5 -0.2
1/2-13UNC-2B;

200
27 deep Pump center

ø20 27
K3 T3

114.5
41.5 41.5

62
32.5
31.8

172.5
45° 45°

197.5
196.5

K4
ME
A 66.7 MB2
40 65 MK4
E
37 E2
E1 50
High press. relief valve A
200
111.5 111.5

Shaft ends
S splined to DIN 5480
W50x2x30x24x9g

36
M6

54
57
74

Ports Tightening torques, max. 1)

A, B Pressure port, high press. range SAE J518c 1 1/4 in, code 62 –
fixing thread A/B ISO 68 1/2-13UNC-2B 27 deep
S Inlet port, standard press. range SAE J518c 1 in, code 61 –
fixing thread DIN 13 M10; min 16 deep
MA1, MB1 Test points pressure ports ISO 11926 7/16-20UNF-2B; 12 deep 2) 40 Nm
MA2,MB2 Test points pressure ports DIN 3852 M14x1,5; 12 deep 2) 80 Nm
T Oil drain ISO 11926 1 5/16-12UN-2B 18 deep 2) 540 Nm
E1 To filter DIN 3852 M14x1,5; 12 deep 2) 80 Nm
E 2 From filter DIN 3852 M14x1,5; 12 deep 2) 80 Nm
K1 Flushing port ISO 11926 7/8-14UNF-2B; 17 deep 240 Nm
K 2, K3 Flushing port ISO 11926 1 5/16-12UN-2B; 18 deep 2) 540 Nm
R(L) Oil fill and air bleed ISO 11926 1 5/16-12UN-2B; 18 deep 540 Nm
U Bearing flushing port ISO 11926 9/16-18UNF-2B; 13 deep 2) 80 Nm
ME, ME3 Test point charge pressure ISO 11926 9/16-18UNF-2B; 13 deep 2) 80 Nm
K4 Accumulator port ISO 11926 1 5/16-12UN-2B; 25 deep 2) 540 Nm
MK4 Test point charge pressure ISO 11926 9/16-18UNF-2B; 13 deep 2) 80 Nm
M1, M2 Test point control pressure DIN 3852 M14x1,5; 12 deep 2) 80 Nm
X A2, XB2, X AB Ports for remote pressure pilot valves ISO 11926 9/16-18UNF-2B; 13 deep 2) 80 Nm
T1, T3 Ports for unloading of high press. relief valves ISO 11926 9/16-18UNF-2B; 13 deep 80 Nm
T2 Port for unloading of shaft seal ISO 11926 9/16-18UNF-2B; 13 deep 80 Nm
1)
Adhere to manufacturers data of the used fittings 2)
plugged

The contents of this information are subject to change without notice or obligation. Information herein should be confirmed before placing orders.

Hägglunds Drives AB, S-890 42 Mellansel, SWEDEN 18(34)

SP pumps

Installation and commissioning instructions

During commissioning and during operation the pump housing must be filled with oil. The commissioning must be carried
out with low speeds, and without load, until the system is completely deairated.

During prolonged periods of standstill the housing can loose its oil via the service lines. At renewed start up, the pump hous-
ing must be refilled.

The inlet pressure at the suction port S may not fall below 0,8 bar.

The pump has to be airbleeded at the most upper position depending on the mounting position. U-port minimess connection
at vertical position.
Mounting position
Optional.
In order to achieve a low noise level, all hydraulic lines (suction, pressure, and drain lines) should be connected via flexible
members to the reservoir.
A check valve in the pump drain line should be avoided. If desirable, please contact Hägglunds Drives.
1. Vertical installation 2. Horizontal mounting
The highest of the ports T, K1, K 2 , K3resp. R/L must be
With vertical installation and the shaft pointing upwards
used to fill/bleed the pump housing and afterwards be
(fig. 1 and 2) bearing flushing is necessary, in order to pro-
piped as case drain.
vide lubrication for the front bearing and the shaft seal, see
page 7. Prior to start up fill the pump housing.

2.1 Mounting below the reservoir - flooded suction

1.1 Mounting below the reservoir - flooded suction
Case drain and inlet port S to be piped acc. to fig. 3 or
Prior to mounting, fill pump housing in horizontal position.
4.
Connect port T to tank, R/L closed. With pump vertical
and shaft upwards: fill through port R and bleed via port
Filling

T
R(L)
T
S1
R(L)

S1
R(L)
S1
Fig. 1 Fig. 3 Fig. 4

1.2 Mounting above reservoir - tanktop mounted

2.2 Mounting above reservoir - tanktop mounted
Prior to mounting, fill pump housing in horizontal position.
Connect port T to tank, R/L closed. With pump mounted Case drain and inlet port S to be piped acc. to fig. 5.
in vertical position and shaft upwards: fill via R(L) and
bleed through T, afterwards close R(L).
R(L)
Important: inlet pressure at port S may never fall below
0,8 bar.
Avoid mounting above reservoir if low noise levels are
important.
Filling
S1
T h max = 800

R(L)
ht min = 200

Fig. 5
h max = 800 S1
ht min = 200

Fig. 2

The contents of this information are subject to change without notice or obligation. Information herein should be confirmed before placing orders.

Hägglunds Drives AB, S-890 42 Mellansel, SWEDEN 19(34)

SP pumps

Technical data
Operating pressure range

Inlet Outlet
(Pressures acc. to DIN 24312) (Pressures acc. to DIN 24312)
Variable pump:
Required static charge pressure (MK4) pressure at port A or B
pb min_ ___________________________________________________________________15 bar nominal pressure pN_ _________________________350 bar
Heavy duty pressure peak pressure pmax_ _________________________ 400 bar
pb max___________________________________________________________________ 20 bar
Case drain pressure
Minimum static charge pressure (short periods), relief valve
Max. case drain pressure (housing pressure)
setting
pL continous_____________________________________ 5 bar
at pb min__________________________________________________________________ 8 bar
pL max________________________________________ 8 bar
Maximum static charge pressure port T1 has to be connected to the tank.
pb max___________________________________________________________________ 20 bar

Dynamic charge pressure (fluctuations)

min.______________________________________________________________________ 4 bar
max.___________________________________________________________________ 40 bar
Depending on the behaviour of the transmitted hydraulic
energy in the system, charge pressure fluctuations can
occur. In order to prevent damage in the system, charge
pressure protection, which monitors the static charge pres-
sure part is necessary. Port MK4 is suitable to monitor the
charge pressure. It is recommended to check regularly the
charge pressure for the permissible max. and min. spikes
with suitable measuring equipment.
In order to prevent excessive charge pressure spikes, a low
pressure accumulator can be connected to ports E2 , E3 or
K4. Accumulator sizing as well as the selection for the opti-
mum connecting location depend on the system behaviour
and the operating conditions under consideration of the
available charge flow. Depending on the total systems lea-
kage fluid flow, it may be necessary to increase the charge
flow by means of a larger, or additional charge pump.

Inlet pressure at port S

pS min _ ___________________________________ ≥ 0,8 bar
pS max_ ______________________________________ 2 bar

The contents of this information are subject to change without notice or obligation. Information herein should be confirmed before placing orders.

Hägglunds Drives AB, S-890 42 Mellansel, SWEDEN 20(34)

SP pumps
Table of values

Theoretical and rounded values, without considering hmh and hv

Size 250 355 500 750

Displacement variable pump Vg max cm 3
250 355 500 750
Displacement charge pump Vg max cm 3
63 80 98 143
Drive speed
max. nmax min-1 2200 2000 1800 1600
min. nmin min -1
800 800 800 800
Flow
at nmax qV max l/min 550 710 900 1200
at nE=1500 min -1
qVE max l/min 375 533 750 1125
Power Dp = 350 bar
at n max P max kW 321 414 525 700
at nE=1500 min -1
PE max kW 219 311 438 656
Torque
at Vg max Dp = 350 bar Tmax Nm 1391 1976 2783 4174
Dp = 100 bar T Nm 398 564 795 1193
Moment of inertia J kgm 2
0,0959 0,19 0,3325 0,66
(about drive axis)
Max. perm. angular acceleration rad/s2 775 600 540 400
Torsional stiffness Shaft end K kNm/rad 443 814 1145 1860
Shaft end S kNm/rad 368 475 1209 1812
Case volume l 10 8 14 19
Weight (empty) kg 250 270 385 540

Calculation of size
Vg • n • hV Vg = geometr. displacement per revolution in cm3
Flow qV = [l/min]
1000 Dp = pressure differential in bar
1,59 • Vg • Dp n = drive speed in rpm
Drive torque T = [Nm]
100 • hmh hV = volumetric efficiency
2π • T • n qV • Dp hmh = mechanical-hydraulic efficiency
Power P = = [kW]
60000 600 • ht ht = overall efficiency (ht = hV • hmh)

Permissible forces on drive shaft

Size 250 355 500 750
Fq
radial force, at X/2 Fq max N 2000 2200 2500 3000
max.
X/2 X/2
X

axial force, max. Fax N 1800 2000 2000 3000

± Fax

The contents of this information are subject to change without notice or obligation. Information herein should be confirmed before placing orders.

Hägglunds Drives AB, S-890 42 Mellansel, SWEDEN 21(34)

SP pumps

Technical data
Bearing flushing
For the following operating conditions bearing flushing is required for safe and continuous operation:
– Applications with special fluids (non-mineral oils), due to limited lubricity and narrow operating range
– Operation with critical conditions of temperature and viscosity with mineral oil
Flushing is carried out via U-port, which is located in the front flange area of [Link] flushing oil flows through the front
bearing and leaves the system together with the leakage oil at the drain port.
The following flushing flows are recommended for the various pump sizes:
Size 250 355 500 750
qfl l/min 10 15 20 30
These flushing flows will need a pressure drop of approximately 3 bar between inlet of U-port and pump housing.

Note. When using external bearing flushing at port U-port the throttle screw, which can be found at port U-port, has to be
turned in all the way to the stop.

The contents of this information are subject to change without notice or obligation. Information herein should be confirmed before placing orders.

Hägglunds Drives AB, S-890 42 Mellansel, SWEDEN 22(34)

SP pumps

Control options
EP - Electro-hydraulic control with proportional solenoid

The EP control adjusts the pump displacement proportional

to the solenoid current. The pump displacement is therefore
stepless variable. One proportional solenoid is assigned to
each direction of flow.

Operating voltage: 24 V
Nominal current: 800 mA
Range 210...740 mA
Nominal resistance at 20 °C: 19 Ω

HD - Hydraulic cotrol, pilot pressure dependent

The positioning cylinder of the pump and therefore the
swivel angle is varied in proportion to the difference in pilot
pressure applied to the two control ports (X1 and X2). The
pump displacement is therefore stepless variable. One pilot
line is assigned to each direction of flow.

Operating pressure: 10-45 bar

HDT - Hydraulic cotrol, with built on prop. valve

The positioning cylinder of the pump and therefore the
swivel angle is varied in proportion to the electrical current
applied to the proportional valve. The pump displacement is
therefore stepless variable.

The contents of this information are subject to change without notice or obligation. Information herein should be confirmed before placing orders.

Hägglunds Drives AB, S-890 42 Mellansel, SWEDEN 23(34)

SP pumps

Hydraulic circuit
Example SP 500 EP

� ��
Relief valve flushing
�� pressure
��
EP Electr.-hydr.
�� control with prop.
��
solenoids and remote
pressure control
�� Pressure
compensator
Flushing valve
adjustment

Crossover relief valves/ � �

High pressure relief

valve ��

Bypass valve
��
��
��
Check valves
charge flow

Control pressure relief

valve

��
� ��
Integrated charge pump

Ports
A, B Pressure ports M E3 Measuring port ex. charge pressure
(plugged)
S Inlet port M K4 Measuring port flushing pressure (plugged)
E1 To filter (plugged) M1, M2 Measuring ports control pressure (plugged)
E2 From filter (plugged) R(L) Oil fill and air bleed port
E3 External charge port (plugged) T Oil drain port (plugged)
K1 Flushing port T1 Drain port pressure relief valve
K2, K3 Flushing ports (plugged) U Bearing flushing port (plugged)
K4 Accumulator port (plugged) T2 Drain port shaft seal
MA, M B, MAB Measuring ports operating pressure (plugged) XA2, XB2, XAB Pilot port pressure control (plugged)

The contents of this information are subject to change without notice or obligation. Information herein should be confirmed before placing orders.

Hägglunds Drives AB, S-890 42 Mellansel, SWEDEN 24(34)

SP pumps

Integrated charge pump and control valves

Crossover relief valves
2 pilot operated crossover relief valves
The valves limit the max. pressure spikes to an acceptable safe level, and prevent damage to the main pump.
Each pressure side has its own relief valve, which is vented to the low pressure side of the loop.
The valves are normally set to a pressure level of 390 bar.
If another setting is required, please state that in clear text.

Control pressure relief valve

Control pressure: To adjust the control, measure the control pressurein E2-port (minimess connection). Adjust the pressure
to 30 bar + (pn - ps) with the pump in neutral.
To get the value pn, measure the pressure in ME3-port (minimess connection) with the pump in neutral.
To get the value ps, measure the pressure in ME3-port (minimess connection) with the pump swiveld out pump to the >50 %
stroke. Secure tha the flushing valve has moved.

pn - ps, should be about 5-12 bar depending on the pump size.

Charge pressure relief valve

direct operated
Adjustment range Dpfl 10...25 bar
Standard setting: 15 bar

Integrated charge pump

Standard sizes:
Size 250 355 500 750
cm3 63 80 98 143

Control pressure filter

Controls HD and EP in the size 500 and 750 with internal supply of control pressure out of one of the high pressure sides

The contents of this information are subject to change without notice or obligation. Information herein should be confirmed before placing orders.

Hägglunds Drives AB, S-890 42 Mellansel, SWEDEN 25(34)

SP pumps

Unit dimensions, size 250 Before finalising your design please request a
certified installation drawing. Dimensions in mm.

XA2
pressure control side A
260
225 XAB
180 XB2 pressure control side B

40 ME3
30
MABP E3

252
233

E2
3 100
U E1

55
Ø60 m6

K B
Z

55
42
M20
151

150
53

7 T MB
105 90 S
125 150 Y 18
374 51
477
509 23

Solenoid A
M1 plug connector DIN 175301-803

U
5/8-11UNC-2B
MK4 29 deep
51.5

MA
Ø224 h8
M20

K4
55 13

Ø38
79.4
R

55
L

42
144

A
192

R(L) K1

70 36.5
W60x2x28x9g U 374 to mounting flange
DIN 5480 477 to mounting flange
17 plug connector DIN 175301-803
90 248 M2
Solenoid B

Ports
Tightening torques, max.
A,B Pressure port (high pressure range) SAE J518 1 1/2 in
fixing thread ISO 68 5/8-11UNC-2B; 29 deep - Nm
S Inlet port (standard pressure range) SAE J518 2 1/2 in
fixing thread ISO 68 1/2-13UNC-2B; 27 deep 90 Nm
MA,B,ABP Test points high pressure (plugged) ISO 11926 9/16-18UNF-2B; 13 deep 80 Nm
MS Test point inlet pressure (plugged) ISO 11926 9/16-18UNF-2B; 13 deep 80 Nm
T Oil drain (plugged) ISO 11926 1 5/8-12UN-2B; 20 deep 960 Nm
E1 To filter (plugged) ISO 11926 1 5/16-12UN-2B; 20 deep 540 Nm
E2 Fom filter (plugged) ISO 11926 1 5/16-12UN-2B; 20 deep 540 Nm
K1 Flushing port ISO 11926 1 5/16-12UN-2B; 20 deep 540 Nm

The contents of this information are subject to change without notice or obligation. Information herein should be confirmed before placing orders.

Hägglunds Drives AB, S-890 42 Mellansel, SWEDEN 26(34)

SP pumps

Before finalising your design please request a

certified installation drawing. Dimensions in mm.

279 252
Y
50.8

1/2-13UNC-2B
18 h9
K3 K2 27 deep

Ø2
60

89.9
64 -0.2

Ø63
265
144.5
45° 45° MS
S

T1
265
143.5 382 to mounting flange
143.5
394 to mounting flange

control pressure
relief valve pressure
Z
relief valve A
X
5/8-11UNC-2B 29 deep 36.5

Ø38
A
B

79.4
X U
55
88.5

pressure T1
247
relief valve B
192.2 flushing pressure
relief valve
200 200

Ports
Tightening torques, max.
K2,3 Flushing port (plugged) ISO 11926 1 5/8-12UN-2B; 20 deep 960 Nm
R(L) Oil fill and air bleed ISO 11926 1 5/8-12UN-2B; 20 deep 960 Nm
U Bearing flushing port (plugged) ISO 11926 3/4-16UNF-2B; 12 deep 160 Nm
E3 External charge flow port (plugged) ISO 11926 1 5/16-12UN-2B; 20 deep 540 Nm
M E3 Test point charge pressure (plugged) ISO 11926 9/16-18UNF-2B; 13 deep 80 Nm
K4 Accumulator port (plugged) ISO 11926 1 5/16-12UN-2B; 20 deep 540 Nm
M K4 Test point loop flushing pressure (plugged) ISO 11926 9/16-18UNF-2B; 13 deep 80 Nm
M1,2 Test point control pressure (plugged) DIN 3852 M18x1,5; 12 deep 140 Nm
XA2,B2,AB Pilots port for pressure control (plugged) ISO 11926 9/16-18UNF-2B; 13 deep 80 Nm
T1 Drain port flushing relief valve ISO 11926 9/16-18UNF-2B; 13 deep 80 Nm

The contents of this information are subject to change without notice or obligation. Information herein should be confirmed before placing orders.

Hägglunds Drives AB, S-890 42 Mellansel, SWEDEN 27(34)

SP pumps

Unit dimensions, size 355 Before finalising your design please request a
certified installation drawing. Dimensions in mm.

XA2
260
pressure control side A
225 XAB
180 XB2 pressure control side B

30 ME3

252
MABP E3
233

E2
4.5 100 B
Ø70m6

55 55
Z

150
151

M20

42
E1
7 T
105 MB
90
125 150 Y S
381
484
516
539

Solenoid A
M1
plug connector DIN 175301-803

U
5/8-11UNC-2B
MK4 29 deep
51.5

MA
M20

K4
Ø224h8

55 13

79.4
R

55
L

Ø38
42
144

53
192

K1 A
U 36.5
82 R(L)
W70x3x22x9g 381 to mounting flange
DIN 5480 484 to mounting flange
17 plug connector DIN 175301-803
102 248 M2
Solenoid B

The contents of this information are subject to change without notice or obligation. Information herein should be confirmed before placing orders.

Hägglunds Drives AB, S-890 42 Mellansel, SWEDEN 28(34)

SP pumps

Before finalising your design please request a

certified installation drawing. Dimensions in mm.

279 252
Y
50.8

1/2-13UNC-2B
20 h9
Ø2
27 deep
K2
80
K3

265

88.9
74 -0.2

Ø63
144.5
45° 45° S
MS

265 T1
389 to mounting flange
143.5 143.5
401 to mounting flange

control pressure Z pressure X 5/8-11UNC-2B 29 deep

relief valve relief valve A 36.5

Ø38
A

79.4
B
X U
55

B
88.5

pressure
relief valve B 147 T1
192.5 flushing pressure
200 200 relief valve

The contents of this information are subject to change without notice or obligation. Information herein should be confirmed before placing orders.

Hägglunds Drives AB, S-890 42 Mellansel, SWEDEN 29(34)

SP pumps

Unit dimensions, size 500 Before finalising your design please request a
certified installation drawing. Dimensions in mm.

XA2 plug connector DIN 43650-AM3

XB2
MAB MB R(L) M2
396

ME3
280

304
315
E3
3 125
E2
M20

55 55
Ø80m6

170
42 E1

+5
16 T
130 47 80 MS
180 155
415
425
520
575

48 211 Solenoid A

pressure control side A

17.5 M1 MA
13 U U
XA2 44.5
MK4
K4

Ø50
189
Ø315h8

136
M20
Ø230 +5
Ø225

96.8
L R

55
136

42
K1 A
3/4-10UNC
XB2 35 deep
W80x3x25x9g 90
DIN 5480 140 pressure control side B MS
30 XAB 415 to mounting flange
279 50 Solenoid B 520 to mounting flange
552

Ports
Tightening torques, max.
A,B Pressure port (high pressure range) SAE J518 2 in
fixing thread ISO 68 3/4-10UNC; 35 deep - Nm
S Inlet port (standard pressure range) SAE J518 2 1/2 in
fixing thread ISO 68 1/2-13UNC; 27 deep 90 Nm
MA,B,AB Test points high pressure (plugged) ISO 11926 9/16-18UNF-2B; 13 deep 80 Nm
MS Test point inlet pressure (plugged) ISO 11926 9/16-18UNF-2B; 13 deep 80 Nm
T Oil drain (plugged) ISO 11926 1 7/8-12UN-2B; 20 deep - Nm
E1 To filter (plugged) ISO 11926 1 5/16-12UN-2B; 20 deep 540 Nm
E2 Fom filter (plugged) ISO 11926 1 5/16-12UN-2B; 20 deep 540 Nm
K1 Flushing port ISO 11926 1 5/16-12UN-2B; 20 deep 540 Nm
K2,3 Flushing port (plugged) ISO 11926 1 7/8-12UN-2B; 20 deep - Nm

The contents of this information are subject to change without notice or obligation. Information herein should be confirmed before placing orders.

Hägglunds Drives AB, S-890 42 Mellansel, SWEDEN 30(34)

SP pumps
Before finalising your design please request a
certified installation drawing. Dimensions in mm.

332 306

110 110 Y

281
MS

Ø24
190
1/2-13UNC
22 h9 27 deep

85 -0.2

Ø63
88.9
147
161
K3
5

190
40

MS 50.8
Ø

K2 S
0

T1
437 to mounting flange
8x

155 155
45

190 190
45
°(=

°
36

22.5°
0°
)

control pressure
Z pressure X
relief valve
relief valve A 44.5
3/4-10UNC
B A M20 (x2.5) M20 (x2.5)

35 deep
96.8
Ø50
X U M20 (x2.5) M20 (x2.5)

flushing pressure
pressure relief valve
relief valve B 191 192.5
205 205

Ports
Tightening torques, max.
R(L) Oil fill and air bleed ISO 11926 1 7/8-12UN-2B; 20 deep - Nm
U Bearing flushing port (plugged) ISO 11926 3/4-16UNF-2B; 12 deep 160 Nm
E3 External charge flow port (plugged) ISO 11926 1 5/16-12UN-2B; 20 deep 540 Nm
M E3 Test point charge pressure (plugged) ISO 11926 9/16-18UNF-2B; 13 deep 80 Nm
K4 Accumulator port (plugged) ISO 11926 1 5/16-12UN-2B; 20 deep 540 Nm
M K4 Test point loop flushing pressure (plugged) ISO 11926 9/16-18UNF-2B; 13 deep 80 Nm
M1 Test point control pressure (plugged) DIN 3852 M22x1,5; 14 deep 210 Nm
M2 Test point control pressure (plugged) DIN 3852 M14x1,5; 12 deep 80 Nm
XA2,B2,AB Pilots port for pressure control (plugged) ISO 11926 9/16-18UNF-2B; 13 deep 80 Nm
T1 Drain port flushing relief valve ISO 11926 9/16-18UNF-2B; 13 deep 80 Nm

The contents of this information are subject to change without notice or obligation. Information herein should be confirmed before placing orders.

Hägglunds Drives AB, S-890 42 Mellansel, SWEDEN 31(34)

SP pumps

Unit dimensions, size 750 Before finalising your design please request a
certified installation drawing. Dimensions in

XA2 plug connector DIN 43650-AM3

MAB MB R(L) M2 XB2

ME3
425.5

345
334
317

E3
4.5 125 E2
Ø90 m6

55 55
Z

185
M24

50 E1

+5 T MS
16 89
130 58 161
190 467
475
585
642

Y
58 221 Solenoid A
18 pressure control side A
13 U M1 U MA
44.5
XA2
MK4
3/4-10UNC
231
Ø400h8

K4 35 deep
259 +5

136
M24
Ø250

96.8
L R

50
136

Ø50
50 K1
A
XB2 467 to mounting flange
W90x3x28x9g 105 MS
XAB pressure control side B
DIN 5480 8 577 to mounting flange
165 32
Solenoid B
301 50
619

The contents of this information are subject to change without notice or obligation. Information herein should be confirmed before placing orders.

Hägglunds Drives AB, S-890 42 Mellansel, SWEDEN 32(34)

SP pumps

Before finalising your design please request

332 315

110 110
Y

319
25h9

Ø22

232
95 -0.2
1/2-13UNC
Ø

MS
45

27 deep
0

88.9
Ø63
U

178

153
232
S
95

K3 MS
Ø4

T1
8x 45 182 182 491 to mounting flange
45 °
°( 232 232
=3
60 22.5°
°)

X
control pressure Z 44.5
pressure
relief valve relief valve A 3/4-10UNC
35 deep
96.8
B Ø50
A B
X U

flushing pressure
pressure
relief valve
relief valve B 194 196.5
205 205

Ports
Tightening torques, max.
R(L) Oil fill and air bleed ISO 11926 1 7/8-12UN-2B; 20 deep Nm
U Bearing flushing port (plugged) ISO 11926 3/4-16UNF-2B; 12 deep 160 Nm
E3 External charge flow port (plugged) ISO 11926 1 5/16-12UN-2B; 20 deep 540 Nm
M E3 Test point charge pressure (plugged) ISO 11926 9/16-18UNF-2B; 13 deep 80 Nm
K4 Accumulator port (plugged) ISO 11926 1 5/16-12UN-2B; 20 deep 540 Nm
M K4 Test point loop flushing pressure (plugged) ISO 11926 9/16-18UNF-2B; 13 deep 80 Nm
M1 Test point control pressure (plugged) DIN 3852 M22x1,5; 14 deep 210 Nm
M2 Test point control pressure (plugged) DIN 3852 M14x1,5; 12 deep 80 Nm
XA2,B2,AB Pilots port for pressure control (plugged) ISO 11926 9/16-18UNF-2B; 13 deep 80 Nm
T1 Drain port flushing relief valve ISO 11926 9/16-18UNF-2B; 13 deep 80 Nm

The contents of this information are subject to change without notice or obligation. Information herein should be confirmed before placing orders.

Hägglunds Drives AB, S-890 42 Mellansel, SWEDEN 33(34)

SP pumps

Installation and commissioning instructions

During commissioning and during operation the pump housing must be filled with oil. The commissioning must be carried
out with low speeds, and without load, until the system is completely deairated.
During prolonged periods of standstill the housing can loose its oil via the service lines. At renewed start up, the pump
housing must be refilled.
The inlet pressure at the suction port S may not fall below 0,8 bar.
The pump has to be airbleeded at the most upper postion depending on the mounting position. U-port minimess connec-
tion at vertical position.
Mounting position:
Optional.
In order to achieve a low noise level, all hydraulic lines (suction, pressure, and drain lines)should be connected via flexible
members to the reservoir
A check valve in the pump drain line should be avoided. If desirable, please contact Hägglunds Drives.

1. Vertical installation 2. Horizontal mounting

With vertical installation and the shaft pointing upwards The highest of the ports T, K1, K2 , K3 resp. R/L must
(fig. 1 and 2) bearing flushing is necessary, in order to be used to fill/bleed the pump and afterwards be piped
provide lubrication for the front bearing and the shaft as case drain.
seal, see page 22.
Prior to start up fill the pump housing.
1.1 Mounting below the reservoir - flooded suction 2.1 Mounting below the reservoir - flooded suction
Prior to mounting fill pump housing (pump in horizontal Case drain and inlet port S to be piped according to fig.
position). Connect port T to reservoir , R/L closed. 3 or 4.
Option for filling in installed condition with shaft pointing
upwards: fill through port R and bleed via port T, after-
wards close port R.
Filling R(L)
S T

T
R(L)
T S
R(L)
S
Fig. 1 Fig. 3 Fig. 4

1.2 Mounting above reservoir - tanktop mounted 2.2 Mounting above reservoir - tanktop mounted
Prior to mounting fill pump housing(pump in horizontal Case drain and inlet port S to be piped acc. to fig. 5.
position. Connect port T to reservoir, R/L closed.
Option for filling in installed condition with shaft pointing R(L)
upwards: fill through R/L and bleed via T, afterwards
close R(L).
Important: Suction(inlet) pressure at port S may never
fall below 0,8 bar.
Avoid mounting above reservoir if low noise levels are
S h max = 800
important.
Filling ht min = 200

R(L) Fig. 5

S
h max = 800
Fig. 2
ht min = 200

The contents of this information are subject to change without notice or obligation. Information herein should be confirmed before placing orders.

Hägglunds Drives AB, S-890 42 Mellansel, SWEDEN 34(34)

RA™ & Failsafe EF™
Features
RA™ and EF™ uses the rubber profile in shear and
compression, obtaining good vertical flexibility with the
advantage of horizontal stability.
For normal speeds of approx. 1500 rpm, the RA™ and EF™
type provides a degree of isolation of 75-85%. For better
isolation, the alternative RAEM™ or M™ can be chosen.

Its unique construction and the latest production methods

make Novibra® type RA™ and EF™ a high performance
mounting having a number of advantages:
Rubber features are utilised effectively combining
compression and shear.
type RA™ Wide load rating options, 40-2100 kg.
type Failsafe EF™ Corrosion protected to cope with arduous environments on
land or marine applications (Fe/Zn8C as per ISO 2081).
For effective isolation of vibration and noise on machines Fitted as standard with an integral fail-safe design device
with rotating movements, the product can be applied to: with resilient stop, making RA and EF ideal for use in mobile
Pumps Combustion engines applications. The RA™/EF™ mounts can accomodate
Fans Industrial and Marine gensets occasional shock loads. The mount will withstand shock
Converters Generators loads up to 2 g without plastic deformation.
Compressors Clear and durable product marking so that mountings can
be identified even after several years in operation.
Also suitable for use with presses, punches and other Domed shape cover to protect against oil contamination.
work shop machines.

M RA100, RA200 17-1463

RA500, RA800
17-1463 ØD
G
d
d A
K
H A
K RA1200, RA1800

ØD RA350
RA
G

d
H A d
A
K K

Type Part no. Dimensions in mm M-Max (Kg) Weight

Failsafe EF 40ºIRH 60ºIRH D A H K d L G 40ºIRH 60ºIRH (Kg)
17-1463-35 10-00503 55 0,22
17-1463-45 10-00504 65 76,2 35 94 8,5 10 M12 80 0,22
17-1463-60 10-00505 170 0,22
17-1463-70 10-00506 240 0,22
RA100/M10 10-00106 10-00107 79 110 30 130 9 12 M10 105 240 0,33
RA100/M12 10-00166 10-00167 79 110 30 130 9 12 M12 105 240 0,33
RA200/M10 10-00110 10-00111 94 124 35 150 10 15 M10 180 280 0,47
RA200/M12 10-00165 10-00091 94 124 35 150 10 15 M12 180 280 0,47
RA350/M12 10-00172 10-00173 101 140-148 38 175 14 18 M12 250 450 0,74
RA350/M16 10-00112 10-00113 101 140-148 38 175 14 18 M16 250 450 0,74
RA500 10-00116 10-00117 123 158 42 192 14 18 M16 450 700 1,02
RA800 10-00118 10-00119 144 182 46 216 14 18 M16 750 1300 1,59
RA1200 10-00154 10-00155 161 140 58 170 14 M20 900 1600 2,19
RA1800 10-00156 10-00157 181 160 66,5 190 14 M20 1300 2100 2,33

64
BACKER Væskeoppvarming 3:14

Varmekolber for olje R 2" rørgjenger

Koblingsboks K7
[Link]. 1030541001
Utførelse: Stål rørelementer AISI304
R 2" messinghode
Følerlomme
Spenning: 230/400V

Flatebelastning 2,5W/cm2
Effekt L Koblingsboks K7T
Type [Link].
kW mm [Link]. 1030541101
0,33
OE 31 0,67 275 2530341405
1,0
OE16 1,5 410 2530341303

OE 33 2,0 425 2530341401 Termostater

OE 34 3,0 545 2530341402
OE 36 4,5 805 2530341403
OE 39 6,0 1075 2530341404
Flatebelastning 0,9W/cm2
Effekt L
Type [Link]. Type L Temp [Link].
kW mm
OE 311 0,33 275 2530490205 TSDH 0702 180 10-90o C 1160156701

OE 331 0,67 425 2530490201 TSDH 1103 270 3-55o C 1160156702

OE 341 1,0 545 2530490202 TSDH 1104 270 38-90o C 1060156703

o
OE 361 1,5 805 2530490203 TSDH 1103 270 58-110 C 1060156704

OE 391 2,0 1075 2530490204 TSDH 1102 270 98-150o C 1060156705

o
Andre typer lages på forespørsel. TSDH 1106 270 130-182 C 1060156706
210502

NORSKE BACKER AS - INDUSTRIVEIEN 19 - 2212 KONGSVINGER

Tel. +47 62 82 88 28 Faks +47 62 81 74 56
E-post post@[Link] [Link]
Hägglunds DUe | Unidad de propulsión 33/62

4.2.5 Enfriador de HDC (aceite por aire) Hägglunds

DD00062500 Datos mecánicos
Motor eléctrico:
• Aislamiento: Clase F
• Aumento de temperatura: Clase B
• Estándar de protección: IP55

Tabla 35: Volumen de aceite

Tipo de enfriador Volumen de aceite del enfriador
l gal
HDC 050 5.7 1.51
HDC 060 8.7 2.30
HDC 080 17.7 4.68
HDC 085 15.5 4.09
Fig. 31: Enfriador HDC Hägglunds
HDC 090 28.6 7.56
HDC 100 32.7 8.64
HDC 200 54.8 14.48
Función
• El enfriador de aceite por aire consiste en un
ventilador impulsado por un motor eléctrico que
sopla aire a través de la matriz del enfriador. Tabla 36: Tipos de material
• Los tubos de refrigeración están hechos de Parte Material
secciones de aluminio extruido. Son planos con Matriz Aluminio
lados cortos y estrechos para exponer un área de Aspas del
Nailon PAG
máxima emisión de calor y permitir una baja caída ventilador
de la presión del aire. Cubierta del
Acero
• El motor eléctrico es un motor asíncrono trifásico. ventilador
• Siempre se instala una válvula de Bypass de 8 bares Caperuza del
Acero
en el interior de la DUe entre la entrada y la salida ventilador

del enfriador. Motor eléctrico Aluminio

Una válvula de Bypass adicional se instala Otras partes Acero

directamente en el enfriador bajo las siguientes Revestimiento Pintura negra RAL 9005
condiciones
-Cuando el enfriador se instala por separado y la
temperatura ambiente es inferior a 0 °C.
-Cuando el enfriador se instala en la unidad y la
temperatura ambiente es inferior a -20 °C.

Nota:
cuando el enfriador de aceite por aire se separa de la
unidad de potencia, la caída de presión a través de las
mangueras de la tubería no puede superar 1 bar (14 psi).
Siempre aplica para el tamaño HDC 200.

Temperatura máxima recomendada

Para la viscosidad del aceite 68 cSt, la temperatura máxima DD00062721
Fig. 30: Símbolo hidráulico
recomendada del aceite de entrada se limita a 63 °C (145 °F)
y para 100 y 150 cSt se limita a 66 °C (151 °F).
La temperatura está limitada por:
• La vida útil del motor hidráulico
• La viscosidad mínima recomendada del fluido hidráulico
RS 15325_2020-04, Bosch Rexroth AB
34/62 Unidad de propulsión | Hägglunds DUe

Enfriador HDC, datos del motor eléctrico/sonido

Tabla 37: Código de orden del enfriador HDC, datos del motor eléctrico/sonido

Código de Potencia de propulsión (kW) Ruido Presión dinámica máxima Presión estática máxima
orden del permitida permitida
enfriador 50 Hz 60 Hz dBA bar psi bar psi
HDC 050-4 0.37 0.43 78 14 203 26 377
HDC 060-4 0.75 0.90 78 14 203 26 377
HDC 080-4 1.5 1.8 78 14 203 26 377
HDC 085-6 2.2 2.6 78 14 203 21 305
HDC 090-6 2.2 2.6 85 14 203 21 305
HDC 100-6 2.2 2.6 87 14 203 21 305
HDC 100-4 7.5 9.0 97 14 203 21 305
HDC 200-6 7.5 9.0 92 14 203 21 305
HDC 200-4 18.5 22.2 100 14 203 21 305

Datos eléctricos

Tabla 38: Datos nominales de los motores eléctricos

Voltaje (V) Frecuencia (Hz)

380 50
400 50
440 60
460 60

DD00066437

Fig. 32: Símbolo eléctrico

Bosch Rexroth AB, RS 15325_2020-04

Hägglunds DUe | Unidad de propulsión 35/62

Código de orden
Para identificar el equipo de Hägglunds, se utiliza el siguiente código de orden.

Ejemplo: Hägglunds HDC200

01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12
HDC 200 - A 6 G 01 - 20 - 40 - 0 - 1 - 4 - 00

01 Enfriador de aire por aceite Hägglunds

HDC

02 Tamaño del enfriador

20 020
30 030
50 050
60 060
80 080
85 085
90 090
100 100
200 200

03 Medios de enfriamiento
Aire A

04 Cantidad de polos, motor eléctrico

4 polos 4
6 polos 6
8 polos 8

05 Tipo de motor eléctrico; voltaje

230 V 50 Hz A
380 V 50 Hz B
400 V 50 Hz C
415 V 50 Hz D
415 V 50 Hz (355–455 V) (47–53 Hz) E
460 V 50 Hz F
500 V 50 Hz G
525 V 50 Hz H
550 V 50 Hz I
660 V 50 Hz J
690 V 50 Hz K
440 V 60 Hz L
460 V 60 Hz M
480 V 60 Hz N
Motor eléctrico especial Z

RS 15325_2020-04, Bosch Rexroth AB

36/62 Unidad de propulsión | Hägglunds DUe

06 Salida del motor

0.18 kW 50 Hz 00
0.37 kW 50 Hz 01
0.75 kW 50 Hz 02
1.5 kW 50 Hz 03
2.2 kW 50 Hz 04
3 kW 50 Hz 05
4 kW 50 Hz 06
5.5 kW 50 Hz 07
7.5 kW 50 Hz 08
11 kW 50 Hz 09
18.5 kW 50 Hz 10
22 kW 50 Hz 11
30 kW 50 Hz 12
0.21 kW 60 Hz 20
0.43 kW 60 Hz 21
0.9 kW 60 Hz 22
1.8 kW 60 Hz 23
2.6 kW 60 Hz 24
3.6 kW 60 Hz 25
4.8 kW 60 Hz 26
9.0 kW 60 Hz 27
13.2 kW 60 Hz 28
22.2 kW 60 Hz 29

07 Temperatura ambiente mínima

-20 °C (Estándar) 20
-30 °C 30
-40 °C 40
-45 °C 45

08 Temperatura ambiente máxima

+40 °C (Estándar) 40
+45 °C 45
+50 °C 50

09 Calentador
Ninguno (Estándar) 0
Calentador S

10 Altitud (A)
A < 1000 m (estándar) 1
1000 m < A < 2000 m 2
2000 m < A < 3000 m 3
3000 m < A < 4000 m 4
4000 m < A < 4500 m 5
4500 m < A < 5000 m 6

11 Matriz del enfriador

Sin bypass (estándar) 0
Bypass 4 bares 4

12 Diseño especial
Estándar 00
Índice especial 01-99 01

Bosch Rexroth AB, RS 15325_2020-04

Couplings

VU
Standard check valves. Applications

Check valves acting as a safety device into hydraulic systems.

Standard versions contain a spring set to open the valve at 35 KPa;
the range of settings is wide (up to 950 kPa). Normally available
with inlet and outlet female threads. Pressure
Pressure DropDrop
(GPM)

size
size

size
size
size

size

size
size
Pressure
(MPa)

(psi)
(L/min)
Rated Flow
Test performed according to ISO 18869

Technical Specifications
Burst pressure (MPa)
Size Working Pressure Flow Rate Spillage Force to Connect Male Female Male
dash mm inch (MPa) (l/min) (ml) (N) + Female
04 6.3 1/4" 50 17 200

06 10 3/8" 27 30 110

08 12.5 1/2" 35 90 140

12 20 3/4" 25 140 100

16 25 1" 25 200 100

20 31.5 1-1/4" 25 300 100

24 37.5 1-1/2" 20 500 80

32 50 2" 13 700 52

Material Steel Valve Type Poppet

Seals NBR Connection

Working temperatures - 25 °C to + 125 °C Disconnection

Surface treatment MATE 500 (CrIII)

Connection
Under Pressure
Series Interchange

195
VU
Thread details in the first line are referred to Thread 1, thread details in the second line are referred to Thread 2 - outlet.

Size Thread details Pressure

L (L1 + Thread) D1 HEX1
mm inch Thread Type Standard Thread Part Number Cracking Pressure
mm inch mm inch mm inch
27/ SAE ISO 8434-3 9/16"-18 UNF FEMALE
6.3 1/4" VUS27/CS11/CSBS 54 2.13 19 0.75 17 0.67 50 kPa
11/ SAE ISO 8434-3 9/16” – 18 UNF MALE
27/ SAE ISO 8434-3 9/16"-18 UNF FEMALE
6.3 1/4" VUJ27/CS11/CSBS * 54 2.13 19 0.75 17 0.67 50 kPa
11/ SAE ISO 8434-3 9/16” – 18 UNF MALE
6.3 1/4" 16/ BSPP ISO 8434-6 60° 1/4 BSPP MALE VU14M 14M 50 1.97 24.5 0.96 22 0.87 35 kPa
6.3 1/4" F NPTF ANSI B1.20.3 NPTF 1/4" FEMALE VU14FN 14FN 50 1.97 21 0.83 19 0.75 35 kPa
6.3 1/4" F BSPP ISO 1179-1 BSPP 1/4" FEMALE VU14F 14F C 50 1.97 21 0.83 19 0.75 100 kPa
6.3 1/4" F BSPP ISO 1179-1 BSPP 1/4" FEMALE VU14F 14F B 50 1.97 21 0.83 19 0.75 50 kPa
6.3 1/4" F BSPP ISO 1179-1 BSPP 1/4" FEMALE VU14F 14F A2 50 1.97 21 0.83 19 0.75 20 kPa
6.3 1/4" F BSPP ISO 1179-1 BSPP 1/4" FEMALE VU14F 14F 50 1.97 21 0.83 19 0.75 35 kPa
10 3/8" 16/ BSPP ISO 8434-6 60° 3/8 BSPP MALE VU38M 38M V 50 1.97 24.5 0.96 22 0.87 35 kPa
10 3/8" 16/ BSPP ISO 8434-6 60° 3/8 BSPP MALE VU38M 38M 50 1.97 24.5 0.96 22 0.87 35 kPa
10 3/8" F NPTF ANSI B1.20.3 NPTF 3/8" FEMALE VU38FN 38MN 58.1 2.29 24.5 0.96 22 0.87 35 kPa
10 3/8" F NPTF ANSI B1.20.3 NPTF 3/8" FEMALE VU38FN 38FN 60 2.36 27 1.06 24 0.94 35 kPa
10 3/8" F BSPP ISO 1179-1 BSPP 3/8" FEMALE VU38F 38F B 60 2.36 27 1.06 24 0.94 50 kPa
10 3/8" F BSPP ISO 1179-1 BSPP 3/8" FEMALE VU38F 38F 60 2.36 27 1.06 24 0.94 35 kPa
12.5 1/2" 01/ SAE ISO 11926-3 3/4"-16 UNF MALE VU41/FS-11/HS I 63.5 2.5 30 1.18 27 1.06 400 kPa
12.5 1/2" 01/ SAE ISO 11926-3 3/4"-16 UNF MALE VU41/FS-11/HS E 63.5 2.5 30 1.18 27 1.06 200 kPa
12.5 1/2" 01/ SAE ISO 11926-3 3/4"-16 UNF MALE VU41/FS-11/HS C 63.5 2.5 30 1.18 27 1.06 100 kPa
12.5 1/2" 35/ SAE ISO 8434-3 13/16"-16 UN FEMALE ORFS VU27/FS-11/FS B 59.5 2.34 30 1.18 27 1.06 50 kPa
12.5 1/2" 01/ BSPP ISO 1179-3 1/2" BSPP MALE VU21/DG-11/HS I 64.6 2.54 30 1.18 27 1.06 400 kPa
12.5 1/2" 02/ METRIC ISO 8434-1-L M22x1.5 MALE 15L VU2/FM-3/GM 120 4.72 30 1.18 27 1.06 35 kPa
12.5 1/2" 02/ METRIC ISO 8434-1-L M18x1.5 MALE 12L VU2/DM-2/DM H 52.4 2.06 30 1.18 27 1.06 350 kPa
12.5 1/2" 13/ SAE ISO 8434-2 7/8"-14 UNF MALE JIC VU13/GS-1/GS H 66.7 2.63 30 1.18 27 1.06 350 kPa
12.5 1/2" 13/ SAE ISO 8434-2 3/4"-16 UNF MALE JIC VU13/FS-28/FS B 64 2.52 30 1.18 27 1.06 50 kPa
12.5 1/2" F NPTF ANSI B1.20.3 NPTF 1/2" FEMALE VU12M 12M M 56 2.2 30 1.18 27 1.06 500 kPa
12.5 1/2" F NPTF ANSI B1.20.3 NPTF 1/2" FEMALE VU12FN 12FN M 70 2.76 30 1.18 27 1.06 500 kPa
12.5 1/2" F NPTF ANSI B1.20.3 NPTF 1/2" FEMALE VU12FN 12FN 70 2.76 30 1.18 27 1.06 35 kPa
12.5 1/2" F BSPP ISO 1179-1 BSPP 1/2" FEMALE VU12F 12F M 70 2.76 30 1.18 27 1.06 500 kPa
12.5 1/2" F BSPP ISO 1179-1 BSPP 1/2" FEMALE VU12F 12F C 70 2.76 30 1.18 27 1.06 100 kPa
12.5 1/2" F BSPP ISO 1179-1 BSPP 1/2" FEMALE VU12F 12F B 70 2.76 30 1.18 27 1.06 50 kPa
12.5 1/2" 01/ BSPP ISO 1179-3 3/8" BSPP MALE VU1/CG-11/HS I 62.6 2.46 30 1.18 27 1.06 400 kPa
12.5 1/2" 01/ BSPP ISO 1179-3 3/8" BSPP MALE VU1/CG-11/HS G 62.6 2.46 30 1.18 27 1.06 300 kPa
12.5 1/2" 01/ BSPP ISO 1179-3 3/8" BSPP MALE VU1/CG-11/HS E 62.6 2.46 30 1.18 27 1.06 200 kPa
12.5 1/2" 01/ BSPP ISO 1179-3 3/8" BSPP MALE VU1/CG-11/HS C 62.6 2.46 30 1.18 27 1.06 100 kPa
12.5 1/2" 16/ BSPP ISO 8434-6 60° 1/2 BSPP MALE VU12M 12M 56 2.2 30 1.18 27 1.06 35 kPa
12.5 1/2" F BSPP ISO 1179-1 BSPP 1/2" FEMALE VU12F 12F 70 2.76 30 1.18 27 1.06 35 kPa
20 3/4" 01/ SAE ISO 11926-3 7/8"-14 UNF MALE VU41/GS-11/GS I 70.3 2.77 42 1.65 38 1.5 400 kPa
20 3/4" 0/ SAE ISO 11926-1 1-1/16"-12 UN FEMALE ORB VU34FS 34FS 88 3.46 40 1.57 36 1.42 35 kPa
20 3/4" F NPTF ANSI B1.20.3 NPTF 3/4" FEMALE VU34FN 34FN M 86 3.39 38 1.5 34 1.34 500 kPa
20 3/4" F NPTF ANSI B1.20.3 NPTF 3/4" FEMALE VU34FN 34FN 86 3.39 38 1.5 34 1.34 35 kPa
20 3/4" F BSPP ISO 1179-1 BSPP 3/4" FEMALE VU34F 34F V 86 3.39 38 1.5 34 1.34 35 kPa
20 3/4" F BSPP ISO 1179-1 BSPP 3/4" FEMALE VU34F 34F B 86 3.39 38 1.5 34 1.34 50 kPa

196
Couplings

VU
Thread details in the first line are referred to Thread 1, thread details in the second line are referred to Thread 2 - outlet.

Size Thread details Pressure

L (L1 + Thread) D1 HEX1
mm inch Thread Type Standard Thread Part Number Cracking Pressure
mm inch mm inch mm inch
20 3/4" 02/ METRIC ISO 8434-1-L M26x1.5 MALE 18L VU2/HM-2/HM H 58.4 2.3 42 1.65 38 1.5 350 kPa
20 3/4" 01/ SAE ISO 11926-3 1-1/16"-12 UN MALE VU1/HS-11/LS P 70 2.76 42 1.65 38 1.5 600 kPa
20 3/4" 01/ SAE ISO 11926-3 1-1/16"-12 UN MALE VU1/HS-11/LS G 70 2.76 42 1.65 38 1.5 300 kPa
20 3/4" F BSPP ISO 1179-1 BSPP 3/4" FEMALE VU34F 34F 86 3.39 38 1.5 34 1.34 35 kPa
25 1" F NPTF ANSI B1.20.3 NPTF 1" FEMALE VU 1FN 1FN 100 3.94 44 1.73 41 1.61 35 kPa
25 1" F BSPP ISO 1179-1 BSPP 1" FEMALE VU 1F 1F U 100 3.94 44 1.73 41 1.61 800 kPa
25 1" F BSPP ISO 1179-1 BSPP 1" FEMALE VU 1F 1F M 100 3.94 44 1.73 41 1.61 500 kPa
25 1" F BSPP ISO 1179-1 BSPP 1" FEMALE VU 1F 1F L 100 3.94 44 1.73 41 1.61 450 kPa
25 1" F BSPP ISO 1179-1 BSPP 1" FEMALE VU 1F 1F G 100 3.94 44 1.73 41 1.61 300 kPa
25 1" F BSPP ISO 1179-1 BSPP 1" FEMALE VU 1F 1F E 100 3.94 44 1.73 41 1.61 200 kPa
25 1" F BSPP ISO 1179-1 BSPP 1" FEMALE VU 1F 1F B 100 3.94 44 1.73 41 1.61 50 kPa
25 1" F BSPP ISO 1179-1 BSPP 1" FEMALE VU 1F 1F 100 3.94 44 1.73 41 1.61 35 kPa
31.5 1-1/4" F NPTF ANSI B1.20.3 NPTF 1-1/4" FEMALE VU114FN 114FN L 130 5.12 55 2.17 50 1.97 450 kPa
31.5 1-1/4" F NPTF ANSI B1.20.3 NPTF 1-1/4" FEMALE VU114FN 114FN 130 5.12 55 2.17 50 1.97 35 kPa
31.5 1-1/4" F BSPP ISO 1179-1 BSPP 1-1/4" FEMALE VU114F 114F M 130 5.12 55 2.17 50 1.97 500 kPa
31.5 1-1/4" F BSPP ISO 1179-1 BSPP 1-1/4" FEMALE VU114F 114F E 130 5.12 55 2.17 50 1.97 200 kPa
31.5 1-1/4" F BSPP ISO 1179-1 BSPP 1-1/4" FEMALE VU114F 114F C 130 5.12 55 2.17 50 1.97 100 kPa
31.5 1-1/4" F BSPP ISO 1179-1 BSPP 1-1/4" FEMALE VU114F 114F 130 5.12 55 2.17 50 1.97 35 kPa
31.5 1-1/4" F BSPP ISO 1179-1 BSPP 1-1/4" FEMALE VU114F 114F B 130 5.12 55 2.17 50 1.97 50 kPa
37.5 1-1/2" F BSPP ISO 1179-1 BSPP 1-1/2" FEMALE VU112F 112F U 145 5.71 66 2.6 60 2.36 800 kPa
37.5 1-1/2" F BSPP ISO 1179-1 BSPP 1-1/2" FEMALE VU112F 112F I 145 5.71 66 2.6 60 2.36 400 kPa
37.5 1-1/2" F BSPP ISO 1179-1 BSPP 1-1/2" FEMALE VU112F 112F 145 5.71 66 2.6 60 2.36 35 kPa
37.5 1-1/2" F BSPP ISO 1179-1 BSPP 1-1/2" FEMALE VU112F 112F M 145 5.71 66 2.6 60 2.36 500 kPa
50 2" F BSPP ISO 1179-1 BSPP 2" FEMALE VU 2F 2F I 160 6.3 90 3.54 75 2.95 400 kPa
50 2" F BSPP ISO 1179-1 BSPP 2" FEMALE VU 2F 2F C 160 6.3 90 3.54 75 2.95 100 kPa
50 2" F BSPP ISO 1179-1 BSPP 2" FEMALE VU 2F 2F 160 6.3 90 3.54 75 2.95 35 kPa

* O-ring for ORFS outlet adaptor (Faster code 11/..) is in NBR. hardness 90° Shore A.
Part number ending in V have seals in FKM and consequently a Working Temperature of -20 °C + 200 °C.

F 0/ 01/ 02/

11/ 13/ 16/ 27/

35/

197
Butterfly Flange
SAE 1 ½” to SAE 5”
The asa butterfly flange with SAE and DIN connections allows the combination with an elastic element (rubber compensator) to make a short
compensating and economical connection with the pump port. The lever position can be changed through our new mechanism. The handle
direction (clockwise or counter clockwise) can be changed by turning the switch bracket. Please note that the butterfly flange may only be opened
in mounted state and with greased or lubricated sealing. The adapter flange may only be welded with demounted butterfly flange.

possible valve positions and

actuating directions*)

*)
…the shown valve is attached with the optional
available inductive limit switch. Please contact us to
discover all functions and options.

Technical Data
description order number size A B C D E F G ØH J M Ø N NW TK weight
SAE DIN [mm] [mm] [mm] [mm] [mm] [mm] [mm] [mm] [mm] [mm] [mm] [mm] [kg]
AF 40 SDA0040 1 ½“ 40 70 35,7 102 120 162 25 43 60 23,5 M12 13,5 40 110 2,17
AF 50 SDA0050 2“ 50 77,8 42,9 111 112 155 20 43 73 35,8 M12 13,5 48 125 2,2
AF 63 SDA0063 2 ½“ 65 89 50,8 111 119 161 20 40 83 55,3 M12 13,5 63 125 2,15
AF 80 SDA0080 3“ 80 106,4 62 144 145 187 20 41 95 73,9 M16 18 80 160 2,98
AF 100 SDA0100 4“ 100 130,2 77,8 163 162 205 20 43 123 98,2 M16 18 100 180 4,01
AF 125 SDA0125 5“ 125 152,4 92 185 185 227 20 43 148 124,0 M16 18 125 210 4,8

Working Ranges
max. working pressure 7 bar (absolute)
max. differential pressure 6 bar
temperature range -20°C to +80°C
Materials
housing GGG 40, cast iron
lever steel
valve disc aluminium
seals NBR
Options
limit switch mechanical or inductive type

This data sheet shows a technical overview of our products. Please contact us if more exact information is needed. As we are constantly improving our products, their characteristics, dimensions and weights may also change, although
we do our best to incorporate these changes continually. The information in this data sheet is intended to be used as a first general guideline only. asa assumes no liability for any information therein, any errors, omissions, misprints,
nor any direct or indirect damages, losses or costs resulting therefrom. The cooling performance and the general technical values indicated in this catalogue are measured at a test bench according to asa testing procedures Because
there is no standardized testing procedure, tests used by other manufacturers could have different results. Due to different conditions in testing and application environments the cooling performance may also vary by +/- 15%.
Therefore we recommend all coolers to be checked under the system operating conditions. This is also true of vibrations and mechanical stress as well as for pressure peaks and thermal stress and any other relevant factors.

© asa hydraulik, January 2015

COMPACT SIZE
DL Mini limit
LIMIT SWITCHES switches (AZD)
(with forced contact opening mechanism)

An economic compact limit switch equipped with a forced contact opening

mechanism and excellent environmental protection (IP67).
Characteristics
1. Forced contact opening mechanism 4. Hinged cover for easy wiring
Cam operated opening mechanism Cover
mounting
forces N.C. contacts open. Contacts screw

won’t stick shut due to contact weld or

spring fatigue.
Main block
Hinged
cover
Actuator

Body

r Hand block

5. Protective construction (IP67), and

wide operating temperature range
(–30°C to +80°C –22°F to +176°F)

(Roller arm) + (Conduit connector) 2. Conforms to EN standard (EN50047) TYPICAL APPLICATIONS

3. Uses a unit system General plant facilities such as food pro-
Any combination of actuator, head block, cessing, light machinery such as pack-
and unit block is possible. The units are aging machines, and assembly lines.
UL
® also sold separately, making mainte-
nance easy.

PRODUCT TYPE
1. Basic products (assembled switch includes actuator, head block and main block) 3. Conduit connector
Part No. Product name Part No.
Actuator
PF type PG type PF type conduit connector AZD1830
Roller Lever AZD1000 AZD1050 Note: The conduit connector is for cables.
Rubber seals with an inside diameter of 9 and 11
Push Plunger AZD1001 AZD1051
are attached.
Roller Plunger AZD1002 AZD1052
Roller Arm AZD1004 AZD1054
Adjustable Roller Arm AZD1008 AZD1058
Note: Type of conduit size: PF type (G1/2), PG type (PG13.5)

2. Blocks (individual units for replacement)

Product name Part No.
Roller Lever AZD1800
Type of actuators Roller Arm AZD1804
Adjustable Roller Arm AZD1808
Head block AZD1820
PF type AZD1001
For plunger
PG type AZD1051
Main block
PF type AZD1104
For arm type
PG type AZD1154

Standards
Standards Applicable product Part No.
File No. : E122222
UL Ratings : 6A 380V AC Pilot duty A300
Product type : All models
File No. : LR55880
Order by
CSA Ratings : 6A 380V AC Pilot duty A300
standard part No.
Product type : All models
File No. : J9551205
TÜV Ratings : AC-15 2A/250V upwardsC Pilot duty
A300

443
DL (AZD1)
PRODUCT COMBINATION
[Basic products]
Roller lever Push plunger Roller plunger Roller arm Adjustable roller arm

Conduit part PF type

AZD AZD AZD AZD

1000 1001 1002 1004

AZD1008

Conduit part PG type

AZD AZD AZD AZD

1050 1051 1052 1054

AZD1058

Acutuator block
Roller lever Roller arm Adjustable roller arm
AZD1800 AZD1804 AZD1808

Head block
Head block
AZD1820

Note: The characteristics

Main block
may change when the indi-
vidual blocks are com-
bined.
AZD AZD AZD AZD
1001 1051 1104 1154

Note: The characteristics m

PF type PG type PF type PG type the individual blocks

SPECIFICATIONS
1. Contact Rating 2. Contact Characteristics
Load Resistive load Inductive load Contact arrangement 1 Form Z
Voltage (cos φ]1) (cos φ]1) Initial contact resistance, max. 25mΩ (By voltage drop of 5 to 6 V DC 1A)
125V 6A 6A Contact material Silver alloy
AC 250V 6A 6A Initial insulation resistance (At 500V DC) Min. 100MΩ
380V 6A 6A 1,000Vrms for 1 min Between non-consective terminals
24V 5A 2.5A Initial breakdown voltage 2,500Vrms for 1 min Between dead metal parts and each terminal
2,500Vrms for 1 min Between ground and each terminal
DC 60V 1.5A 1.5A
Functional 300 m/s2 (equivalent 30G)
220V 0.3A 0.3A Shock resistance
Note: When DC voltage is applied, the time constant
Destructive 1,000 m/s2 (equivalent 100G)
is (τ=) 0ms for resistive load, (τ=) 100ms or less Vibration resistance 10 to 55Hz, double amplitude of 1.5mm
for inductive load.
Expected life Mechanical 107 (at 120 cpm)
3. EN60947-5-1 performance (min. operations) Electrical 1.5u105 (at 20 cpm, 6A 380V AC resistive load)
Item Rating Ambient temperature –30 to +80°C –22°F to +176°F
Rated insulation voltage (Ui) 250VAC Note* Ambient himidity Max. 95%R.H.
Rated impulse withstand voltage (Uimp) 2.5kV Note* Max. operating speed 120 cpm
Switching overvoltage 2.5kV Note) The ratings, performance and operating characteristics are based on the basic model.

Rated enclosed thermal current (Ithe) 6A

Conditional short-circuit current 100A 4. Operating characteristics
Short-circuit protection device 10A Fuse Characteristics Movement Operating
Pretravel Overtravel
O.F. (N {gf}) R.F. (N {gf}) Diferential Position
Protective construction IP67 (P.T.), max. (O.T.), min.
max. min. (M.D.), max. (O.P.),
Pollution degree 3 Actuator mm inch mm inch
mm inch mm inch
Note) * The ratings, performance and operating char- 18±0.5
acteristics are based on the basic model. Push plunger 6.37 {650} 1.47 {150} 2 .079 1.2 .047 4 .157
.708±.020
5. Protective characteristics 28±1
Roller plunger 6.37 {650} 1.47 {150} 2 .079 1.2 .047 4 .157
1.102±.03
Protective construction Roller arm 4.90 {500} 0.49 {50} 20° to 26° 14° 30° –
DL mini limit switches
IEC Roller lever 3.92 {400} 0.78 {80} 4 .157 1.6 .063 5 .197 –
IP60 p
Adjustable roller arm 4.90 {500} 0.49 {50} 20° to 26° 14° 30° –
IP64 p
Note: The above values of adjustable roller arm shows the values when roller length is set at 26mm same as roller type.
IP67 p
The switches are compatible with DIN EN50047.

444
DL (AZD1)
WIRING DIAGRAM Terminals

Internal circuit

13 DL 14
N.O. N.O.
11 12
N.C. N.C.

DIMENSIONS mm inch

• Head block 43
1.693
32
1.260

17 15.6 dia.
.669 .614
9
.354

AZD1820 2.5
M520.8
M.1972.031
.098 m20
.787

General tolerance: ±0.4 ±.016

• Roller lever type mm inch

+0.5
10 0
+.020
.394 0
9.2
11 Pretravel 4 max. 12 dia.25 Nylon roller .362
.433 .157 .472

Resin-made
push plunger

Operating position
37±0.8
1.457±.031
9±0.2
.354±.008 14.2
.559
4.3±0.1
.169±.004 R2
.
.0 15 9.2 14.2 20
85
20±0.1 .362 .559 .787
.787±.004 60
22±0.1 2.362
53
.866±.004 51±0.2 2.087 47±0.2
2.008±.008 1.850±.008

AZD1000 12 dia.25

7
0
.78
.472
R2 Nylon roller
AZD1050
12.5
.492
30 21
1.181 .827
G1/2 30
(PG13.5) 1.181 24.6
.969

General tolerance: ±0.4 ±.016

• Push plunger type

+0.5
10 0
+.020
Pretravel 2 max. Resin-made .394 0
.079 push plunger

9±0.2
.354±.008 Operating position
18±0.5
.709±.020
4.3±0.1
.169±.004 R2
.
.0 15
85
20±0.1
.787±.004 60
22±0.1 2.362
.866±.004 53
51±0.2 2.087 47±0.2
2.008±.008 1.850±.008

AZD1001
AZD1051 12.5
.492
30 21
1.181 .827
G1/2 30
(PG13.5) 1.181
General tolerance: ±0.4 ±.016

445
DL (AZD1)
• Roller plunger type Pretravel 2 max.
.079
+0.5
10 0
+.020
.394 0
12 dia.25 Nylon roller
.472

Operating position
9±0.2 28±1
.354±.008 1.102±.039

4.3±0.1
.169±.004 R2
.
.0 15
85
20±0.1
.787±.004 60
22±0.1 2.362
.866±.004 53
51±0.2 2.087 47±0.2
2.008±.008 1.850±.008

12.5
30 .492
21
AZD1002 1.181 G1/2 .827
(PG13.5) 30
AZD1052 1.181 General tolerance: ±0.4 ±.016
45.5±1
• Roller arm type 1.791±.039
40.4±1 18 dia.27
18 dia.27 1.591±.039
.709 .709
34.8±1 Nylon roller
Nylon roller
° ~26° 1.370±.039 Max. 1.5 10.7
P T20 +0.5
10 0 .059 .421
+.020
.394 0
m20
1. R26 .787
4
02

42.8
Hex. nut 1.685
26
1.024
17
4.3±0.1 9±0.2 .669
.169±.004 .354±.008 18
.709

R2 2
. 5.2 dia. hole
.0 15 .079
.205
85
20±0.1
.787±.004 60
22±0.1 2.362
.866±.004 53
51±0.2 2.087 47±0.2
2.008±.008 1.850±.008

AZD1004
AZD1054
12.5
30 .492 General tolerance: ±0.4 ±.016
1.181 21
.827
30
G1/2 1.181
(PG13.5) 43.3±1
1.705±.039

• Adjustable roller arm type

91
8.5
3.0

45.5±1
R7

1.791±.039
40.4±1
x.

° ~ 26 ° 18 dia.27
ma

1.591±.039
T2 0 .709
6.1
4

P 34.8±1
.63
gth

Nylon roller 10.7 Max. 1.5

1.370±.039
len

10 0
+0.5 .421 .059
n.
mi

+.020
Arm

.394 0
m20
gth
len

.787
m
Ar

13.4
.528
Hex. nut

17
9±0.2 .669
.354±.008 18
.709 98.1
4.3±0.1 3.862
.169±.004 67.8
R2 2.669
.
.0 15
85
60
2.362
53
51±0.2 2.087 47±0.2
2.008±.008 1.850±.008

5.4 2
AZD1008 20±0.1 12.5 15.8 .213 .079
AZD1058 .787±.004
22±0.1 21
.492 .622
.866±.004 .827
30 30
1.181
G1/2
(PG13.5)
1.181 General tolerance: ±0.4 ±.016
43.8±1
1.724±.039

• Conduit connector (PF type) Rubber seal Adaptable cable outer diameter
inside diameter Min. Max.
25 dia. 22 11 dia. 11 dia.
.984 .866 19 .433 .433 9 dia. (.354) 7.5 dia. (.295) 9.5 dia. (.374)
.748
11 dia. (.433) 9 dia. (.354) 11 dia. (.433)

3 3 8 G.1/2 General tolerance: ±0.5 ±.020

AZD1830 .118 .118 .315
(14)
(.551)

446
DL (AZD1)
Arm Setting Position Roller Direction Roller Lever Direction
The roller arm of the arm types The roller of the arm types (AZD1004, Move a target object in the D direction
(AZD1004, AZD1008, AZD1054 and AZD1008, AZD1054 and AZD1058) as shown below. Be sure not to move
AZD1058) can be set in any position can be mounted on the front and rear the object in the opposite direction. If
at 15° intervals. (dotted line in the figure) sides of the the opposite direction is required,
Loosen the arm fastening hex. nut, switch, as shown below. (Positioned change the direction of the lever.
reposition the arm, and retighten the on the front side at delivery.)
To set the roller on the rear side, D
remove the arm fastening hex. nut,
and reinsert the arm so as to face the
Hex. nut
roller in the rear direction. Then,
retighten the hex. nut.

The roller lever can be set in two

directions at 180° intervals. (It can
also be set in the 90° direction, but the
mounting surface will project. This is
not recommended) Remove the four
Head Direction lever base fastening screws, turn the
The head of the arm types (AZD1004, lever together with the lever base in
AZD1008, AZD1054 and AZD1058) 180°, and retighten the four screws at
can be set in any of four directions at a torque of 2 to 4 kg-cm.
90° intervals, but not in any other inter-
Lever rest
mediate directions.
Loosen four screws on the upper side Mounting side

of the head, and set the head in a

desired direction, and retighten them Adjustable Arm
at a torque of 2 to 4 kg-cm. Length
To adjust the length of the adjustable
arm of AZD1008 and AZD1058, slight-
ly loosen the arm fastening hex. nut,
and adjust the length.
The adjustable arm is graduated in
two kinds of length units. Use these
indications as the reference during
adjustment.
Open and close the
cover
Screw
For the adjustable roller arm type, the
cover will not open and close since it
contacts the adjustable arm. Either
extend the arm fully or remove the
20
arm, then open or close the cover.
1

447
DL (AZD1)
CAUTIONS (Terminal with insulating grip)
mm inch
1) This model uses silver terminals. 8 min. 8 min. 8 min.
Therefore, if used at relatively low fre- .315 .315
3.7 to 4.2
.315
3.7 to 4.2
quencies for long periods of time, or if 3.7 to 4.2
.146 to .165 .146 to
dia. dia.
.146 to
used with very small loads, the oxi- .165 .165

dization that forms on the contact sur-

M4 screw
faces will not wear away and eventual- 12 min.
.472
12 min.
.472
12 min.
.472
ly cause improper contact. For such
applications, use limit switches with
gold/metal contacts (e.g. VL limit When crimp termi- (For N.C.) (For N.O.)
switches) or ones meant for small nals are used. 32
16
loads (e.g. HL limit switches). .630
1.260
2) This switch is not designed for
under-water use. Do not use the unit Projection
under-water. 9) After wiring, when attaching the
3) Do not use the switch where it may • Mounting dimensions cover to switch body, be careful that
come in direct contact with organic +0.2 the cover seal rubber is set normally
solvents, strong acids, strong alkaline 22 0–2 2-4.2 0 dia. holes or
on it and tighten the screw to a torque
M4 tapped holes
liquids or stream, or in atmospheres .8660-.079
containing flammable or corrosive of 2 to 4 kg-cm. Do not over tighten or
gases. threads will be damaged.
4) For the arm type (roller arm type, 10) A safety mechanism is used which
adjustable roller arm type), the arm 47± 0.1 provides a positive break of the N.C.
can only be set at 15° interval. 1.850±.004 contacts under such abnormal condi-
5) To improve reliability during actual +0.2
use, it is recommended that the oper- 2-4 –0.35 dia. and tions as contact welding, spring break,
max. 5mm high
ation be checked under installation Projections etc. For proper use of the safety mech-
conditions. anism follow the guidelines shown
6) When mounting, use washers (to 22± 0.1 below.
.866±.004
prevent loosening) and tighten at a (The value for the adjustable roller arm
torque of 5 to 7 kg·cm. Adaptable crimp terminal (Bare terminal)
7) To securely mount the switch, fas- type, is for an arm length equal to that
Adaptable crimp terminal
ten the main switch body with two (Bare terminal) of the roller arm type.)
mounting screws. Also provide two 8 min. 8 min. 8 min.
(4–0.2
–0.35 mm dia. and max. 5mm .197inch
.315 .315
3.7 to 4.2
.315
3.7 to 4.2 Actuator Required
3.7 to 4.2 dia. dia.
high) projections and insert them into .146 to .165 .146 to .146 to mevement force
the holes on the bottom of the main .165 .165 Push plunger type Approx. 3.5mm Approx.
switch body. 10 min. 10 min. 10 min.
Roller plunger type .138 inch 3 kg
8) When wiring, do not connect the .394 .394 .394 Roller arm type
Approx. 4.5 mm Approx.
lead wires directly to the terminals, but (Adjustable roller
.177 inch 1 kg
arm type)
use the crimp terminals and tighten Approx. 7 mm Approx.
them to a torque of 4 to 6 kg-cm. Roller lever type
.276 inch 2 kg
mm inch
Design of Operating Dog
Roller arm type (H: Hysterisis) Roller plunger type (H: Hysterisis)
arm type 15±3 15±3 40±2 Roller plunger type 12.5 0
-2.5
.591±.118 .591±.118 10 min. 1.575±.079
0
.492-.098
H H 10±1.5 10±1.5
.394 .394±.059 .394±.059
5 min. H H 10 min.
.197 .394
30°
2.5 min.
.098
30°
20 min.
.787
20 min.
.787 H
31 min.
55 1.220
2.165 35
40 +1
25 +1
1.378 28±1
0 0
1.575 +.039 .984+.039 25 min. 1.102±.039
0 0
.984

50 max.
1.969

Roller lever type (H: Hysterisis) Push plunger type (H: Hysterisis)
Roller lever type 10±2 12.5 0-2.5 Push plunger type
.394±.079 .4920-0.98
H 10 min. 12.5 0-2.5
.394 0
.492-.098
5 min.
.197

30° 21 min.
20 min. .827
.787 H
15 min. 18±0.5
40 .591 .709±.020
310+1 1.575
1.220 .039
0
30 min.
1.181

448
COMPACT SIZE DL Mini (AZD1)
LIMIT SWITCHES
Limit Switches
• Forced contact opening mechanism
When the limit switch is ON, the contact is
forced open by the N.C. contact through the
cam movement.
• Conforms to EN standard (EN50047)
• Uses a unit system
Any combination of actuator, head block, and
unit block is possible. The units are also sold
separately, making maintenance easy.
• Hinged cover for easy wiring
• Protective construction (IP67)
• Wide operating temperature range
(–30°C to +80°C –22°F to +176°F)
• Conforms to UL/CSA, CE, TÜV standards

Hinged cover Forced contact opening mechanism

PRODUCT TYPE
1. Basic products 2. Blocks
Part No. Product name Part No.
Actuator
PF type PG type Roller lever AZD1800
Roller lever AZD1000 AZD1050 Type of actuators Roller arm AZD1804
Push plunger AZD1001 AZD1051 Adjustable roller arm AZD1808
Roller plunger AZD1002 AZD1052 Head block AZD1820
Roller arm AZD1004 AZD1054 PF type AZD1001
For plunger
Adjustable roller arm AZD1008 AZD1058 PG type AZD1051
Main block
Adjustable roller arm (50 dia. rubber roller) AZD1003 AZD1053 PF type AZD1104
For arm type
Adjustable rod (2.6 dia.) AZD1007 AZD1057 PG type AZD1154
Roller lever (vertical action) AZD1009 AZD1059
Notes: 1. Type of conduit size: PF type (G1/2), PG type (PG13.5)
2. PG is a size standard used in Europe.
3. The roller arm and adjustable roller arm are available with metal rollers on a custommade basis. Please inquire.
4. Cadmium free contact types are available on a custom-made basis. Please add an “F” to the end of the part number when ordering.

3. Conduit connector
Product name Part No.
PF type conduit connector AZD1830
Note: The conduit connector is for cables.
Rubber seals with an inside diameter of 9 and 11 are attached.

FOREIGN STANDARDS
Standards Applicable product Part No.
File No. : E122222
UL Ratings : 6A 380V AC Pilot duty A300
Product type : All models
File No. : LR55880
CSA Ratings : 6A 380V AC Pilot duty A300 Order by standard part No.
Product type : All models
File No. : J9551205
TÜV Ratings : AC-15 2A/250V~ Pilot duty A300
Product type : All models

10/2010
33
DL (AZD1)
PRODUCT COMBINATION Adjustable roller arm
[Basic products] (50 dia. rubber roller)
Roller lever Push plunger Roller plunger Roller arm Adjustable roller arm Adjustable rod Conduit connector

Conduit part PF type

AZD AZD AZD AZD

1000 1001 1002 1004
1009 AZD1003 PF type
AZD1008 AZD1007
AZD1830

Conduit part PG type

AZD AZD AZD AZD

1050 1051 1052 1054
1059 AZD1053
AZD1058 AZD1057

Acutuator block
Roller lever Roller arm Adjustable roller arm
AZD1800 (Horizontal action) AZD1804 AZD1808

Head block
Head block
AZD1820

Main block

AZD AZD AZD AZD

1001 1051 1104 1154
Note: The characteristics may change when the
PF type PG type PF type PG type individual blocks are combined.

SPECIFICATIONS
1. Rating 2. Characteristics
Load Resistive load Inductive load Contact arrangement 1a1b
Voltage (cos φ]1) (cos φ]0.4) Initial contact resistance, max. 25m (By voltage drop of 5 to 6 V DC 1A)
125V 6A 6A Contact material Silver alloy
AC 250V 6A 6A Initial insulation resistance (At 500V DC) Min. 100M
380V 6A 3A 1,000Vrms for 1 min between non-consecutive terminals
24V 5A 2.5A Initial breakdown voltage 2,500Vrms for 1 min between dead metal parts and each terminal
2,500Vrms for 1 min between ground and each terminal
DC 60V 1.5A 1.5A
Functional Max. 294 m/s2 (equivalent 30G) (Note 1)
220V 0.3A 0.3A Shock resistance
Note: When DC voltage is applied, the time constant is (τ=)
Destructive Max. 980 m/s2 (equivalent 100G)
0ms for resistive load, (τ=) 100ms or less for inductive Vibration resistance 10 to 55Hz, double amplitude of 1.5mm
load. Mechanical 107 (at 120 cpm)
Expected life
3. EN60947-5-1 performance (min. operations) Electrical 1.5105 (at 20 cpm, 6A 380V AC resistive load)
Ambient temperature –30 to +80°C –22°F to +176°F (but not in a frozen environment)
Item Rating
Ambient humidity Max. 95%R.H. (without dew at 40°C 104°F)
Rated insulation voltage (Ui) 250VAC Note*
Max. operating speed 120 cpm
Rated impulse withstand voltage (Uimp) 2.5kV Note*
Note: The ratings, performance and operating characteristics are based on the basic model.
Switching overvoltage 2.5kV Note 1: This value applies when the arm length of the adjustable roller arm (50 dia. rubber roller) is 70 mm or less.
Rated enclosed thermal current (Ithe) 6A
Conditional short-circuit current 100A 4. Operating characteristics
Short-circuit protection device 10A Fuse Characteristics Movement Operating
Pretravel Overtravel
O.F. (N {gf}) R.F. (N {gf}) Diferential Position
Protective construction IP67 (Note 1) (P.T.), max. (O.T.), min.
max. min. (M.D.), max. (O.P.),
Actuator mm inch mm inch
Pollution degree 2 mm inch mm inch
Note) * The ratings, performance and operating characteris- 18±0.5
tics are based on the basic model. Push plunger 6.37 {650} 1.47 {150} 2 .079 1.2 .047 4 .157
.708±.020
Note 1: Adjustable roller arm (50 dia. rubber roller) type is
IP65. 28±1
Roller plunger 6.37 {650} 1.47 {150} 2 .079 1.2 .047 4 .157
1.102±.03
5. Protective characteristics Roller arm 4.90 {500} 0.49 {50} 20° to 26° 14° 30° –
Protective construction Roller lever 3.92 {400} 0.78 {80} 4 .157 1.6 .063 5 .197 –
DL mini limit switches
IEC Adjustable roller arm 4.90 {500} 0.49 {50} 20° to 26° 14° 30° –
IP60  Adjustable roller arm
4.17 {425} 0.42 {43} 20° to 26° 14° 30° –
IP64  (50 dia. rubber roller)
IP67  (Note 1) Adjustable rod (2.6 dia.) 4.90 {500} 0.49 {50} 20° to 26° 14° 30° –
Note 1: The value for protective function characteristics is the Roller lever 27±0.8
4.41 {450} 0.88 {90} 4 .157 1.7 .067 5 .197
initially set value. Also, adjustable roller arm (50 dia. (vertical action) 1.063±.031
rubber roller) type is IP65. Note: The above values of adjustable roller arm shows the values when roller length is set at 26mm same as roller type.
The value of adjustable roller arm (50 dia. rubber roller) type shows the value when roller length is set at 32 mm.
The switches are compatible with DIN EN50047. The value of adjustable rod (2.6 dia.) type shows the value when length of rod is set at 26 mm same as the roller arm type.

10/2010
34
DL (AZD1)
WIRING DIAGRAM Terminals
Internal circuit

13 DL 14
N.O. N.O.
11 12
N.C. N.C.

DIMENSIONS mm inch

Head block 43
1.693
32
1.260

17 15.6 dia.
.669 .614
9
.354

M520.8
AZD1820 2.5 M.1972.031
.098 20
.787

General tolerance: ±0.4 ±.016

Roller lever type

+0.5
10 0
+.020
.394 0
9.2
11 Pretravel 4 max. 12 dia.25 Nylon roller .362
.433 .157 .472

Resin-made
push plunger

12 dia.25
AZD1000
7
0

.472
.78
R2

Nylon roller
AZD1050
12.5
.492
30 21
1.181 .827
G1/2 30
(PG13.5) 1.181 24.6
.969

General tolerance: ±0.4 ±.016

Push plunger type

+0.5
10 0
Pretravel 2 max. Resin-made +.020
.394 0
.079 push plunger

9±0.2
.354±.008 Operating position
18±0.5
.709±.020
4.3±0.1
.169±.004 R2
.
.0 15
85
20±0.1
.787±.004 60
22±0.1 2.362
.866±.004 53
51±0.2 2.087 47±0.2
2.008±.008 1.850±.008

AZD1001
AZD1051 12.5
.492
30 21
1.181 .827
G1/2 30
(PG13.5) 1.181

General tolerance: ±0.4 ±.016

10/2010
35
Pressure transducer for
hydraulic applications

RE 30272
Edition: 2018-04
Type HM20 Replaces: 2014-08

▶▶ Component series 2X

H8002

Features Contents

▶▶ Measuring pressures in hydraulic systems Features1

▶▶ 8 measurement ranges up to 630 bar Ordering code 2
▶▶ Sensor with thin film measuring cell Cable sets and mating connectors 3
▶▶ Components that are in contact with the media are Technical data 4, 5
made of stainless steel Electrical connection 6
▶▶ Operational safety due to high bursting pressure, Unit dimensions 6
reversed polarity, overvoltage and short-circuit
protection
▶▶ Accuracy class 0.5
▶▶ Excellent non-repeatability < 0.05 %
▶▶ Wide operating temperature range –40 ... +85 °C
▶▶ Marine approval DNV-GL for all variants with current output

RE 30272, edition: 2018-04, Bosch Rexroth AG

2/6 HM20-2X | Pressure transducer

Ordering code

01 02 03 04 05 06
HM20 – 2X / – – K35 –

01 Pressure transducer HM20

02 Component series 20 to 29 (20 to 29: unchanged installation dimensions and pin assignments) 2X

03 10 bar 10
50 bar 50
100 bar 100
160 bar 160
250 bar 250
315 bar 315
400 bar 400
630 bar 1) 630

04 Current output 4 to 20 mA 2) C
Voltage output 0.1 to 10 V H

05 Connector, 4-pole, M12x1 K35

06 Without throttle element No code

Throttle element (corresponds to 0.3 mm nozzle) 3) N

1) Only available with throttle element

2) With marine approval DNV-GL
3) Only available for versions with 250, 315, 400 and 630 bar

Replacement seal ring

Designation Material no. Cable sets or mating connectors are not included in the
scope of delivery; please order separately
Seal ring NBR R900012467

Bosch Rexroth AG, RE 30272, edition: 2018-04

Pressure transducer | HM20-2X 3/6

Cable sets and mating connectors

Technical data Unit dimensions (in mm) Designation Material no.
general 4PM12 (L = 2 m) R900773031
Current carrying capacity 4A 4PM12 (L = 5 m) R900779498
Temperature range –25 ... +85 °C
Protection class IP 67 according to
EN 60529

Cable sets, shielded
Cable diameter 5.9 mm
Jacket color PUR-OB
Line cross-section 4 x 0.34 mm2 4PM12 (L = 2 m) R900779504
Mating connectors 4PM12 (L = 5 m) R900779503

Cable diameter 4 to 6 mm
Line cross-section 4 x 0.75 mm2
Type of connection Screw connection
Connection diagram Socket contacts, 4PE11508 R900773042

Cable set view to the
socket side

4PE11509 R900779509

RE 30272, edition: 2018-04, Bosch Rexroth AG

4/6 HM20-2X | Pressure transducer

Technical data

Input variables
Operating voltage US 18 … 36 VDC 1)
Residual ripple UPP 2.5 V (40 to 400 Hz)
Current consumption Imax ≤ 12 mA (with voltage output)
Protection class III
Isolation resistance R >100 MΩ (500 VDC)
Measurement range pN [bar] 10 50 100 160 250 315 400 630
Overload protection pmax [bar] 25 100 200 320 500 630 800 1000
Bursting pressure p [bar] 200 200 400 640 1000 1260 1600 2520
Output parameters
Output signal and admissible load RA ISig 4 … 20 mA
RA = (US – 8.5 V) / 0.0215 A with RA in Ω and US in V
USig 0.1 … 10 V, RA > 2 kΩ
Setting time (10 to 90 %) t < 1 ms
Accuracy (characteristic curve deviation) < related to the complete measurement range, including non-linearity,
0.5 hysteresis, zero point and end value deviation (corresponds to the
% measuring deviation according to IEC 61298-2)
Temperature coefficient (TC) for zero point and range
– within the nominal temperature range < 0.1 % / 10 K
– outside of the nominal temperature range < 0.2 % / 10 K
Hysteresis < 0.15 % 2)

Non-repeatability < 0.05 % 2)

Long-term drift (1 year) under reference conditions < 0.1 %

Environmental conditions
Nominal temperature range ϑ –20 ... +80 °C
Ambient temperature range ϑ –40 ... +85 °C
Storage temperature range ϑ –40 ... +100 °C
Hydraulic fluid temperature range ϑ –40 ... +90 °C
Other characteristics
Pressure port 3) G1/4 according to DIN 3852 form E,
seal ring according to DIN 3869-14
Housing material V4A (1.4404), PEI, HNBR
Throttle material 1.4305
Materials in contact with medium 1.4542, 1.4305, NBR
Throttle element See ordering code
(Highly dynamic effects in like pressure peaks or cavitation in
hydraulic systems may damage the measuring cell.
For these applications, devices with integrated throttle element
[version "-N"] in the process interface have to be used) 4)
Pressure media HL, HLP, HFC, nitrogen 5), others upon request
Tightening torque Measurement ranges < 400 bar MA 20 … 25 Nm
Measurement ranges ≥ 400 bar MA 25 … 30 Nm
Electrical connection 4-pole M12 connector at the housing 6)

Protection class according to EN 60529 IP65/IP67 with mating connector correctly mounted and locked
Weight m 0.06 kg
Life cycle 60 million load cycles or 60000 h
Vibration load:
– Transport shock according to DIN EN 60068-2-27 15 g / 11 ms / 3 axes
– Sine test according to DIN EN 60068-2-6 10 ... 2000 Hz / maximum of 10 g / 10 cycles / 3 axes
– Noise test according to DIN EN 60068-2-64 20 ... 2000 Hz / 14 gRMS / 42 g peak / 24 h / 3 axes

1) With cULus: max. of 30 VDC is admissible 5) Maximum of 300 bar is admissible

2) Related to nominal temperature range 6) Recommendation: Use of shielded connection cable; see "Cable
3) Thorough bleeding must be ensured sets and mating connectors"
4) Only for device versions with throttle

Bosch Rexroth AG, RE 30272, edition: 2018-04

Pressure transducer | HM20-2X 5/6

Technical data

Electro-magnetic compatibility (EMC)

EN 61000-6-2 / EN 61326-2-3
– EN 61000-4-2 ESD 4 kV CD / 8 kV AD with BWK B
– EN 61000-4-3 HF radiated 10 V/m (80 ... 2700 MHz) with BWK A
– EN 61000-4-4 Burst 2 kV with BWK B
– EN 61000-4-5 Surge 1 kV / 42 Ω with BWK B
– EN 61000-4-6 HF conducted 10 Veff (150 kHz … 80 MHz) with BWK A
– EN 61000-4-8 Magnetic field 50/60 Hz 100 A/m with BWK A
– EN 61000-4-9 Impulse magnetic field 1000 A/m with BWK A
EN 61000-6-3 / EN 61326-2-3
– EN 55016-2-1 Interference voltage 0.15 ... 30 MHz, class A, EN 55022
– EN 55016-2-3 Radio interference field strength 30 ... 1000 MHz, class B, EN 55022
Conformity CE according to the EMC directive
Approvals cULus-listed
Marine approval DNV-GL
(For marine applications within the scope of marine approval,
additional surge protection is required! Based on
IACS-Unified Requirements E 10)

RE 30272, edition: 2018-04, Bosch Rexroth AG

6/6 HM20-2X | Pressure transducer

Electrical connection

4-pole M12 connector, view to connection side

Voltage Current (two-wire system)

Values for US, RA and USig, Values for US, RA and ISig,
see page 3 see page 3

Unit dimensions (dimensions in mm)

Ø18,8

M12x1

3
65,9

19
51,6

2
12

1 Pressure port G1/4 male thread

2 Seal ring
3 4-pole M12 connector
1 G1/4

Bosch Rexroth AG © All rights reserved to Bosch Rexroth AG, also regarding any disposal,
Industrial Hydraulics exploitation, reproduction, editing, distribution, as well as in the event of
Zum Eisengießer 1 applications for industrial property rights.
97816 Lohr am Main, Germany The data specified above only serve to describe the product. No statements
Phone +49 (0) 93 52 / 40 30 20 concerning a certain condition or suitability for a certain application can be
[Link]@[Link] derived from our information. The information given does not release the user
[Link] from the obligation of own judgment and verification.
Please note that our products are subject to a natural process of wear and aging.

Bosch Rexroth AG, RE 30272, edition: 2018-04

Directional spool valves, direct operated,
with solenoid actuation
RE 23178
Edition: 2019-01
Replaces: 2013-06,
23183, 23208
Type WE and 23178-00

▶▶ Size 6
▶▶ Component series 6X
▶▶ Maximum operating pressure 350 bar [5076 psi]
▶▶ Maximum flow: 80 l/min [21 US gpm] – DC
60 l/min [15.8 US gpm] – AC

H7564

Features Contents

▶▶ 4/3-, 4/2- or 3/2-way version Features1

▶▶ Porting pattern according to ISO 4401-03-02-0-05 (with Ordering code 2…8
or without locating hole) and NFPA T3.5.1 R2-2002 D03 Symbols9
▶▶ High-power solenoid, optionally rotatable by 90° Function, section 10
▶▶ Electrical connection as individual or central connection Technical data 11 … 13
▶▶ Manual override, optional Characteristic curves 14
▶▶ Spool position monitoring, optional Performance limits 15 … 17
▶▶ CE conformity according to the Low-Voltage Directive Dimensions 18 … 23
2014/35/EU for electrical voltages > 50 VAC or Electrical connections, assignment 24 … 26
> 75 VDC Accessories27
▶▶ Solenoid coil as approved component with UR marking Project planning information 28
according to UL 906, edition 1982, optional Further information 28
▶▶ Approval according to CSA C22.2 No. 139-1982, optional

RE 23178, edition: 2019-01, Bosch Rexroth AG

2/28 WE | Directional spool valve

Ordering code

01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
WE 6 6X / E / *

01 3 main ports 3
4 main ports 4

02 Directional valve WE

03 Size 6 6

04 Symbols; possible version see page 9

05 Component series 60 … 69 (60 … 69: unchanged installation and connection dimensions) 6X

06 With spring return no code

Without spring return O
Without spring return with detent OF

07 High-power wet-pin solenoid with detachable coil E

Electrical voltages
08 For ordering code see page 5 … 8 e.g. G24

Manual override 1) (see page 20)

09 Without manual override no code
With manual override N 3)
With manual override "mushroom button" (small) N2 3)
With lockable manual override "mushroom button" (small) N4 2; 3)
With lockable manual override "mushroom button" (large) N5 2; 3; 4)
With manual override "mushroom button" (large), not lockable N6 3; 4)
With lockable manual override "nut" N7 2; 3)
With concealed manual override (standard) N9

Corrosion resistance (outside) (for the availability, refer to the following table)
10 None (valve housing primed) no code
Improved corrosion protection (240 h salt spray test according to EN ISO 9227) J3
High corrosion protection (720 h salt spray test according to EN ISO 9227) J5

Electrical connection
11 Individual connection or central connection
For ordering code see page 5 … 8 e.g. K4

1) Operation of the manual override only possible up to 50 bar 2) With tank pressures higher than 50 bar, it is not guaranteed that
[725 psi] tank pressure. Avoid damage to the bore of the manual the valve remains in the position into which it was switched by
override. (Special tool for the operation, separate order, the lockable manual override ("N4", "N5", "N7").
material no. R900024943). If the manual override is blocked, 3) Only direct voltage; not for version "= UR"
operation of the opposite solenoid is to be excluded. 4) Only direct voltage; not for version "SO407"
The manual override cannot be allocated a safety function.

Available corrosion resistance

Electrical connection Manual override
"K4" "DL" "K40", "C4"
"G12" "G24" "G24" "G48" "G12" "G24" "G26" Without "N"
"J3" ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ – – – ✓ ✓
"J5" – – – – ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓

Bosch Rexroth AG, RE 23178, edition: 2019-01

Directional spool valve | WE 3/28

Ordering code

01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
WE 6 6X / E / *

Spool position monitoring (For more information, see data sheet 24830)

12 Without position switch no code
– Inductive position switch type QM (valves with 2 spool positions)
Monitored spool position "a" QMAG24
Monitored spool position "b" QMBG24
Monitored rest position QM0G24
– Inductive position switch type QR (valves with 3 spool positions)
Monitored rest position QR0G24S
Monitored spool position "a" and "b" QRABG24E
– Inductive position switch type QS
Monitored spool position "a" QSAG24W
Monitored spool position "b" QSBG24W
Monitored spool position "0" QS0G24W
Monitored spool position "0" and "a" QS0AG24W
Monitored spool position "0" and "b" QS0BG24W
Monitored spool position "a" and "b" QSABG24W

Switching time increase

13 Without switching time increase no code
With switching time increase (only with direct voltage and only with version "N9" and symbol "73") A12

Throttle insert
14 Without throttle insert (standard) no code
With throttle insert (when the admissible valve performance limit is exceeded, refer to page 15 … 17):
Port Throttle Ø in mm [inch]
0.6 [0.024] 0.8 [0.031] 1.0 [0.039] 1.2 [0.047] 1.5 [0.059] 2.0 [0.079] 2.5 [0.098] 3.0 [0.120] 4.0 [0.160]
P = B06 = B08 = B10 = B12 = B15 = B20 = B25 = B30 = B40
A = H06 = H08 = H10 = H12 = H15 = H20 = H25 = H30 = H40
B = R06 = R08 = R10 = R12 = R15 = R20 = R25 = R30 = R40
A and B = N06 = N08 = N10 = N12 = N15 = N20 = N25 = N30 = N40
T = X06 = X08 = X10 = X12 = X15 = X20 = X25 = X30 = X40

Clamping length
15 42 mm [1.65 inch] (standard) no code
22 mm [0.87 inch] Z

Control spool play

16 Standard (recommended) no code
Minimum (selection for reduced leakage values; higher oil cleanliness required) T06
Increased (selection with high temperature difference hydraulic fluid/environment; leads to higher internal T12
leakage values)

Seal material (observe compatibility of seals with hydraulic fluid used, see page 12)
17 NBR seals no code
FKM seals V
Recommended for operation with HFC hydraulic fluids together with high temperatures MH
Low-temperature version (only with version "Without manual override") MT

RE 23178, edition: 2019-01, Bosch Rexroth AG

4/28 WE | Directional spool valve

Ordering code

01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
WE 6 6X / E / *

18 Standard no code
Solenoid coil as approved component with UR marking according to UL 906, edition 1982 5) = UR
Approval according to CSA C22.2 No. 139-1982 = CSA
Porting pattern according to ANSI B93.9 6) = AN

19 Without locating hole no code

With locating hole and locking pin ISO 8752-3x8-St /62

20 Standard no code
With reduced electric power consumption (only versions "G24" as well as "K4", "DL" and "DKL") SO407

21 Further details in the plain text *

5) Only for version "K4" with "G12", "G24" and "W110"

6) With power supply to
▶▶ solenoid "a", channel P is connected to a
▶▶ solenoid "b", channel P is connected to B

Bosch Rexroth AG, RE 23178, edition: 2019-01

Directional spool valve | WE 5/28

Ordering code: DC voltage – individual connection

Electrical connections and available voltages

(special voltages upon request)
Electrical voltages

Protection class according

110 V

125 V

205 V

220 V

to DIN EN 60529 1)
12 V

24 V

26 V

48 V

96 V

to VDE 0580
Ordering code

Ordering code

G110

G125

G205

G220
G12

G24

G26

G48

G96
Connector
Connector 3-pole (2 + PE) ▶▶ Standard K4 ✓ ✓ – ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ IP65 I 2)
according to ▶▶ With potted-in plug base and K4K ✓ ✓ ✓ – – – – – – IP65 I 2)
DIN EN 175301-803 sealing element
Connector 2-pole, DT04-2PA (Deutsch type) K40 ✓ ✓ ✓ – – – – – – IP69K III 3)
Connector, 4-pole, M12x1 ▶▶ Pin assignment according to K72L – ✓ – – – – – – – IP65 III 3)
according to DESINA
DIN EN 61076-2-101 with ▶▶ Standard K73L – ✓ – – – – – – – IP65 III 3)
suppressor diode, coding A
Connector 2-pole ▶▶ Connector parallel to the C4 ✓ ✓ ✓ – – – – – – IP66 III 3)
(Junior-Timer type) valve axis
Maximum admissible overvoltages according to DIN EN 60664-1:2008-01 (VDE 0110-1) (overvoltage category II):
Nominal voltage UNom in V 12 24 26 48 96 110 125 205 220
Rated current INom in A 2.5 1.25 1.17 0.66 0.33 0.25 0.17 0.16 0.14
Maximum admissible switch-off overvoltage in V 500 500 500 500 500 500 500 500 500
according to VDE 0580
Recommended interference protection circuit with in V 24 48 52 96 192 220 250 410 440
2 x mains voltage

1) Only with correctly mounted valve with a mating connector

suitable for the protection class. Notice:
2) Protection class I with properly connected protective grounding Solenoid valves induce voltage peaks during switch-off. In order
conductor (PE) and valve mounting surface connected to the to prevent electro-magnetic interference at the system and
protective grounding conductor system. damage to the valve control, an interference protection circuit
3) With protection class III, a protective extra-low voltage with has to be provided on the system side. Alternatively, you can also
isolation transformer (PELV, SELV) is to be provided. select a connector with integrated interference protection
circuit.

RE 23178, edition: 2019-01, Bosch Rexroth AG

6/28 WE | Directional spool valve

Ordering code: Direct voltage – central connection

Electrical connections and available voltages

(special voltages upon request)
Electrical voltages

Protection class according

to DIN EN 60529 1)
110 V

125 V

220 V
12 V

24 V

48 V

96 V

to VDE 0580
Ordering code

Ordering code

G110

G125

G220
G12

G24

G48

G96
Connector
▶▶ With indicator light DL ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ IP65 I 2)
Cable gland, terminal area
▶▶ With indicator light and DL1 ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ IP65 I 2)
6 … 12 mm [0.23 … 0.47 inch]
interference protection circuit
▶▶ With indicator light DAL ✓ ✓ – – – ✓ – IP65 I 2)
Cable gland, threaded
▶▶ With indicator light and DAL1 ✓ ✓ – – – ✓ – IP65 I 2)
connection 1/2"-14 NPT
interference protection circuit
Connector 7-pole (6 + PE) ▶▶ With indicator light DK6L – ✓ ✓ – ✓ ✓ ✓ IP65 I 2)
according to ▶▶ With indicator light and DK6L1 – ✓ ✓ – ✓ ✓ ✓ IP65 I 2)
DIN EN 175201-804 interference protection circuit
Connector according to ▶▶ With indicator light, 3-pole DK23L – ✓ – – – – – IP65 I 2)
ANSI/B93.55M-1981 (Brad ▶▶ With indicator light, 5-pole DK25L – ✓ – – – – – IP65 I 2)
Harrison Mini-Change)
▶▶ With indicator light DK24L – ✓ – – – – – IP65 III 3)

Connector, 4-pole, M12x1 ▶▶ With indicator light and DK24L1 – ✓ – – – – – IP65 III 3)

according to interference protection circuit

DIN EN 61076-2-101 ▶▶ With indicator light and DK35L – ✓ – – – – – IP65 III 3)

interference protection circuit

Maximum admissible overvoltages according to DIN EN 60664-1:2008-01 (VDE 0110-1) (overvoltage category II):
Nominal voltage UNom in V 12 24 48 96 110 125 220
Rated current INom in A 2.5 1.25 0.66 0.33 0.25 0.17 0.14
Maximum admissible switch-off overvoltage according to in V 500 500 500 500 500 500 500
VDE 0580
Recommended interference protection circuit with in V 24 48 96 192 220 250 440
2 x mains voltage

1) Only with correctly mounted valve with a mating connector

suitable for the protection class or suitable Conduit system. Notice:
2) Protection class I with properly connected protective grounding Solenoid valves induce voltage peaks during switch-off. In order
conductor (PE) and valve mounting surface connected to the to prevent electro-magnetic interference at the system and
protective grounding conductor system. damage to the valve control, an interference protection circuit
3) With protection class III, a protective extra-low voltage with has to be provided on the system side. Alternatively, you can also
isolation transformer (PELV, SELV) is to be provided. select a connector with integrated interference protection
circuit.

Bosch Rexroth AG, RE 23178, edition: 2019-01

Directional spool valve | WE 7/28

Ordering code: Alternating voltage – individual connection

Electrical connections and available voltages

(special voltages upon request)
Electrical voltages

Protection class according to

100 V 50/60 Hz

110 V 50/60 Hz

230 V 50/60 Hz

230 V 50/60 Hz
120 V 60 Hz

120 V 60 Hz

200 V 50 Hz

DIN EN 60529 1)

VDE 0580
Ordering code
Ordering code

W100

W110

W200

W230
G110

G180

G205
G96

G96
Connector
Connector 3-pole (2 + PE) according ▶▶ Standard K4 ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ IP65 I 2)
to DIN EN 175301-803
Rectifier required (see page 27) ✓ – ✓ – ✓ – ✓ – ✓ –
Maximum admissible overvoltages according to DIN EN 60664-1:2008-01 (VDE 0110-1) (overvoltage category II):
Nominal voltage UNom in V 100 100 110 110 120 120 200 200 230 230
Rated current INom ▶▶ 50 Hz in A 0.31 0.56 0.34 0.52 – – 0.18 0.29 0.16 023
▶▶ 60 Hz in A 0.31 0.44 0.34 0.39 0.30 0.45 – – 0.16 017
Lower rated current I1 ▶▶ 50 Hz in A – 0.65 – 0.6 – – – 0.33 – 0.27
▶▶ 60 Hz in A – 0.51 – 0.45 – 0.52 – – – 0.2
Upper rated current I2 ▶▶ 50 Hz in A – 0.9 – 0.9 – – – 0.6 – 0.36
▶▶ 60 Hz in A – 0.9 – 0.6 – 0.9 – – – 0.36
Maximum admissible switch-off overvoltage according in V 500 500 500 500 500 500 500 500 500 500
to VDE 0580
Recommended interference protection circuit with in V 200 200 220 220 240 240 400 400 460 460
2 x mains voltage

1) Only with correctly mounted valve with a mating connector

suitable for the protection class. Notes:
2) Protection class I with properly connected protective grounding ▶▶ Solenoid valves induce voltage peaks during switch-off. In
conductor (PE) and valve mounting surface connected to the order to prevent electro-magnetic interference at the system
protective grounding conductor system. and damage to the valve control, an interference protection
circuit has to be provided on the system side. Alternatively, you
can also select a connector with integrated interference
protection circuit.
▶▶ Depending on the rated current INom, circuit breakers
according to tripping characteristic "K" are to be provided.
The tripping current must lie within a time interval of 0.6 s
with 8 to 10 times the nominal power supply.
The required non-tripping current of the fuse must not fall
below the "lower rated current" value I1 (see preceding table).
The maximum tripping current must not exceed the "upper
rated current" value I2 (see preceding table).
The temperature dependence of the tripping behavior of the
circuit breakers has to be considered according to the
manufacturer's specifications.

RE 23178, edition: 2019-01, Bosch Rexroth AG

8/28 WE | Directional spool valve

Ordering code: Alternating voltage – central connection

Electrical connections and available voltages

(special voltages upon request)
Electrical voltages

Protection class according to

100 V 50/60 Hz

110 V 50/60 Hz

230 V 50/60 Hz

230 V 50/60 Hz
120 V 60 Hz

120 V 60 Hz

200 V 50 Hz

DIN EN 60529 1)

VDE 0580
Ordering code
Ordering code

W110R

W120R

W230R
W100

W110

W200

W230
Connector
▶▶ With indicator light DL ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ IP65 I 2)
▶▶ With indicator light and DL1 ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ IP65 I 2)
Cable gland, terminal
interference protection circuit
area 6 … 12 mm
▶▶ With indicator light and DJL ✓ – – – – ✓ – – IP65 I 2)
interference protection circuit 3)
▶▶ With indicator light DAL ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ – ✓ ✓ IP65 I 2)
Cable gland, threaded
connection 1/2"-14 NPT ▶▶ With indicator light and DAL1 – ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ – ✓ ✓ IP65 I 2)
interference protection circuit
Connector 7-pole (6 + PE) ▶▶ With indicator light DK6L – ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ – – – IP65 I 2)
according to ▶▶ With indicator light and DK6L1 – ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ – – – IP65 I 2)
DIN EN 175201-804 interference protection circuit
Connector according to ▶▶ With indicator light, 3-pole DK23L – ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ – – – IP65 I 2)
ANSI/B93.55M-1981 (Brad
▶▶ With indicator light, 5-pole DK25L – ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ – – – IP65 I 2)
Harrison Mini-Change)
Maximum admissible overvoltages according to DIN EN 60664-1:2008-01 (VDE 0110-1) (overvoltage category II):
Nominal voltage UNom in V 100 110 110 120 120 200 230 230
Rated current INom ▶▶ 50 Hz in A 0.56 0.34 0.52 – – 0.29 0.16 0.23
▶▶ 60 Hz in A 0.44 0.34 0.39 0.30 0.45 – 0.16 0.17
Lower rated current I1 ▶▶ 50 Hz in A 0.65 – 0.6 – – 0.33 – 0.27
▶▶ 60 Hz in A 0.51 – 0.45 – 0.52 – – 0.2
Upper rated current I2 ▶▶ 50 Hz in A 0.9 – 0.9 – – 0.6 – 0.36
▶▶ 60 Hz in A 0.9 – 0.6 – 0.9 – – 0.36
Maximum admissible switch-off overvoltage according to in V 500 500 500 500 500 500 500 500
VDE 0580
Recommended interference protection circuit with in V 200 220 220 220 240 400 460 460
2 x mains voltage

1) Only with correctly mounted valve with a mating connector

suitable for the protection class or suitable Conduit system. Notice:
2) Protection class I with properly connected protective grounding ▶▶ Solenoid valves induce voltage peaks during switch-off. In order
conductor (PE) and valve mounting surface connected to the to prevent electro-magnetic interference at the system and
protective grounding conductor system. damage to the valve control, an interference protection circuit
3) Wire bridge between pin 2- and 4-. has to be provided on the system side. Alternatively, you can also
select a connector with integrated interference protection circuit.
▶▶ Depending on the rated current INom, circuit breakers according
to tripping characteristic "K" are to be provided.
The tripping current must lie within a time interval of 0.6 s with
8 to 10 times the nominal power supply.
The required non-tripping current of the fuse must not fall below
the "lower rated current" value I1 (see preceding table). The
maximum tripping current must not exceed the "upper rated
current" value I2 (see preceding table).
The temperature dependence of the tripping behavior of the
circuit breakers has to be considered according to the
manufacturer's specifications.

Bosch Rexroth AG, RE 23178, edition: 2019-01

Directional spool valve | WE 9/28

Symbols

A B A B A B A B
a b a b a 0 b a 0 b
a b a b
P T P T P T P T
A B A B A B A B
.A 1)
a b a a b b …/O.. a 0 a 0
a .73A 1)
P T P T P T P T
A B A B A B A B
.B
a b a a b b …/OF.. 0 b 0 b b .73B
P T P T P T P T

E 1)
A
E73 1)
A73
E1- 2)
C F
C46 3)
D G
D46 3) G73
D73
H
A B A B H73
a b a b J
a b
P T P T J73

B L
B73

Y M
Y73

R
1) Example:
Symbol E with spool position "a" ordering code ..EA..
R73
Symbol E73 with spool position "a" ordering code ..E73A..
2) Symbol E1-: P – A/B pre-opening, T
Caution in conjunction with differential cylinders due to
pressure intensification.
3) Only with version "SO407" and "OF"
U

Notes: V
Representation according to DIN ISO 1219-1.
Hydraulic interim positions are shown by dashes.
W
W73
RE 23178, edition: 2019-01, Bosch Rexroth AG
10/28 WE | Directional spool valve

Function, section

The directional valves of type WE are solenoid-actuated Without spring return with "OF" detent (only possible
directional spool valves that can be used as with symbols A, C and D)
electro-magnetic component. They control start, stop This version is a directional valve with two spool positions
and direction of a flow. and two electronic solenoids with detent. The detents are
The directional valves basically consist of the housing (1), used to fix the control spool (3) in the relevant spool
one or two electronic solenoids (2), the control spool (3), position. During operation, continuous application of
and the return springs (4). current to the electronic solenoid can thus be omitted
In the de-energized condition, the control spool (3) is held which contributes to energy-efficient operation.
in the central position or in the initial position by the
return springs (4) (except for version "O"). Version ".73…A12" (smooth switching behavior)
If the wet-pin electronic solenoid (2) is supplied with By means of structural design of the control spools and
power, the control spool (3) moves out of its rest position solenoids, switching shocks occurring when activating and
into the required end position. In this way, the required deactivating the valves are significantly reduced.
direction of flow according to the selected symbol is The switching shocks, measured as acceleration values
released. a, can be reduced by up to approx. 85% when compared to
After the electronic solenoid (2) has been switched off, the standard valve depending on the design of the control
the control spool (3) is pushed back into its central spool (for this, see "Acceleration values" on page 13).
position or into its initial position (except for valves with
"OF" detent and valves without type "O" spring).
Notes:
A manual override (5) allows for the manual switching of
Pressure peaks in the tank line to two or several valves
the valve without solenoid energization.
can result in unintended movements of the control
For unobjectionable functioning, the hydraulic system
spool in the case of version with detent. We therefore
has to be bled properly.
recommend that separate return lines be provided or
Without spring return "O" (only possible with symbols a check valve installed in the tank line.
A, C and D) Due to the design principle, internal leakage is inherent
This version is a directional valve with two spool positions to the valves, which may increase over the life cycle.
and two electronic solenoids without detent. The valve
without spring return at the control spool (3) has no
defined basic position in the de-energized condition.

2 4 1 3 4
A B

„a“ „b“

A T B
Type .WE 6 E6X/.E... (P)

Throttle insert
The use of a throttle insert is required when, due to
prevailing operating conditions, flows occur during the
switching processes which exceed the performance limit
of the valve.
Bosch Rexroth AG, RE 23178, edition: 2019-01
Directional spool valve | WE 11/28

Technical data
(For applications outside the stated values, please ask us!)

general
Weight ▶▶ Valve with one solenoid kg [lbs] 1.45 [3.2]
▶▶ Valve with two solenoids kg [lbs] 1.95 [4.3]
Installation position any
Ambient ▶▶ Standard version °C [°F] –20 … +50 [–4 … +122] (NBR seals)
temperature range –15 … +50 [+5 … +122] (FKM seals)
▶▶ Version for HFC hydraulic fluid °C [°F] –20 … +50 [–4 … +122]
▶▶ Low-temperature version 1) °C [°F] –40 … +50 [–40 … +122]
Storage temperature range °C [°F] +5 … +40 [41 … +104]
MTTFD values according to EN ISO 13849 Years 300 (for further details see data sheet 08012)

hydraulic
Maximum operating ▶▶ Port A, B, P
pressure –– Standard version bar [psi] 350 [5076]
–– Version "SO407" bar [psi] 315 [4550]
▶▶ Port T bar [psi] 210 [3050] (DC); 160 [2320] (AC)
With symbols A and B, port T must be used as leakage oil
connection if the operating pressure exceeds the maximum
admissible tank pressure.
Maximum flow ▶▶ Direct voltage DC
–– Standard version l/min [US gpm] 80 [21]
–– Version "SO407" l/min [US gpm] 60 [15.8]
▶▶ Alternating voltage AC l/min [US gpm] 60 [15.8]
Flow cross-section ▶▶ Symbol Q mm2 approx. 6% of nominal cross-section
(spool position 0) ▶▶ Symbol W mm2 approx. 3% of nominal cross-section
Hydraulic fluid see table page 12
Hydraulic fluid temperature range °C [°F] –20 … +80 [–4 … +176] (NBR seals)
(at the valve working ports) –15 … +80 [+5 … +176] (FKM seals)
–20 … +50 [–4 … +122] (HFC hydraulic fluid)
–40 … +50 [–40 … +122] (low-temperature version)
Viscosity range mm2/s [SUS] 2.8 … 500 [35 … 2320]
Maximum admissible degree of contamination of the hydraulic fluid; Class 20/18/15 2)

cleanliness class according to ISO 4406 (c)

1) In case of use at low temperatures, see project planning

information on page 28.
2) The cleanliness classes specified for the components must be
adhered to in hydraulic systems. Effective filtration prevents
faults and simultaneously increases the life cycle of the
components.
Available filters can be found at [Link]/filter.

RE 23178, edition: 2019-01, Bosch Rexroth AG

12/28 WE | Directional spool valve

Technical data
(For applications outside the stated values, please ask us!)

Hydraulic fluid Classification Suitable Standards Data sheet

sealing materials
Mineral oils HL, HLP, HLPD, HVLP, HVLPD NBR, FKM DIN 51524 90220
Bio-degradable ▶▶ Insoluble in water HETG FKM
ISO 15380
HEES FKM 90221
▶▶ Soluble in water HEPG FKM ISO 15380
Flame-resistant ▶▶ Water-free HFDU (glycol base) FKM
HFDU (ester base) FKM ISO 12922 90222
HFDR FKM
▶▶ Containing water HFC (Fuchs: Hydrotherm 46M, NBR
Fuchs Renosafe 500;
Petrofer: Ultra Safe 620; ISO 12922 90223
Houghton: Safe 620;
Union: Carbide HP5046)

Important notices on hydraulic fluids: ▶▶ Flame-resistant – containing water:

▶▶ For further information and data on the use of other hydraulic –– Due to increased cavitation tendency with HFC hydraulic fluids,
fluids, please refer to the data sheets above or contact us. the life cycle of the component may be reduced by up to 30%
▶▶ There may be limitations regarding the technical valve data as compared to the use with mineral oil HLP. In order to reduce
(temperature, pressure range, life cycle, maintenance the cavitation effect, it is recommended - if possible specific to
intervals, etc.). the installation - to back up the return flow pressure in ports
▶▶ The ignition temperature of the hydraulic fluid used must be T to approx. 20% of the pressure differential at the component.
50 K higher than the maximum surface temperature. –– Dependent on the hydraulic fluid used, the maximum ambient
▶▶ Bio-degradable and flame-resistant – containing water: If this and hydraulic fluid temperature must not exceed 50 °C. In
hydraulic fluid is used, small amounts of dissolved zinc may get order to reduce the heat input into the component, a maximum
into the hydraulic system. duty cycle of 50% in continuous operation has to be set for on/
off valves (measuring period 300 s). If this is not possible due
to the function, an energy-reducing control of these
components is recommended, e.g. via a PWM plug-in amplifier.

electric
Voltage type Direct voltage Alternating voltage 50/60 Hz
Nominal voltages according to VDE 0580 V see page 5 and 6 see page 7 and 8
Voltage tolerance (nominal voltage) % ±10
Nominal power according ▶▶ Standard version W 30 –
to VDE 0580 ▶▶ Version "SO407" 8 –
▶▶ Version "= UR" 34 –
Holding power VA – 50
Switch-on power VA – 220
Duty cycle (ED) % 100 (S1 according to VDE 0580)
Switching time according ▶▶ ON ms 25 … 45 10 … 20
to ISO 6403 3) ▶▶ OFF ms 10 … 25 15 … 40
Maximum switching ▶▶ Standard version 1/s 4.2 2
frequency 4) ▶▶ Version "SO407" 1/s 2 –

3) Measured without flow. 4) In order to prevent damage to the interference protection diode,
The switching times were determined for a hydraulic fluid the admissible switching frequency has to be limited to 1 Hz for
temperature of 40 °C [104 °F] and a viscosity of 46 cSt. Switching valves with interference protection circuit ("K72L", "K73L", "DL1",
times change dependent on hydraulic fluid temperatures, "DAL1", "DK24L1", "DK35L").
operating time and application conditions.

Bosch Rexroth AG, RE 23178, edition: 2019-01

Directional spool valve | WE 13/28

Technical data
(For applications outside the stated values, please ask us!)

electric
Voltage type Direct voltage Alternating voltage 50/60 Hz
Maximum surface ▶▶ Standard version °C [°F] 120 [248] 120 [248]
temperature of the coil 5)
▶▶ Version "SO407" °C [°F] 85 [185] –
▶▶ Version "= UR" °C [°F] 120 [248] –
Insulation class VDE 0580 ▶▶ Standard
–– Direct voltage F
–– AC voltage H
▶▶ Version "= UR"
–– Version "G12", "G24" H
–– Version "G110", "W120R" F
Protection class according to DIN EN 60529 see page 5 … 8
Protection class according to VDE 0580 see page 5 … 8
Electrical protection Maximum admissible switch-off overvoltage
see page 5 … 8
Every solenoid must be protected individually, using a suitable
fuse with tripping characteristics K (inductive loads).
Protective grounding conductor and screening The valve must be installed on a surface that is included in the
equipotential bonding.
Connector pin assignment (CE-compliant installation)
see page 24 … 26
Conformity CE according to Low-Voltage Directive 2014/35/EU checked
according to EN 60204-1:2006-01 and DIN VDE 0580, classified
as component

5) Due to the temperatures occurring at the surfaces of the

solenoid coils, the standards ISO 13732-1 and ISO 4413 need to Notes:
be adhered to! ▶▶ The solenoid coils must not be painted.
The specified surface temperature in AC solenoids is valid for ▶▶ Any simultaneous actuation of 2 solenoids of one valve must
fault-free operation. In the error case (e.g. blocking of the control be ruled out
spool), the surface temperature may increase above 180 °C ▶▶ Fast switch-on
[356 °F]. Thus, the system must be checked for possible dangers For accelerated switching on the solenoid side, valves with
considering the ignition temperature of the hydraulic fluid used. individual connection and a nominal voltage of 12 V or 24 V
As fuse protection, circuit breakers can be controlled with two times the voltage for a maximum of
(see table on page 5 … 8) must be used, unless the 100 ms (pulse width modulation see data sheet 30362). In this
creation of an ignitable atmosphere can be excluded in a different connection, the maximum admissible switching frequency is
way. In this way, the surface temperature in an error case can be reduced to 3 1/s.
limited to a maximum of 220 °C [428 °F]. ▶▶ Dampened switching
You have to use cables that have been approved of for a working With valves of version "A12", damping of the switch-on and
temperature of more than 50 °C [122 °F] (individual connection) switch-off process is possible (smoothly switching). In this
and/or 90 °C [194 °F] (central connection). way, switching shocks in the system are considerably reduced.

2
smoothly switching
1

2
Standard
1

0 20 40 60 80 100
Acceleration (e.g. cylinder) in % →
1 Solenoid
2 Spring

Electrical connections and available voltages see page 5 … 8.

RE 23178, edition: 2019-01, Bosch Rexroth AG

14/28 WE | Directional spool valve

Characteristic curves
(measured with HLP46, oil = 40 ±5 °C [104 ±9 °F])

∆p-qV characteristic curves

[290] 20
8 7 Symbol Direction of flow
[260] 18 6 P – A P – B A – T B – T
Pressure differential in bar [psi] →

[240] 5 A; B 5 5 – –
16
[220] C; C46 3 3 5 3
4
[200] 14 D; D46; Y 6 6 5 5
3
[180] E 5 5 3 3
12
[160] 2 F 3 5 3 3
[140] 10 1 T 8 8 4 4

[120] H 2 1 2 2
8
[100] J; Q 3 3 2 3
6 L 5 5 1 4
[80]
M 2 1 5 5
[60] 4
P 5 3 3 3
[40]
2 R 6 6 1 –
[20]
V 3 2 3 3
[0]
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 W 3 3 2 2
U 5 5 4 1
[0] [2] [4] [6] [8] [10] [12] [14] [16] [18] [20] G 7 7 4 4
Flow in l/min [US gpm] →
4 Symbol "H" in central position P – T
7 Symbol "R" in spool position B – A
8 Symbol "G" and "T" in central position P – T

16 15 14 13 12
[290] 20
Symbol Direction of flow
11
[260] 18 P–A P–B A–T B–T P–T B–A
Pressure differential in bar [psi] →

[240] E73 11 11 11 11 – –
16
[220] J73 13 13 9 9 – –
[200] 14 H73 11 11 11 11 12 –
10
[180]
12 A73; 15 15 – – – –
[160] B73
[140] 10 9 D73; 14 14 14 14 – –
[120] Y73
8
[100] G73 16 16 16 16 12
6
[80] R73 10 15 10 – – 15
[60] 4 W73 10 10 10 10 – –
[40]
2
[20]
[0]
0 10 20 30 40 50 60

[0] [2] [4] [6] [8] [10] [12] [14] [15.9]

Flow in l/min [US gpm] →

Bosch Rexroth AG, RE 23178, edition: 2019-01

Directional spool valve | WE 15/28

Performance limits: DC voltage

(measured with HLP46, oil = 40 ±5 °C [104 ±9 °F])

Notice: with only one direction of flow

The specified performance limits are valid for operation (e.g. from P to A while port B is blocked)!
with two directions of flow (e.g. from P to A and The performance limits were determined when the
simultaneous return flow from B to T). solenoids were at operating temperature, at 10%
Due to the flow forces acting within the valves, the undervoltage and without tank preloading.
achievable performance limit may be considerably lower

Standard version ("G24")

[5000] 350
6
Operating pressure in bar [psi] →

8 9
300
[4000]
10
1 7
5
[3000]
200
2 3
3
[2000]
4
100
[1000] 4
1
2
[0]
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80

[0] [2] [4] [6] [8] [10] [12] [14] [16] [18] [21]
Flow in l/min [US gpm] →

Characteristic curve Symbol

1 A; B1)
2 V
3 A; B
4 F; P
5 J
6 G; H; T
7 A/O; A/OF; L; U
8 C; D; Y
9 M
10 E; E1–2); R3);
C/O; C/OF; D/O;
D/OF; Q; W
1) With manual override
2) P – A/B pre-opening
3) Return flow from actuator to tank

RE 23178, edition: 2019-01, Bosch Rexroth AG

16/28 WE | Directional spool valve

Performance limits: DC voltage

(measured with HLP46, oil = 40 ±5 °C [104 ±9 °F])

see notice on page 15.

Version "A12" ("G24")

[5000] 350
Operating pressure in bar [psi] →

Characteristic Symbol
curve
300
[4000] 5 1 A73, B73

3 2 G73

[3000] 3 D73, Y73

200 4 J73
2 5 R73
[2000] 6 E73, W73, D73/OF
4
100 7 H73
[1000] 7
1 6
[0]
0 10 20 30 40 50 60

[0] [2] [4] [6] [8] [10] [12] [14] [15.9]

Flow in l/min [US gpm] →

Version "SO407" ("G24")

[4569] 315
Operating pressure in bar [psi] →

Characteristic Symbol
1 7 9 4 6 3 curve
[4000]
250 1 A
10 2 C, D, Y
[3000] 11
200 3 M
2 5
4 G
11
150 5 E
[2000]
8 6 H
100 7 J
[1000] 8 V
50 9 T
10 R 4)
[0]
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 11 C46/OF; D46/OF
4) Return flow from actuator to tank
[0] [2] [4] [6] [8] [10] [12] [14] [15.9]

Flow in l/min [US gpm] →

Bosch Rexroth AG, RE 23178, edition: 2019-01

Directional spool valve | WE 17/28

Performance limits: AC voltage

(measured with HLP46, oil = 40 ±5 °C [104 ±9 °F])

see notice on page 15.

Standard version ("W230", 50 Hz)

[5000] 350 Characteristic Symbol

Operating pressure in bar [psi] →

7 curve
300
1 A; B1)
[4000] 9 8
4 5 2 V
10
3 A; B
[3000]
200 4 F; P
5 G; T
[2000] 3 6 H

100 7 C/O; C/OF; D/O; D/OF;

4 E; E1–2); J; M; R3)
[1000]
1 6 8 C; D; Y
2
9 J; L; U
[0] 10 A/O; A/OF; Q; W
0 10 20 30 40 50 60
Voltages see page 7 and 8.

[0] [2] [4] [6] [8] [10] [12] [14] [15.8] 1) With manual override
Flow in l/min [US gpm] → 2) P – A/B pre-opening
3) Return flow from actuator to tank

RE 23178, edition: 2019-01, Bosch Rexroth AG

18/28 WE | Directional spool valve

Dimensions: Direct voltage – individual connection

(dimensions in mm [inch])
15 [0.59]

11
13

12
90 [3.54] 20 [0.79]

24 10 20 18 21 10 24 22 22 14

15 [0.59]
15 [0.59]

63 [2.48]
67 [2.64]
72 [2.83]

Ø9.4 Ø5.3
[Ø0.37] [Ø0.21]
A B B

97.5 [3.84]
92 [3.62]
[0.91]

[1.65 (0.87)]

51 [2.01]
42 (22)
23

8.4 [0.33] 8.4 [0.33]

[1.99] 50.5 [0.87] 22 64 [2.52] 50.5 [1.99]
([2.07]) (52.5) (52.5) ([2.07])

23 1 26 25 19 2 23

69.2 [2.72]
13.6 [0.54]

F1
T F2
B
45 [1.77]

A
7 [0.28]

F3
F4 P G

Dimensions for manual overrides see page 20. 0,01/100

For item explanations, valve mounting screws and [0.0004/4.0]
subplates see page 23.
Rzmax 4

Required surface quality of the

valve contact surface
Notice:
The dimensions are nominal dimensions which are subject to
tolerances.

Bosch Rexroth AG, RE 23178, edition: 2019-01

Directional spool valve | WE 19/28

Dimensions: Direct voltage – central connection

(dimensions in mm [inch])

15 [0.59]

22
17 16
24
15 20 18 27 21 24
Ø9.4 Ø5.3
[Ø0.37] [Ø0.21]

122 [4.8]
71 [2.80]

90 [3.54]
71 [2.80]
[0.91]

[1.65 (0.87]
42 (22)
23

8.4 [0.33] 8.4 [0.33]

[1.99] 50.5 [0.87] 22 64 [2.52] 50.5 [1.99]

23 1 26 19 25 2 23
69.2 [2.72]
13.6 [0.54]

F1 F2
T
7
46.5 [1.83]

45 [1.77]

A B
[0.28]

F3
F4
P
G

Dimensions for manual overrides see page 20. 0,01/100

For item explanations, valve mounting screws and [0.0004/4.0]
subplates see page 23.
Rzmax 4

Required surface quality of the

valve contact surface
Notice:
The dimensions are nominal dimensions which are subject
to tolerances.

RE 23178, edition: 2019-01, Bosch Rexroth AG

20/28 WE | Directional spool valve

Dimensions: Direct voltage – manual overrides

(dimensions in mm [inch])

9 9
„N6“

8 8
„N5“

7 7
„N7“

6 „N2“, „N4“ 6

5 5
„N“

4 4
„N9“

3 3

82 [0.33] (84 [3.31]) 124 [4.88] (126 [4.96])

85.5 [3.37] 127.5 [5.02]
96 [3.78] 138 [5.43]
105.1 [4.14] 144.1 [5.67]
122.5 [4.82] 164.5 [6.48]
143 [5.63] 185 [7.28]

For item explanations, valve mounting screws and 0,01/100

subplates see page 23. [0.0004/4.0]

Rzmax 4
Notice:
The dimensions are nominal dimensions which are subject Required surface quality of the valve
to tolerances. contact surface

Bosch Rexroth AG, RE 23178, edition: 2019-01

Directional spool valve | WE 21/28

Dimensions: Alternating voltage – individual connection

(dimensions in mm [inch])

24 10 20 18 21 10 24 22 22 14

[0.59]
[0.59]

15
Ø9.4 Ø5.3

15
[Ø0.37] [Ø0.21]
A B B

98 [3.86]
92 [3.62]
[0.91]
[1.65 (0.87)]
42 (22)

23
[0.67] 17 8.4 [0.33] 8.4 [0.33] 17 [0.67]
22 [0.87] 64 [2.52]
5 81 [3.19] 123 [4.84] 5
[1.75] 44.5 205 [4.08] 44.5 [1.75]

23 1 26 3; 6 19 25 2 23

69.2 [2.72]
13.6 [0.54]

F1 F2
T
7

45 [1.77]

A B
[0.28]

F4
P G F3

For item explanations, valve mounting screws and 0,01/100

subplates see page 23. [0.0004/4.0]

Rzmax 4

Notice: Required surface quality of the

The dimensions are nominal dimensions which are subject valve contact surface
to tolerances.

RE 23178, edition: 2019-01, Bosch Rexroth AG

22/28 WE | Directional spool valve

Dimensions: Alternating voltage – central connection

(dimensions in mm [inch])

15 [0.59]
22

17 16 20 18 27 21 24
Ø9.4 Ø5.3
[Ø0.37] [Ø0.21]

24 15

122 [4.8]
71 [2.80]

90 [3.54]
71 [2.80]

[0.91]
[1.65 (0.87]
42 (22)

23
[0.67] 17 8.4 [0.33] 8.4 [0.33] 17 [0.67]
[0.87] 22 64 [2.52]
5 81 [3.19] 123 [4.84] 5
[1.75] 44.5 205 [8.07] 44.5 [1.75]

23 1 25 26 3; 6 19 2 23

69.2 [2.72]
13.6 [0.54]

F1 F2
T
7
46.5 [1.83]

45 [1.77]

A B
[0.28]

F3
P
F4 G

0,01/100
[0.0004/4.0]

Rzmax 4

Required surface quality of the

valve contact surface

For item explanations, valve mounting screws and

Notice: subplates see page 23.
The dimensions are nominal dimensions which are subject
to tolerances.

Bosch Rexroth AG, RE 23178, edition: 2019-01

Directional spool valve | WE 23/28

Dimensions

1 Solenoid "a" 16 Central plug-in connection "DK6L"

2 Solenoid "b" 17 Mating connectors for valves with central connection with
3 Without manual override connector "DK6L" (separate order, see page 27 and
data sheet 08006)
4 Concealed manual override "N9" (standard);
dimensions () version "= UR" 18 Name plate
5 Manual override "N" 19 Identical seal rings for ports A, B, P, T
Notice: The ports are clearly determined according
6 Lockable manual override "mushroom button" (small) "N4"
to their tasks and must not be arbitrarily interchanged or
7 Lockable manual override "nut" "N7" closed.
8 Lockable manual override "mushroom button" (large) "N5" 20 Plug screw for valves with one solenoid on B side
9 Manual override "mushroom button" (large), not lockable 21 Plug screw for valves with one solenoid on A side
"N6"
22 Space required to remove the mating connector/angled
10 Mating connector without circuitry for connector "K4", socket
tightening torque M3 maximum MA max = 0.5 Nm [0.37 ft-lbs]
23 Space required to remove the coil; dimensions ()
(separate order, see page 27 and data sheet 08006)
version "= UR"
11 Mating connector (AMP Junior Timer) with connector
24 Mounting nut, tightening torque MA = 4+1 Nm [2.95+ 0.74 ft-lbs]
"C4"(separate order, see page 27 and data sheet 08006)
25 Porting pattern according to ISO 4401-03-02-0-05 (with or
12 Mating connector DT 04-2PA (Deutsch plug) with connector
without locating hole) and NFPA T3.5.1 R2-2002 D03
"K40" (separate order, see page 27 and data sheet 08006)
(with locating hole for locking pin ISO 8752-3x8-St,
13 Mating connector angled with M12x1 plug-in connection material no. R900005694, separate order)
with status LED "K72L" (separate order, see page 27 and
data sheet 08006) 26 Alternative clamping length (): 22mm [0.87 inch]

14 Mating connector with circuitry for connector "K4" (separate 27 Cover

order, see page 27 and data sheet 08006) Notice:
The valve may only be operated with properly mounted
15 Cable gland "DL"
cover.

Subplates (separate order) with porting pattern according to

ISO 4401-03-02-0-05 and NFPA T3.5.1 R2-2002 D03 see
data sheet 45100.

Valve mounting screws (separate order)

Clamping Quantity Hexagon socket head cap screws Material number
length
42 mm 4 ISO 4762 - M5 x 50 - 10.9-flZn-240h-L R913043758
[1.65 inch] Friction coefficient µtotal = 0.09 … 0.14; tightening torque MA = 7 Nm [5.2 ft-lbs] ±10 %
or
4 ISO 4762 - M5 x 50 - 10.9 Not included in the
Friction coefficient µtotal = 0.12 … 0.17; tightening torque MA = 8.1 Nm [6 ft-lbs] ±10 % Rexroth delivery range
or
4 UNC 10-24 UNC x 2" ASTM-A574 R978800693
Friction coefficient µtotal = 0.19 to 0.24; tightening torque MA = 11 Nm [8.2 ft-lbs] ±15%
Friction coefficient µtotal = 0.12 to 0.17; tightening torque MA = 8 Nm [5.9 ft-lbs] ±10%
22 mm 4 ISO 4762 - M5 x 30 - 10.9-flZn-240h-L R913048086
[0.87 inch] Friction coefficient µtotal = 0.09 … 0.14; tightening torque MA = 7 Nm [5.2 ft-lbs] ±10 %
or
4 ISO 4762 - M5 x 30 - 10.9 Not included in the
Friction coefficient µtotal = 0.12 … 0.17; tightening torque MA = 8.1 Nm [6 ft-lbs] ±10 % Rexroth delivery range
or
4 UNC 10-24 UNC x 1 1/4" R978802879
Friction coefficient µtotal = 0.19 … 0.24; tightening torque MA = 11 Nm [8.2 ft-lbs] ±15 %
Friction coefficient µtotal = 0.12 … 0.17; tightening torque MA = 8 Nm [5.9 ft-lbs] ±10 %

RE 23178, edition: 2019-01, Bosch Rexroth AG

24/28 WE | Directional spool valve

Electrical connections, assignment – individual connection

Connections,
Ordering code connector Top view Circuit diagram Pin assignment
Connector 3-pole (2 + PE) according K4 1 Solenoid coil,
to DIN EN 175301-803 2 polarity-independent
1
Grounding
Connector 3-pole (2 + PE) according K4K1)
to DIN EN 175301-803 (with potted-in
2
plug base and sealing element)
Connector 2-pole, DT04-2PA K402) 1 Solenoid coil,
(Deutsch type) polarity-independent
1

2
2

Connector, 4-pole, M12x1 according K72L 1 Internal bridge

to DIN EN 61076-2-101 with
+
2
suppressor diode, pin assignment
1 4 3 Solenoid coil GND
according to DESINA 5 –
2 3 4 Solenoid coil 24 V DC
supply voltage
5 Without function
Connector, 4-pole, M12x1 according K73L 1 Without function
to DIN EN 61076-2-101 with
+
2
suppressor diode
1 4 3 Solenoid coil GND
5 –
2 3 4 Solenoid coil 24 V DC
supply voltage
5 Without function
Connector 2-pole, parallel to the valve C42) 1 Solenoid coil,
axis (Junior-Timer type) polarity-independent
1
2
2

1) Coil with potted-in connector base and sealing element to valve

housing (IP67) When establishing the electrical connection, the protective
2)
grounding conductor (PE ) must be connected correctly.
Plug-in system suitable for mobile applications

Notes:
▶▶ Electric lines must be routed in a strain-relieved manner.
▶▶ Cable glands are only suitable for permanently installed cables.
▶▶ Connectors are to be locked during operation. Not intended to
be plugged in or disconnected during normal operation under
load.
▶▶ Use of finely stranded conductors with cross-section 0.75 mm²
(AWG 20), 1 mm² (AWG 18), 1.5 mm² (AWG16) with suitable
wire end ferrules without flange with a length of 8 mm
[0.31 inch] based on DIN 46228-1.
▶▶ Crimping after stripping 9+1 mm [0.35 … 0.039 inch] by means of
tool, e.g. "PZ 6/5", company Weidmüller.
▶▶ Proper connection of the protective grounding conductor at .
▶▶ Protective grounding conductor cross-section equal to or
greater than the line cross-section of the voltage supply.
▶▶ The valve mounting surface must be connected to the
protective grounding conductor system.

Bosch Rexroth AG, RE 23178, edition: 2019-01

Directional spool valve | WE 25/28

Electrical connections, assignment – central connection

Connections,
Ordering code connector Top view Circuit diagram Pin assignment
Cable gland, terminal area DL,
6 … 12 mm [0.23 … 0.47 inch], DL1, 1+
with indicator light, DJL1) Valve solenoid
1+ 4–
interference protection "a"
2–
circuit optional

„a“ „b“ 3+
Cable gland, threaded DAL2), Valve solenoid
1)
connection 1/2"-14 NPT, DAL12) "b"
with indicator light, 4–
interference protection
circuit optional 2– 3+
Grounding

1) Wire bridge with version "DJL"

2)
When establishing the electrical connection, the protective
Cable gland according to Conduit system with NPT thread;
grounding conductor (PE ) must be connected correctly.
tightening torque MA = 5±0.5 Nm

See notes page 24.

RE 23178, edition: 2019-01, Bosch Rexroth AG

26/28 WE | Directional spool valve

Electrical connections, assignment – central connection

Connections,
Ordering code connector Top view Circuit diagram Pin assignment
Connector 7-pole (6 + PE) DK6L, 1 Valve solenoid
according to DK6L1 2 "a"
DIN EN 175201-804, with
PE 1+ 3 Valve solenoid
indicator light 2−
„a“ „b“ 4 "b"
6
3+
4− 5
5
Not used
6
Grounding
Connector 3-pole according DK23L Valve solenoid
2
to ANSI/B93.55M-1981 "a"
PE
(Brad Harrison Mini- Valve solenoid
Change), with indicator light „a“ 3
2 3 "b"

Grounding

Connector 5-pole according DK25L 1 Valve solenoid

to ANSI/B93.55M-1981
5 "a"
(Brad Harrison Mini-
3
Change), with indicator light 4
„a“ 5
2
1
„b“ 2 Valve solenoid
4 "b"

3 Grounding
Connector, 4-pole, M12x1 DK24L,
1
according to DK24L1 Valve solenoid
DIN EN 61076-2-101, with "a"
3
indicator light „a“
4 3
„b“
1 2 4
Valve solenoid
"b"
3

Connector, 4-pole, M12x1 DK35L

2
according to Valve solenoid
DIN EN 61076-2-101, with "a"
3
indicator light and „a“
4 3
„b“
interference 1
2
4
protection circuit Valve solenoid
"b"
3

When establishing the electrical connection, the protective

grounding conductor (PE ) must be connected correctly.

See notes page 24.

Bosch Rexroth AG, RE 23178, edition: 2019-01

Directional spool valve | WE 27/28

Accessories (separate order)

Mating connectors and cable sets

Item 1) Designation Version Short designation Material Data sheet
number
10, 14 Mating connector; Without circuitry, M16 x 1.5, 12 … 240 V, Z4 R901017010 08006
for valves with "K4" connector, "a"
2-pole + PE, design A Without circuitry, M16 x 1.5, 12 … 240 V, R901017011
"b"
Without circuitry, NPT 1/2", 12 … 240 V, "a" Z45 R900004823
Without circuitry, NPT 1/2", 12 … 240 V, "b" R900011039
With indicator light, M16 x 1.5, 12 … 240 V Z5L R901017022
With indicator light, NPT 1/2", 12 … 240 V Z55L R900057453
With rectifier, M16 x 1.5, 80 … 240 V RZ5 R901017025
With rectifier, NPT 1/2", 80 … 240 V RZ55 R900842566
With indicator light and Z-diode-suppressor, Z5L1 R901017026
M16 x 1.5, 24 V
With indicator light and rectifier, M16 x 1.5, RZ5L R901017029
80 … 240 V
With indicator light and rectifier, NPT 1/2", RZ55L R900057455
80 … 240 V
11 Mating connectors; 10 … 32 V, 5 A 2P JUNIOR D2 2 R901022127
for directional valves with "C4" 10 … 32 V, 5 A 2P D1.2 JUNIOR R900313533
connector (AMP Junior-Timer)
12 Mating connectors; 10 … 32 V, 5 A 2P DT06 K40AWG14 R900733451
for directional valves with "K40" 10 … 32 V, 5 A 2P DT06 K40AWG16 R901017847
connector (Deutsch plug)
13 Mating connectors; M12 x 1, angled, PG 7 4PZ24 R900779509
for sensors and valves with "K24", M12 x 1, angled, PG 7 R900082899
"K35" and "K72" connectors, 4-pole
17 Mating connectors; 250 V, 10 A, PG 11 7PZ6 R900002803
for valves with central connection
with "DK6L" connector

1) See dimensions page 6 … 23.

Energy savings and fast switching 1)

Details see data sheet 30362

Material number
Type VT-SSBA1-PWM-1X/V001/5 as fast Type VT-SSBA1-PWM-1X/V002/5
switching amplifier for energy reduction
(switching time reduction by approx. 50%) 2) (energy savings of approx. 40%) 3)
a/b black R901265633 R901290194

1) Only with symbols C, D, E, J, G, L and M Cartridge with PWM connector according to

2) Only for version "G12" and "K4" data sheet 30362:
3) Only for version "G24" and "K4" ▶▶ Depending on the control spool, increasing the
performance limit is possible.
▶▶ With version "G24" (energy saving), the coil
temperature is reduced by ≥ 30 °C for 100% duty cycle.

RE 23178, edition: 2019-01, Bosch Rexroth AG

28/28 WE | Directional spool valve

Project planning information

Temperature range and maximum operating pressure in case of use at low temperatures
Port Pressure Temperature range in °C [°F]
– P, A, B, T static 100 bar [1450 psi] –40 … –35 [–40 … –31]
– P, A, B dynamic from 100 bar [1450 psi] to 350 bar [5076 psi] in linear form as –35 … –30 [–31 … –22]
a function of the temperature
–T dynamic from 100 bar [1450 psi] to 210 bar [3050 psi] in linear form as –35 … –30 [–31 … –22]
a function of the temperature
– P, A, B, T Maximum operating pressure –30 … +50 [–22 … 122]

Further information

▶▶ Subplates Data sheet 45100
▶▶ Inductive position switch and proximity sensors (contactless) Data sheet 24830
▶▶ Hydraulic fluids on mineral oil basis Data sheet 90220
▶▶ Environmentally compatible hydraulic fluids Data sheet 90221
▶▶ Flame-resistant, water-free hydraulic fluids Data sheet 90222
▶▶ Flame-resistant hydraulic fluids - containing water (HFAE, HFAS, HFB, HFC) Data sheet 90223
▶▶ Reliability characteristics according to EN ISO 13849 Data sheet 08012
▶▶ Connector switching amplifier with pulse width modulation (PWM) Data sheet 30362
▶▶ Hydraulic valves for industrial applications Data sheet 07600-B
▶▶ CE declaration of conformity according to Low-Voltage Directive 2014/35/EU upon request
▶▶ Selection of filters [Link]/filter
▶▶ Information on available spare parts [Link]/spc

Industrial Hydraulics exploitation, reproduction, editing, distribution, as well as in the event
Zum Eisengießer 1 of applications for industrial property rights.
97816 Lohr am Main, Germany The data specified above only serve to describe the product. No statements
Phone +49 (0) 93 52 / 40 30 20 concerning a certain condition or suitability for a certain application can be
[Link]@[Link] derived from our information. The information given does not release the user
[Link] from the obligation of own judgment and verification.
It must be remembered that our products are subject to a natural process of
wear and aging.

Bosch Rexroth AG, RE 23178, edition: 2019-01

Pressure reducing valve,
direct operated

RE 26570
Edition: 2018-03
Type ZDR Replaces: 2018-02

▶▶ Size 6
▶▶ Component series 4X
▶▶ Maximum operating pressure 350 bar
▶▶ Maximum flow 50 l/min

H7750

Features Contents

▶▶ Sandwich plate valve Features 1

▶▶ Porting pattern according to ISO 4401-03-02-0-05 (with Ordering code 2
or without locating hole) Symbols 3
▶▶ 4 pressure ratings Function, section 4
▶▶ 4 adjustment types, optionally: Technical data 5
–– Rotary knob Characteristic curves 6
–– Bushing with hexagon and protective cap Dimensions 7, 8
–– Lockable rotary knob with scale Accessories 9
–– Rotary knob with scale Further information 9
▶▶ Pressure reduction in channel A, B or channel P
▶▶ Check valve, optional (version "A" only)
▶▶ Corrosion-protected design

RE 26570, edition: 2018-03, Bosch Rexroth AG

2/10 ZDR | Pressure reducing valve

Ordering code

01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14
Z DR 6 D – 4X / Y *

01 Sandwich plate valve Z

02 Pressure reducing valve DR

03 Size 6 6

04 Direct operated D

05 Pressure reduction in channel A② A

Pressure reduction in channel B② B
Pressure reduction in channel P① P

Adjustment type
06 Rotary knob 1
Sleeve with hexagon and protective cap ("J3" version without protective cap) 2
Lockable rotary knob with scale 3 1)
Rotary knob with scale 7

07 Component series 40 … 49 (40 … 49: unchanged installation and mounting dimensions) 4X

08 Secondary pressure up to 25 bar 25

Secondary pressure up to 75 bar 75
Secondary pressure up to 150 bar 150
Secondary pressure up to 210 bar 210
Secondary pressure up to 315 bar (only version "B", "P", and "2") 315

09 Pilot oil supply internal, pilot oil return external Y

10 With check valve (only version "A") no code

Without check valve M

Corrosion resistance
11 None no code
Improved corrosion protection (240 h salt spray test according to EN ISO 9227); (only version "2") J3

Seal material
12 NBR seals no code
FKM seals V
Observe compatibility of seals with hydraulic fluid used.

13 Without locating hole no code

With locating hole /60 2)
With locating hole and locking pin ISO 8752-3x8-St /62

14 Further details in the plain text

1) H-key with material no. R900008158 is included in the scope of

delivery. Notes:
2) Locking pin ISO 8752-3x8-St, material no. R900005694 (separate ▶▶ For valve types for use in potentially explosive areas, refer to
order) data sheet 07011.
▶▶ Preferred types and standard units are contained in the EPS
(standard price list).

Bosch Rexroth AG, RE 26570, edition: 2018-03

Pressure reducing valve | ZDR 3/10

Symbols (① = component side, ② = plate side)

Version "P…YM" Version "A…YM"

ય ય
M

P A ર B T P A ર B T

Version "B…YM" Version "A…Y"

ય ય
M

P A ર B T P A ર B T

RE 26570, edition: 2018-03, Bosch Rexroth AG

4/10 ZDR | Pressure reducing valve

Function, section

The valve type ZDR is a direct operated pressure reducing In this way, channel A② is connected to the tank via the
valve in sandwich plate design with pressure limitation of control edge (9) at the control spool (2) and the housing
the secondary circuit. It is used to reduce the system (1). So much hydraulic fluid is discharged into the tank
pressure. that the pressure does not increase any further.
The pressure reducing valve basically comprises housing The leakage oil drain from the spring chamber (7) is always
(1), control spool (2), compression spring (3), adjustment effected externally via the bore (6) and channel T (Y).
type (4) and an optional check valve. A pressure gauge connection (8) allows for the control of
The secondary pressure is set via the adjustment type (4). the secondary pressure at the valve.
A check valve can be used for free flow back from channel
Version "A" A② to A① with version "A".
The valve is open in initial position. Hydraulic fluid can
flow from channel A① to channel A② without restrictions. Versions "P" and "B"
The pressure in channel A② is simultaneously applied via With version "P", the pressure reduction is effected in
the control line (5) at the piston area opposite the channel P①. Control signal and pilot oil are supplied
compression spring (3). If the pressure in channel A② internally from channel P①.
exceeds the value set at the compression spring (3), the With version "B", the pressure is reduced in channel P①;
control spool (2) is pushed against the compression spring but the pilot oil is extracted from channel B.
(3) to control position and keeps the set pressure in
channel A② at a constant level.
Notice:
Control signal and pilot oil are supplied internally via the
If the directional valve is in spool position P to A, the
control line (5) from channel A②.
pressure in channel B may not exceed the set
If the pressure in channel A② increases further due to an
secondary pressure. Otherwise, there is pressure
external force effect at the actuator, it pushes the control
reduction in channel A.
spool (2) even further against the compression spring (3).

4 3 7 6 9 2 8
T
1
P A (Y) B

P A T B 2
Type ZDR 6 DA1-4X/.YM…
(Y)
1 5
① = component side
② = plate side

Bosch Rexroth AG, RE 26570, edition: 2018-03

Pressure reducing valve | ZDR 5/10

Technical data
(For applications outside these parameters, please consult us!)

general
Weight kg ca. 1.2
Installation position any
Ambient temperature range °C –30 … +80 (NBR seals)
–20 … +80 (FKM seals)
MTTFd values according to EN ISO 13849 Years 150 ... 1200 (for more information see data sheet 08012)

hydraulic
Maximum operating pressure ▶▶ Input
–– Versions „B“, „P“ bar 350
–– Versions „A“ bar 315
Maximum secondary pressure ▶▶ Output bar 25; 75; 150; 210; 315 1)
Maximum counter pressure ▶▶ Port T(Y) bar 160
Maximum flow l/min 50
Hydraulic fluid see table below
Hydraulic fluid temperature range °C –30 … +80 (NBR seals)
–20 … +80 (FKM seals)
Viscosity range mm2/s 10 … 800
Maximum admissible degree of contamination of the hydraulic fluid, Class 20/18/15 2)

cleanliness class according to ISO 4406 (c)

Hydraulic fluid Classification Suitable Standards Data sheet

sealing materials
Mineral oils HL, HLP, HLPD NBR, FKM DIN 51524 90220
Bio-degradable 3) ▶▶ Insoluble in water HETG FKM
ISO 15380
HEES FKM 90221
▶▶ Soluble in water HEPG FKM ISO 15380
Flame-resistant ▶▶ Water-free HFDU (glycol base) FKM
HFDU (ester base) 3) FKM ISO 12922 90222
HFDR 3) FKM
▶▶ Containing water 3) HFC (Fuchs Hydrotherm 46M, NBR
ISO 12922 90223
Petrofer Ultra Safe 620)

Important information on hydraulic fluids: ▶▶ Flame-resistant – containing water:

▶▶ For further information and data on the use of other hydraulic –– Maximum pressure differential 210 bar, otherwise, increased
fluids, please refer to the data sheets above or contact us. cavitation erosion
▶▶ There may be limitations regarding the technical valve data –– Life cycle as compared to operation with mineral oil HL, HLP
(temperature, pressure range, life cycle, maintenance intervals, 30 … 100%
etc.). –– Maximum hydraulic fluid temperature 60 °C
▶▶ The ignition temperature of the hydraulic fluid used must be 50 K
higher than the maximum surface temperature.

1) Only with version „B“ and „P“

2) The cleanliness classes specified for the components must be
adhered to in hydraulic systems. Effective filtration prevents
faults and simultaneously increases the life cycle of the
components.
For the selection of filters, see [Link]/filter.
3) In connection with the corrosion-protected version "J3", small
amounts of dissolved zinc may get into the hydraulic system.

RE 26570, edition: 2018-03, Bosch Rexroth AG

6/10 ZDR | Pressure reducing valve

Characteristic curves
(measured with HLP46, ϑoil = 40 ±5 °C)

pA-qV characteristic curves – Version "A" pA-qV characteristic curves – Version "B" and "P"
250 350
→

→
Secondary pressure in bar

200 300

→
Pressure rating in bar
210 315

→
Secondary pressure in bar
150 250

Pressure rating in bar

150
100 200
75
210
50 150
25
150
0 100
50 30 10 0 10 30 50
75
A② to T(Y) A① to A② 50
Flow in l/min → 25
0
50 30 10 0 10 30 50
P② to T(Y) P② to P①
Flow in l/min →

∆pmin-qV characteristic curves ∆pmin-qV characteristic curves

30 30
Minimum pressure differential
Minimum pressure differential

2 4
20 20
in bar →
in bar →

1
3
10 10

0 0
0 10 20 30 40 50 0 10 20 30 40 50
Flow in l/min → Flow in l/min →

∆p-qV characteristic curves

30 1 A① to A②
→

5 2 A② to T(Y) (3rd path)

Pressure differential in bar

3 P② to P①
4 P① to T(Y) (3rd path)
20
5 A② to A①; flow only via check valve
6 6 A② to A①; flow via check valve and fully opened control
cross-section

Notes:
▶▶ The curve development is maintained if the pressure is set
0
0 10 20 30 40 50 lower according to the pressure rating.
▶▶ The characteristic curves apply to the pressure at the valve
Flow in l/min → output pT = 0 bar across the entire flow range.

Bosch Rexroth AG, RE 26570, edition: 2018-03

Pressure reducing valve | ZDR 7/10

Dimensions: Version "B" and "P"

(dimensions in mm)

5 4
233
6 18 24 209 12.5
1

5 4

3
Ø40

Ø19

40
3

20
1
2
1

189 2
9

2; 3 10 1 11
Ø35

8 84.5
23.5
7

3
F1
T(Y) F2
B
Ø39

46
A
2 P F3
F4 G

4 x Ø12.2; 1.4 4 x Ø5.4

0,01/100 7
Rz1max 8

Required surface quality

of the valve contact surface

① component side – Porting pattern according to Valve mounting screws (separate order)
ISO 4401-03-02-0-05 (with or without locating hole); 4 hexagon socket head cap screws ISO 4762 - M5 - 10.9
(with locating hole Ø3 x 5 mm deep)
② plate side – Porting pattern according to Notes:
ISO 4401-03-02-0-05 (with or without locating hole); ▶▶ Length and tightening torque of the valve mounting screws
(with locating hole for locking pin ISO 8752-3x8-St; must be calculated according to the components mounted
version "/60") under and over the sandwich plate valve.
▶▶ The dimensions are nominal dimensions which are subject to
1 Name plate tolerances.
2 Adjustment type "1"
3 Adjustment type "2"
4 Adjustment type "3"
5 Adjustment type "7"
6 Space required to remove the key
7 Valve mounting bores
8 Lock nut SW24
9 Hexagon, wrench size 10
10 Identical seal rings for ports A, B, P, T(Y)
11 Pressure gauge connection G1/4; 12 deep;
internal hexagon SW6

RE 26570, edition: 2018-03, Bosch Rexroth AG

8/10 ZDR | Pressure reducing valve

Dimensions: Version "A"

(dimensions in mm)

5 4
233
6 18 24 209 12.5
1
5 4

3
Ø40

Ø19

40
3

20
1
2
1

189 2
9

2; 3 10 1 11
Ø35

8 84.5
31.5
7

3
F1
T(Y) F2
B
Ø39

46
A
2 P F3
F4 G

4 x Ø12.2; 1.4 4 x Ø5.4

0,01/100 7
Rz1max 8

Required surface quality

of the valve contact surface

Bosch Rexroth AG, RE 26570, edition: 2018-03

Pressure reducing valve | ZDR 9/10

Accessories (separate order)

Denomination Material no.

Protective cap R900135501

Further information

▶▶ Hydraulic valves for industrial applications Operating instructions 07600-B

▶▶ Subplates Data sheet 45100
▶▶ Hydraulic fluids on mineral oil basis Data sheet 90220
▶▶ Environmentally compatible hydraulic fluids Data sheet 90221
▶▶ Flame-resistant, water-free hydraulic fluids Data sheet 90222
▶▶ Flame-resistant hydraulic fluids - containing water (HFAE, HFAS, HFB, HFC) Data sheet 90223
▶▶ Reliability characteristics according to EN ISO 13849 Data sheet 08012
▶▶ Use of non-electrical hydraulic components in an explosive environment (ATEX) Data sheet 07011
▶▶ Selection of filters [Link]/filter
▶▶ Information on available spare parts [Link]/spc

RE 26570, edition: 2018-03, Bosch Rexroth AG

Mantenimiento
Puesta
y reparaciones
en servicio | Hägglunds DUe Unidad de potencia 71/94

Filtro doble HD
1. Haga presión en la palanca conmutadora y gire la palanca en la otra dirección
para cambiar la dirección del flujo en la carcasa del filtro, ver Fig. 63: Cambio del
filtro doble.
2. Abra el tornillo de ventilación (sin soltarlo del todo) en el lado desconectado del
filtro para reducir la presión.
3. Suelte el tapón de drenaje bajo el recipiente del filtro para vaciarlo de fluido
hidráulico. Una vez vacío, apriete el tapón de drenaje.
4. Abra el anillo de cierre del recipiente del filtro. Desenrosque el recipiente de la
carcasa del filtro en sentido contrario a las agujas del reloj, y retire el recipiente.
5. Cambie el cartucho del filtro.
Durante el montaje, es muy importante no exponer el cartucho a ningún tipo
de suciedad, esto es, manteniéndolo en la cubierta de plástico todo el tiempo
necesario.
6. Compruebe la junta tórica y el anillo de refuerzo por si estuvieran dañados.
Cambie las piezas si fuera necesario.
7. Instale el recipiente del filtro. Apriételo a mano para detener y retroceder un
octavo de giro.
8. Apriete la tuerca de cierre

Tornillo de ventilación

Palanca
conmutadora

En esta posición
puede cambiar
este elemento

DD00072849 DD00107572

Fig. 63: Cambio del filtro doble

Tabla 16: Peso del recipiente del filtro HD

Tamaño del filtro Peso del recipiente Peso del cartucho

(seco) (seco)
Kg lb Kg lb
Filtro sencillo/doble 250 (25 bar) 1,5 3,31 0,7 1,54
Filtro sencillo/doble 400 (25 bar) 2,0 4,41 1,1 2,43
Filtro sencillo/doble 600 (25 bar) 9,0 19,84 1,4 3,09
Filtro sencillo/doble 250 (210 bar) 9,0 19,84 0,7 1,54
Filtro sencillo/doble 400 (210 bar) 14,0 30,86 1,1 2,43
Filtro sencillo/doble 600 (210 bar) 17,5 38,58 1,4 3,09

RS 15325-WA, versión 02.2020, Bosch Rexroth AB

72/94 Hägglunds DUe Unidad de potencia |Mantenimiento
Puesta en servicio
y reparaciones

Filtro doble HDF (opcional)

1. Si a temperatura de funcionamiento, la clavija del indicador rojo llega hasta

el indicador de mantenimiento mecánico (1) y/o se activa el indicador de
mantenimiento electrónico (2), el elemento del filtro se contamina y debe ser
cambiado.
2. El número de material del filtro de recambio correspondiente se indica en
la placa de características (3) del filtro completo. Debe corresponder con el
número de material del elemento del filtro.
3. Asegúrese de que la palanca conmutadora (8) apunta hacia el lado del filtro que
no funciona (ver Fig. 65). Observe el símbolo de conmutación.
4. Para la ecualización de presión y el desbloqueo, tire de la palanca conmutadora
y pase a la posición del extremo opuesto.
5. Abra el tornillo de purga (7) (sin soltarlo del todo) en el lado desconectado del
filtro, para reducir la presión.
6. Quite el tornillo de drenaje (4) para poder drenar el aceite de la zona donde
está la suciedad.
7. Desatornille el filtro del recipiente (5) ‒ ver Fig. 65.
8. Quite el elemento del filtro (6) de la espita haciéndolo girar ligeramente.
9. Limpie los componentes del filtro si es necesario.
Si es necesario, compruebe que la junta (9) del recipiente del filtro no está dañada.
Para ver kits adecuados de sellado, consulte 9.10: Piezas de recambio.
10. Instale el nuevo elemento de filtro en la espita haciéndolo girar ligeramente.
11. Instale el filtro en orden inverso.
12. ¡Tenga en cuenta las especificaciones sobre torque (ver Tabla 17)!
13. Para rellenar el lado del filtro que se ha mantenido, tire de la palanca
conmutadora (7).

ATENCIÓN
Abra el tornillo de purga
Daños al equipo.
▶▶ Cierre el tornillo de purga después de drenar el recipiente del filtro.

14. Asegúrese de que la palanca conmutadora está activada.

1 2

3
8
6

Fig. 64: Filtro doble HDF

Bosch Rexroth AB, versión 02.2020, RS 15325-WA

Mantenimiento
Puesta
y reparaciones
en servicio | Hägglunds DUe Unidad de potencia 73/94

   

DD00072849

Fig. 65: Cambio del filtro doble

Tabla 17: Torque de apriete

Torque de apriete del

50 Nm-60 Nm (37-44 lb·ft)
recipiente del filtro

Tabla 18: Peso HDF del recipiente del filtro

Peso del recipiente
Filtro doble HDF Peso del cartucho (seco)
(seco)
Kg lb Kg lb
Filtro doble HDF 250 (50 bar) 1,6 3,52 0,7 1,54
Filtro doble HDF 400 (50 bar) 2,5 5,51 1,1 2,43
Filtro doble HDF 600 (110 bar) 13,6 29,98 1,4 3,09

RS 15325-WA, versión 02.2020, Bosch Rexroth AB

38/62 Drive unit | Hägglunds DUe

4.2.7 Oil filter Separation characteristics

DD00070464

Single Duplex
DD00082286

Fig. 34: Oil filter Fig. 35: Separation characteristics

Function
The filters are used in drain and return lines. The filter The filter elements are β-stable (Fig. 35), has a multi layered
housing is equipped with bypass valve and an electrical and structure and are compatible with HFA , HFB and HFC
visual contamination indicator. The oil flow through the fluids. The opening pressure for the by-pass valve ∆P = 3.5
filter is according to the picture above. Single (standard) or bar (50.8 psi) + 10%.
duplex (option) filters can be selected. There is a
contamination indicator that gives indication if the The β-ratio for the particle size 10 (μm) fullfills ISO 4572
differential pressure is above 2.2 bar (31.9 psi) - 10% and (β10 ≥ 75).
the temperature of the oil is above 30 °C (86 °F).
A single filter has one filter element and a duplex filter has
two filter elements but only one filter is used at any one Standards
time. On duplex filters the filter elements can easily be Filter and filter elements according to DIN 24550
replaced without interrupting operation.

Mechnical data
Table 42: Technical data, filters

Part Single/Duplex
Filter complete: Filter head Low pressure Aluminum alloy
Medium pressure Ductile cast iron
Filter bowl Low pressure Aluminum
Medium pressure Steel
Seals Nitrile rubber
Max pressure Low pressure 25 bar (360 psi)
Medium pressure 210 bar (3 050 psi)
Bypass pressure Δp Low pressure 3.5 bar (50 psi) + 10%
Medium pressure 7 bar (100 psi) + 10%
Max flow Size 250 250 l/min (66 gpm)
Size 400 400 l/min (106 gpm)
Size 600 600l/min (160 gpm)
Filter element: Filtration grade 10 µm (standard)
6 µm (optional)
Filter Synthetic glass fibre material
End shields Sn plated
Inside tube Sn plated
Antistatic layer Optional

Bosch Rexroth AB, RE 15325/04.2020

Maintenance indicator RE 51450/03.11 1/8

for filters

Type WE and WO

Pressure differential indicators WO for filters in pressure lines

Backpressure indicators WO for return line filters
Electronic switching elements WE

Nominal pressure 10, 160 and 450 bar [145, 2321 and 6527 psi]
Operating temperature WO –30 °C to +100 °C [–22 °F to 212 °F]
Operating temperature WE –30 °C to +85 °C [–22 °F to 185 °F]
H7857_d

Table of contents Features

Contents Page Maintenance indicators serve the monitoring of filters by
Features 1 indicating the exceedance of a pressure differential and/or a
backpressure in the filter.
Ordering code 2, 3
Mating connectors according to IEC 60947-5-2 3
They distinguish themselves by the following:
Symbols 4
– Modular structure
Function, section 5
– Mechanical-optical indicators WO with one switching point
Technical data 6
and memory function
Maintenance indicator 7
– Electronic switching elements WE with one or two switch-
Installation, commissioning, maintenance instructions 8 ing points
Quality and standardization 8 – Possibility to suppress the signal during cold start
2/8 Bosch Rexroth AG Hydraulics WE; WO RE 51450/03.11

Ordering code

of the mechanical optical maintenance indicator

WO
Maintenance indicator
Mechanical optical = WO Complementary details
Design without = No complementary details
Backpressure, connection M30x1.5 = S01 -PA = Backpressure indicator mode of
Pressure differential, connection M20x1.5 = D01 plastic (only with S01-2.2)
Switching pressure Max. operating pressure
S01
S01 S01 D01 D01 10 = 10 bar [145 psi]
bar (PA) (160 bar) (450 bar)
D01
0,8 X X = 0.8 160 = 160 bar [2321 psi]
1.5 X X = 1.5 450 = 450 bar [6527 psi]
2.2 X X X X = 2.2 Seal
5.0 X = 5.0 M= NBR seal
V= FKM seal
8.0 X = 8.0

Material numbers of the mechanical optical maintenance indicators - Pressure differential

Switching pres- Tolerance Maximum operating pressure

Material no. Type Material
sure in bar [psi] in bar [psi] in bar [psi]
R901025313 WO-D01-5,0-M-450 5,0 ±0,5
R901066235 WO-D01-5,0-V-450 [72.5] [7.3]
R928038785 WO-D01-8,0-M-450 8,0 ±0,8 up to 450
Brass
R928038784 WO-D01-8,0-V-450 [116] [11.6] [6527]
R928038783 WO-D01-2,2-M-450 2.2 ±0.3
R928038782 WO-D01-2,2-V-450 [31.9] [4.4]
R901025312 WO-D01-2,2-M-160 2.2 ±0.3
R901066233 WO-D01-2,2-V-160 [31.9] [4.4]
R928038781 WO-D01-1,5-M-160 1.5 ±0.2 up to 160
Aluminum
R928038780 WO-D01-1,5-V-160 [21.8] [2.9] [2321]
R928038779 WO-D01-0,8-M-160 0.8 ±0.15
R928038778 WO-D01-0,8-V-160 [11.6] [2.2]

Material numbers of the mechanical optical maintenance indicators - Backpressure

Switching pres- Tolerance Maximum operating pressure

Material no. Type Material
sure in bar [psi] in bar [psi] in bar [psi]
R901025310 WO-S01-2,2-M-10 2.2 ±0.3
R901066232 WO-S01-2,2-V-10 [31.9] [4.4]
R928038776 WO-S01-1,5-M-10 1.5 ±0.2 up to 10
Aluminum
R928038774 WO-S01-1,5-V-10 [21.8] [2.9] [145]
R928038773 WO-S01-0,8-M-10 0.8 ±0.15
R928038772 WO-S01-0,8-V-10 [11.6] [2.2]
R928038771 WO-S01-2,2-M-10-PA 2.2 ±0.44 [6.4] up to 10
PA6.6
R928038769 WO-S01-2,2-V-10-PA [31.9] ±0.3 [4.4] [145]
RE 51450/03.11 WE; WO Hydraulics Bosch Rexroth AG 3/8

Ordering code

of the electronic switching element

WE
Maintenance indicator
Electronic switching element = WE Connector
Type of signal M12x1 = Round plug-in connection M12x1, 4-pin
1 switching point = 1SP EN 175301-803 = Rectangular plug-in connection,
2 switching points, 3 LED = 2SP 2-pin design A according to EN-175301-803
2 switching points, 3 LED and
signal suppression at 30°C [86 °F] = 2SPSU

Material numbers of the mechanical optical maintenance indicators

Material no. Type Signal Switching points Connector LED

R928028409 WE-1SP-M12x1 Changeover 1 No
R928028410 WE-2SP-M12x1 Normally open (at 75 %) / M12x1
2 3 pieces
R928028411 WE-2SPSU-M12x1 normally closed contact (at 100 %)
R928036318 WE-1SP-EN175301-803 Normally closed contact 1 EN 175301-803 No

Mating connectors according to IEC 60947-5-2 (dimensions in mm [inch])

For electronic switching element with round plug-in connection M12x1

Mating connector suitable for K24 4-pin, M12x1

Ø19,6 [0.77]
M12x1

with screw connection, cable gland Pg9.

Material no. R900031155

54 [2.12]
Mating connector suitable for K24-3m 4-pin, M12x1
with potted-in PVC cable, 3 m long.
Line cross-section: 4 x 0.34 mm2
Core marking: 1 Brown
Ø19,6 [0.77]
M12x1

2 White
3 Blue
4 Black
Material no. R900064381 41,5 [1.63]

For more round plug-in connections refer to data sheet 08006.

4/8 Bosch Rexroth AG Hydraulics WE; WO RE 51450/03.11

Symbols

Switching element Connector

3(–)
2
4

1(+)

WE-1SP-M12x1

Switching element Connector

Mechanical optical backpressure indicator 2

with a return line filter without bypass 100%

1(+)
A
WE-1SP-EN175301-803

Switching element Connector

Circuit diagram drawn in plugged
condition
(op. mode) Switching
100% point 100 %
B LED red
2
Electronic switching element 75% 4
Switching
for maintenance indicator point 75 %
LED yellow
1(+)
A
Standby
LED green
3(–)

WE-2SP-M12x1

B Switching element Connector

Circuit diagram drawn
Mechanical optical pressure differential indicator in plugged condition at Switching
temp. > 30 °C point 100 %
with a line filter without bypass
(op. mode) K2 LED red
2
100%

30 °C / 20 °C 4
Switching
86 °F / 68 °F K1 point 75 %
on / off 75% LED yellow 1(+)
S1
75% S2-100% Standby
LED green
K1 K2 3(–)

WE-2SPSU-M12x1
RE 51450/03.11 WE; WO Hydraulics Bosch Rexroth AG 5/8

Function, section

By default, the Rexroth filters are supplied with a mechanical 4

optical maintenance indicator (WO). The electronic switching
element (WE) is available as accessory and compatible with 5
the mechanical optical maintenance indicator. The electronic
switching element is attached to the optical maintenance
indicator and fixed by means of a locking ring. The electronic
maintenance indicator is not dependent on the nominal 6
filter pressure.
The increasing backpressure and/or pressure difference
pushes a spool (1) against a spring (2) upwards. The
solenoid (3) mounted on the spool is moved together with
the spool. The optical pin (4) can take two valid positions. If
the position of the spool (1) with solenoids (3) is below the
nominal pressure of the maintenance indicator, the optical pin
remains in retracted "rest position". If the nominal pressure is
exceeded for the first time, the position of the optical pin (5)
is changed suddenly into the second possible "on condition" 3
by repulsion of the solenoid of pin (5) to the solenoid of the
spool (3). The pin will remain visible in this extended position
on a permanent basis, even after the machine has been
switched off (or after pressure drop or cold start) (memory
function). It has to be acknowledged. 2
The reed contact (6) integrated in the switching element
is operated by the magnetic field change. In case of two
switching points, two reed contacts are installed.
For the electronic switching element WE-2SPSU, the
temperature for the temperature suppression is dissipated via 1
the housing of the mechanical optical maintenance indicator.
The electronic switching element WE-2SPSU is not suitable
for the mechanical optical maintenance indicator made of
polyamide (WO-S01-2,2-...-PA).

WE-2SP-M12x1 WE-1SP-EN175301-803
with mating connector (not included in the delivery) with plug-in connection
6/8 Bosch Rexroth AG Hydraulics WE; WO RE 51450/03.11

Technical Data (For applications outside these parameters, please consult us!)

of the mechanical optical maintenance indicator

Material Version D01 (450 bar) D01 (160 bar) S01 S01 (PA)
Material Brass Aluminum Aluminum PA6.6

Sealing material NBR FKM

Temperature range °C –30…+100 –20…+120
[°F] [–22…212] [–4…248]

of the electronic switching element

Electrical connection Round plug-in connection M12x1, 4-pin Rectangular
plug-in connection
EN 175301-803
Version 1SP-M12x1 2SP-M12x1 2SP-M12x1 1SP-EN175301-803
Contact load, direct voltage Amax. 1
Voltage range Vmax. 150 (AC/DC) 10-30 (DC) 250 (AC) / 200 (DC)
Max. switching power with resistive load W 20 70
Switching type 75 % signal – Normally open contact –
100 % signal Change- Normally closed contact Normally closed
over contact
2SPSU Signal switch-
ing through at
30 °C [86 °F],
Return
switching at
20 °C [68 °F]
Display via LEDs in Stand-by (LED green);
the electronic switching element 2SP... 75 % switching point (LED yellow)
100 % switching point (LED red)
Protection class according to EN 60529 IP 67 IP 65
Ambient temperature range °C [°F] –25 to +85 [–13 to +185]
For direct voltage above 24 V, spark extinguishing is to be provided for protecting the switching contacts.
Weight Electronic switching element:
– with round plug-in connection M12x1 kg [lbs] 0.1 [0.22]
RE 51450/03.11 WE; WO Hydraulics Bosch Rexroth AG 7/8

Maintenance indicator (dimensions in mm [inch])

Backpressure indicator Backpressure indicator

with assembled switching element with assembled switching element

60 [2.36] 77,5 [3.05]

47,5 [1.87] 5 48,7 [1.92]
5 26,5 [1.04] 26,5 [1.04]

35,5 [1.40]
35,5 [1.40]
100%
75%

77,5 [3.05]
84,5 [3.33]
Rexroth Rexroth

2
3

25 [0.98]
1 p2
1
[0.65]
16,6

7 M20x1,5
M30x1,5 M20x1,5
p1
7 p1

6
50,5 [1.99]
44,2 [1.74]

44,2 [1.74]
M12x1

1 Mechanical optical maintenance indicator; Notes:

max. tightening torque MA max = 50 Nm [36.88 lb-ft] Presentation contains mechanical optical maintenance indica-
tightening torque for backpressure indicator in tor (1) and electronic switching element (2) (3).
PA6.6 MA max = 35 Nm [25.82 lb-ft]
Switching elements with increased switching power at request.
2 Switching element with locking ring for electrical mainte-
nance indicator (rotatable by 360°); round plug-in con-
nection M12x1, 4-pin
3 Switching element with locking ring for electrical mainte-
nance indicator (rotatable by 360°); rectangular plug-in
connection EN175301-803
4 Housing with three LEDs: 24 V =
Green: Stand-by
Yellow: Switching point 75 %
Red: Switching point 100 %
5 Optical indicator bistable
6 Locking ring DIN 471-16x1, Material no. R900003923
7 Name plate
8/8 Bosch Rexroth AG Hydraulics WE; WO RE 51450/03.11

Installation, operating and maintenance instructions

Connection of the electronic switching elements When must the filter element be exchanged or
By default, the filter is equipped with a mechanical optical cleaned respectively?
maintenance indicator WO (4). The electronic switching ele- – After initial start-up of the system, the filter element is to
ment (2) is attached to the mechanical optical maintenance be exchanged.
indicator (1) and fixed by means of a locking ring (6). – Upon start-up in cold condition, the red pushbutton of
The following must generally be observed with Rexroth filters: the optical maintenance indicator (4) may jump out and
an electrical signal is output via the switching element.
– Make sure that the components are assembled in a stress- Only push the red pushbutton in again after the operating
less form. temperature has been reached. If it jumps out again imme-
– The filter housing must always be grounded. diately or if the electric signal has not gone out at operat-
ing temperature, the filter element must be exchanged or
cleaned respectively.
– The filter element should be replaced or cleaned after
max. 6 months.

Quality and standardization

Use in explosive areas according to directive 94/9/EC (ATEX) (EEx ib) be used in systems for device group II, category 2G
(zone 1) and category 3G (zone 2) without marking and cer-
According to DIN EN 60079-11, the electronic mainte- tification. The operating equipment is assigned to explosion
nance indicators WE-1SP-M12x1 are simple, electronic op- group II B and temperature class T5.
erating equipment not having an own voltage source. This
simple, electronic operating equipment may - according When using Rexroth filters in explosive areas, potential equal-
to DIN EN 60079-14 - in intrinsically safe electrical circuits ization must always be ensured.

Possible circuit according to DIN EN 60079-14

Explosive area, zone 1

Related operating
equipment
I01

U01 EX ib Intrinsically safe

operating equipment

The declaration of incorporation according to DIN EN 13463 is

available for this filter separately, with Material no. R928028899.

Bosch Rexroth AG © This document, as well as the data, specifications and other informa-
Hydraulics tion set forth in it, are the exclusive property of Bosch Rexroth AG. It
Zum Eisengießer 1 may not be reproduced or given to third parties without its consent.
97816 Lohr am Main, Germany The data specified above only serve to describe the product. No state-
Phone +49 (0) 93 52 / 18-0 ments concerning a certain condition or suitability for a certain applica-
Fax +49 (0) 93 52 / 18-23 58 tion can be derived from our information. The information given does not
documentation@[Link] release the user from the obligation of own judgment and verification. It
[Link] must be remembered that our products are subject to a natural process
of wear and aging.
Float switch RE 50222/05.10
Replaces: 50214
1/18

with switching contacts and temperature contact,

with resistance measuring chain / resistance
thermometer, with display and control unit

Type ABZMS-41

Component series 1X
HAD 7708/09

Table of contents Features

Content Page Float switches are switching devices operated by a float
Features 1 moved by fluid. They serve the control of filling levels in power
unit tanks.
Ordering code 2
Three series are available:
Symbols, standard types 3
Float switch Type ABZMS…M with a maximum of four ad-
Technical data 4, 5
justable switching contacts normally closed / normally open or
Mating connectors 6 a maximum of three switching contacts and optionally fixed-
Connection variants and pin assignment 6…8 ly set temperature contact as normally closed contact for
Pre-set switching points Type M 8 60 °C [140 °F], 70 °C [158 °F] or 80 °C [176 °F].
Float switch with level and temperature contacts 9 Float switch Type ABZMS...RTA with resistance measuring
chain (level) and resistance thermometer (temperature) with
Float switch with display and control unit 10
analog output from 4 to 20 mA.
Function level, function temperature
Float switch Type ABZMS...D with resistance measuring
Function display and control unit 11
chain and resistance thermometer as with Type ABZMS...RTA
Oil volume specification for float switches 12, 13 and additional display and control unit for level and tempera-
Installation opening of the tank cover 14 ture setting.
Spare parts 15, 16
Assembly information, use in
explosive areas according to
directive 94/9/EC (ATEX), normative references 17

Information on available spare parts:

[Link]/spc
2/18 Bosch Rexroth AG Hydraulics ABZMS-41 RE 50222/05.10

Ordering code

ABZM S 41 1X
Power unit accessories Electrical connection 1)
Measuring device = ABZM K24 = Connector 4-pole
Float switch =S M12x1 (standard)
K14 = Connector 4-pole
Version = 41
(3+PE)
Component series 10 to 19 = 1X DIN EN 175301-803
(10 to 19: unchanged installation and K6 = Connector 7-pole
connection dimensions)
(6+PE)
Ordering length in mm [inch] DIN EN 175201-804
L = 370 mm [14.57] = 0370 Voltage
L = 500 mm [19.69] = 0500
DC = VDC 10…36
L = 800 mm [31.50] = 0800
AC = VAC 10…230
L = 1000 mm [39.37] = 1000
L = 1200 mm [47.24] = 1200
Level and temperature measurement 4) 1) Mating connectors separate order, see page 6
Number level contacts normally closed/normally open 2) 2) Pinout, see page 7
1x = M1 3)
2x = M2 Option:
3x = M3 Temperature contact 60 °C [140 °F] = T60F
Temperature contact 80 °C [176 °C] = T80F
4x = M4
4) Combination possibilities
Number level contacts normally closed/normally open and
Function / Electrical connection
temperature contact 70 °C [158 °F] normally closed 3)
1x = M1-T70F
Voltage
Function

2x = M2-T70F
3x = M3-T70F VDC10-36 VAC10-230
Number level contacts normally closed/normally open and temperature K24 2K24 K14 K6 K14 K6
sensor PT100, output resistance signal Ω M1 x - x x x x
1x = M1-TS
M2 x - x x x x
2x = M2-TS
3x = M3-TS M3 - - - x - -
Number level contacts normally closed/normally M4 - - - x - -
open and resistance thermometer, output 4...20 mA M1-T70F - x x x x x
1x = M1-TA
M2-T70F - x - x - x
2x = M2-TA
3x = M3-TA M3-T70F - - - x - -
Resistance measuring chain (level) and resistance thermometer M1-TS - x - x - -
analog output 4…20 mA = RTA M2-TS - x - x - -
Display and control unit with resistance measuring M3-TS - - - x - -
chain and resistance thermometer
with four programmable PNP switching outputs = D1 M1-TA - x - x - -

Display and control unit with resistance measuring M2-TA - x - x - -

chain and resistance thermometer with two programmable M3-TA - - - x - -
PNP switching outputs and two analog outputs 4...20 mA = D2
RTA x - - - - -
D1 - x - - - -
D2 - x - - - -

Order example:
– Float switch with flange port,
ordering length 370 mm [14.57 inch] Standard types,
see page 3!
– Two pre-set level contacts and temperature contact normally closed
at 70 °C [158 °F]
– Connector K24 Standard types and standard units
ABZMS-S-41-1X/0370/M2-T70/DC-K24 are contained in the EPS
(standard price list).
RE 50222/05.10 ABZMS-41 Hydraulics Bosch Rexroth AG 3/18

Symbols

–Sx
–Sx
L1-.. 4-20mA 4-20mA
L1-..
L2-..
L2-.. 4-20mA 4-20mA
T-..

with two with two switch- with resistance mea- with display and control unit,
switching contacts ing contacts and suring chain / resis- resistance measuring chain /
one temperature tance thermometer resistance thermometer
contact

Standard types

Float switch with two switching contacts, Type ...M2...

Ordering length L in mm [inch] Type Material number

0370 [14.57] ABZMS-41-1X/0370/M2/DC-K24 R901212588
0500 [19.69] ABZMS-41-1X/0500/M2/DC-K24 R901212589

Float switch with two switching contacts and temperature contact, Type ...M2-TF70F...

Ordering length L in mm [inch] Type Material number

0370 [14.57] ABZMS-41-1X/0370/M2-T70F/DC-K24 R901212590
0500 [19.69] ABZMS-41-1X/0500/M2-T70F/DC-K24 R901212591

Float switch with resistance measuring chain and resistance thermometer, Type ...RTA...

Ordering length L in mm [inch] Type Material number

0370 [14.57] ABZMS-41-1X/0370/RTA/DC-K24 R901212592
0500 [19.69] ABZMS-41-1X/0500/RTA/DC-K24 R901212593

Float switch with display and control unit, resistance measuring chain and resistance thermometer, Type ...D2...

Ordering length L in mm [inch] Type Material number

0370 [14.57] ABZMS-41-1X/0370/D2/DC-K24 R901212594
0500 [19.69] ABZMS-41-1X/0500/D2/DC-K24 R901212595

Standard types and standard units are

contained in the EPS (standard price list).
4/18 Bosch Rexroth AG Hydraulics ABZMS-41 RE 50222/05.10

Technical data (For applications outside these parameters, please consult us!)
general
Installation position Vertical ±10 °
Medium temperature range °C [F] –20 to +80 [–4 to +176]
Ambient temperature range
– M… and RTA °C [F] –20 to +85 [–4 to +185]
– D1 and D2 °C [F] –20 to +70 [–4 to +158]
Material – Sliding tube Ø 20 mm [0.79 inch] CU alloy
– Float 1.4571
– Flange PA12 + 25GF (25 % of glass fiber)
– Protective tube Ø 60.3 mm [2.37 inch] Stainless steel 1.4301
Seal material Klinger C-4400
Maximum switching point L1 mm [inch] 1140 [44.88]
Max. weight with ordering length mm 0370 0500 0800 1000 1200
[inch] [14.57] [19.69] [31.50] [39.37] [47.24]
kg 0.5 1.3 1.8 2.0 2.2
[Ibs] [1.10] [2.87] [3.97] [4.41] [4.85]
hydraulic
Maximum operating pressure bar [psi] 1 [14.5]
Hydraulic fluid
– Density g/cm3 > 0.8
– Resistance
• Mineral oils Mineral oil HLP according to
DIN 51524
• Flame-resistant hydraulic fluids Emulsions HFA-E according to
DIN 24320
Water solutions HFC Resistant
according to
Phosphoric acid ester HFD-R
VDMA 24317
Organic esters HFD-U
• Fast biodegradable hydraulic fluids Triglycerides (rape seed oil) HETG
according to
Synthetic esters HEES
VDMA 24568
Polyglycols HEPG
electrical
Protection class according to DIN EN 60529 IP 65
Plug-in connection 4-pole M12x1 (material: metal) (K24)
4-pole (3+PE) DIN EN175301-803 (K14)
7-pole (6+PE) DIN EN175201-804 (K6)
Reed contacts of the float switches with connection K24, K14, K6/DC
Switching voltage range VDC 10 to 36
Max. switching current A 0.5
Max. contact load VA 10
Temperature contacts of the float switches with connection K24, K14, K6/DC
Switching voltage range VDC 10 to 50
Max. switching current A 0.5
Max. contact load VA 10
Max. switching cycles 100.000
Response tolerance K ±3 with max. 1k/min.
Hysteresis K up to 10 with max. 1k/min.
Max. temperature change velocity K/min. 1
RE 50222/05.10 ABZMS-41 Hydraulics Bosch Rexroth AG 5/18

Technical data (For applications outside these parameters, please consult us!)

Reed contacts of the float switches

with connection K14 according to DIN EN 175301-803 / K6 according to DIN EN 175201-804/AC
Switching voltage range VDC/VAC 10 to 230
Max. switching current A 0.5
Max. contact load VA 10
Temperature contacts of the float switches
with connection K14 according to DIN EN 175301-803 / K6 according to DIN EN 175201-804/AC
Switching voltage range VDC/VAC 10 to 230
Max. switching current A 2.5
Max. contact load VA 100
Max. switching cycles 100.000
Response tolerance K ±3 with max. 1k/min.
Hysteresis K up to 10 with max. 1k/min.
Max. temperature change velocity K/min. 1

PT100
Sensor element PT100 class B; DIN EN 60751
Temperature measuring range °C [°F] 0 to 100 [32 to 212]
Accuracy K ±0.8

Resistance measuring chain and resistance thermometer

with connection K24 for mating connector M12x1; 4-pole
Operating voltage VDC 10 to 36
Signal output mA 4 to 20
(alternatively 0 to 10, 2 to 10 or 0 to 5 V can be set)
Resolution resistance measuring chain mm 5
Max. load Ω (U – 9.0 V) / 0.02 A
Measuring range temperature °C [°F] 0 to 100 [32 to 212]

Display and control unit

Supply voltage VDC 10 to 32
Display range °C [°F] –20 to +120 [–4 to +248]
Alarm adjustment – Temperature °C [°F] 0 to 100 [32 to 212]
range: – Level % / liter [US gal] 0 to 100 / 0 to 999 [263.91]
Switching points 4 programmable switching outputs
(2 level + 2 temperature)
Housing design PA, IP65 (antistatic)
Display 4 digits, seven-segment LED display
Current consumption upon switch-on ca. 100 mA for 100 ms
Current consumption in operation ca. 50 mA with UB 24 V
Switching output PNP, max. 0.5 A switching power
Max. ambient temperature °C [°F] –20 to +70 [–4 to +158]
Accuracy 1 % of the measurement range end value
Operation 3 buttons
6/18 Bosch Rexroth AG Hydraulics ABZMS-41 RE 50222/05.10

Mating connectors (dimensions in mm [inch]) – For detailed information see RE 08006

Mating connector for connector K14 Mating connector for connector K6

according to DIN EN 175301-803 according to DIN EN 175201-804
53 [2.09]
M16 x 1,5

34,2
[1.35]
1

1 fastening screw M3, tightening torque MA = 0.5 Nm

Description Material no. Description Material no.

MATING CONNECTOR 4P Z14 M SW SPEZ R901017012 MATING CONNECTOR 7P Z6 N6RFFK R900002803

Mating connector for connector K24 Mating connector for connector K24 with potted-in PVC
cable, 3 m long

M12 x 1
M12x1

[ 0.77]
Ø19,6

41,5 [1.63]
54 [2.13]

Description Material no. Description Material no.

MATING CONNECTOR 4P Z24 SPEZ R900031155 MATING CONNECTOR 4P Z24M12X1 +3MSPEZ R900064381

Connection variants and pin assignment

Version M Version RTA

Version M
Connector type K24 with 1 x level contact with level output 4-20 mA
with 1 or 2 level contacts
+ temperature contact + temperature output 4-20 mA

+24 V DC 1 4-20
L1 mA level
1 4 4-20 mA 4
L1 3 level
1 4
M12x1 2 4-20
3 mA Pt100
4-20 mA 2
2 level
TK

L2
1 4
2
L1 3
RE 50222/05.10 ABZMS-41 Hydraulics Bosch Rexroth AG 7/18

Connection variants and pin assignment

Connector type 2K24 Version M with 2 level contacts + Version M with 2 level contacts +
temperature contact temperature sensor PT100

M12 x 1 M12 x 1 L2 L2
A 1 4 A 1 4
2 2
L1 3 L1 3
A B
B 1 4 B 1 2
TK 2 Pt100 4
3 3

Connector type K14 Version M with Version M with

1 or 2 level contacts 1 x level contact + temperature contact

L1 L1
1 2 1 2
3 3
TK
PE PE

L2
1 2
3
L1
PE

Connector type K6 Version M with Version M with

up to 4 level contacts up to 3 level contacts + temperature contact
or temperature sensor PT100

L1 L1
1 2 1 2
3 3
4 4
5 PE
6 5 6
PE TK / Pt100

L2 L2 2
1 2 1
3 3
L1 4 L1 4
5 PE
6 5 6
PE TK / Pt100

L3 L3 2
1 2 1
L2 L2
3 3
L1 L1
4 4
5 PE
6 5 6
PE TK / Pt100

L4
1 2
L3 3
L2 4
L1
5
6
PE

Switching point L1 is by default set as normally closed con- By turning the contacts by 180°, the switching function
tact and switching points L2 to L4 as normally open contact. changes; the contact type normally closed contact becomes a
The switching points can be adjusted in the device (instruc- normally open contact or vice versa.
tions see page 12).
8/18 Bosch Rexroth AG Hydraulics ABZMS-41 RE 50222/05.10

Connection variants and pin assignment

Display and Version D1 Version D2

control unit 4 freely programmable 2 freely programmable PNP switching outputs
with 2 x K24 PNP switching outputs and 2 analog outputs 4-20 mA

M12 x 1
A B A B
A B
+24 V 1 1 +24 V +24 V 1 1 +24 V

Display and
Display and

control unit
control unit
OUT2 2 2 OUT4 Temp. 4-20 mA 2 2 OUT2
GND 3 3 GND GND 3 3 GND
OUT1 4 4 OUT3 Level 4-20 mA 4 4 OUT1
Pt100 Pt100

Level Level

Pre-set switching points Type M

Float switch Number of switching points

Ordering length “L” Switching points pre-set, dimensions in mm [inch]
in mm [inch] 1 2 3 4
L1 220 [8.66] 220 [8.66] 220 [8.66] 280 [11.02]
L2 140 [5.51] 140 [5.51] 220 [8.66]
0370 [14.57]
L3 60 [2.36] 140 [5.51]
L4 60 [3.36]
L1 280 [11.02] 280 [11.02] 280 [11.02] 340 [13.38]
L2 160 [6.29] 160 [6.29] 280 [11.02]
0500 [19.69]
L3 60 [2.36] 160 [6.29]
L4 60 [2.36]
L1 600 [23.6] 600 [23.6] 600 [23.6] 700 [27.55]
L2 400 [15.74] 400 [15.74] 600 [23.6]
0800 [31.50]
L3 200 [7.87] 400 [15.74]
L4 200 [7.87]
L1 700 [27.55] 700 [27.55] 700 [27.55] 800 [31.49]
L2 500 [19.68] 500 [19.68] 700 [27.55]
1000 [39.37]
L3 200 [7.87] 500 [19.68]
L4 200 [7.87]
L1 800 [31.49] 800 [31.49] 800 [31.49] 1000 [39.36]
L2 600 [23.62] 600 [23.62] 800 [31.49]
1200 [47.24]
L3 300 [11.81] 600 [23.62]
L4 300 [11.81]
RE 50222/05.10 ABZMS-41 Hydraulics Bosch Rexroth AG 9/18

Float switch with level and temperature contacts (version M - T..F)

Float switch with resistance measuring chain and resistance thermometer
(version RTA)
Unit dimensions (dimensions in mm [inch]) 6

M12x1
7
43 [1.69]

5 [0.20]
36 [1.42]
1 [0.04]

2 3
Ø 60,3

L
8 [Ø 2.37]
with stilling tube
L2

K24 2K24
M12x1 M12x1
M12x1

60 [2.36]
43 [1.69]
A B
L1

(Measuring range)
min. 40 [min. 1.57]

Ø 20 [Ø 0.79] 1
L

K14 K6
57 [2.24]
(57 [2.24])
60 [2.36]

3,5 [0.14]

Top view

5
[Ø 0.24]
Ø 73 [Ø 2.87]
Ø 90 [Ø 3.54]

Ø 51
[Ø 2.01]
Ø6

1 Switching points
2 Flat seal Version M: L1 = min. 70 [min 2.76]
Version RTA: L1 = L – min. 57 [min 2.24]
3 Stilling tube from L = 500 mm [19.69]
4 Name plate
5 Installation opening of the tank see page 14
6 Mating connector for plug-in connection K24 (M12x1), see page 6
7 Connector “K24” 04-pole M12x1
8 Stroke limitation ring set to 20 mA (Type RTA)
10/18 Bosch Rexroth AG Hydraulics ABZMS-41 RE 50222/05.10

Float switch with display and control unit (version D..)

Unit dimensions (dimensions in mm [inch])

6 Housing
rotatable
M12x1 by 270°
7

12 [0.47]
9 10
121 [4.76]

5 [0.20]
4
1 [0.04]

3
L2 = 25 [0.98]

2
Ø20 [Ø0.79] Ø60,3
[Ø2.37]
8
L

with stilling tube

L1
(Measuring range)
L

57 [2.24]

1
Ø51 Top view
[Ø2.01]

5
Ø90 [Ø3.54]
Ø73 [Ø2.87]
Ø6 [Ø0.24]
57 [2.24]

3,5 [0.14]

A B

1 Measuring range 4 – 20 mA
2 Flat seal
3 Stilling tube from L = 500 mm [19.69]
4 Name plate
5 Installation opening of the tank see page 14
6 Mating connector for plug-in connection K24 (M12x1), see page 6
7 Connector “K24” 04-pole M12x1
8 Stroke limitation ring set to 20 mA
9 LEDs for the display of alarm switching points
RE 50222/05.10 ABZMS-41 Hydraulics Bosch Rexroth AG 11/18

Function level
Level contacts: By turning the contacts by 180°, the switching function
The sliding tubes contain the adjustable reed contacts (nor- changes; the contact type normally closed contact becomes a
mally closed and normally open) that are switched by the per- normally open contact or vice versa.
manent magnets installed in the float. Resistance measuring chain:
If with falling oil level, the float reaches the switching points, The sliding tube contains the resistance measuring chain
the contacts are operated magnetically. The spool positions (contact distance 5 mm / resolution) for the continuous re-
of the contacts are maintained until the float exceeds the cording of the filling level. If the individual reed contact is
switching points again as the oil level rises. switched (closed) by the permanent magnet contained in the
The switching points can be adjusted in the device. float, one resistance is in each case activated. The added re-
sistance value is converted in 4-20 mA by a transformer.

Function temperature
Temperature contact: Temperature sensor PT100:
At the lowest point within the sliding tube, the bi-metal tem- The PT100 consists of a temperature sensor guaranteeing
perature contacts are attached to the board and secured by continuous temperature recording. In this connection, the
means of a shrink tube (the same procedure is used for the max. cable length of 6 m [236.22] is to be observed.
versions with temperature sensor PT 100 and resistance ther-
mometer with analog output 4-20 mA). If the desired tempera- Resistance thermometer with measuring transducer,
ture switching point is reached, the bi-metal contact is opened output 4–20 mA:
or closed.
The resistance thermometer PT100 with measuring transduc-
er is also attached in the sliding tube at the board. The tem-
perature-dependent signal is converted into a linear current
change of 4-20 mA.

Function display and control unit (version D)

The microprocessor-controlled display and control unit pro- Parameterization
cesses the analog input signals for the analysis of the level The menu navigation is based on the VDMA standard sheet
and temperature control. The level and temperature settings for fluid sensors 24574-1.
can be made at the control unit in a simple menu tree by
The operating menu is designed hierarchically, as tree struc-
means of pushbuttons and read at the LED display.
ture.
The display and control unit has a red, four-digit seven-
That means that frequently used functions and adjustment
segment LED display and 3 pushbuttons for the operation as
points can be accessed very quickly and rarely used menu
well as up to 4 LEDs integrated in the front plate for display-
items can be found in a sub-menu.
ing alarm conditions.
Using the ▲ and ▼ keys, the corresponding parameter is set
The device has moreover four freely adjustable PNP switch-
and/or the next menu item is displayed.
ing outputs plus the adjustable switch-back points (version
D1) and alternatively (version D2) two freely programmable Using the ► key, the marked menu item is selected and/or
PNP switching outputs and 2 x 4-20 mA output for the contin- the set parameter is accepted and saved.
uous measurement of oil level and temperature. The parameter may be a numerical value and a selection of
The switching conditions are shown in the display. functions (e.g. NO [output as normally open contact],
The 4-20 mA output can optionally be changed to 0-10 V, NC [output as normally closed contact] or i1 [analog output
2-10 V or 0-5 V. 4…20 mA]).
In the display, the measured temperature or filling value will After confirmation of a parameter or selection of a function us-
be shown in the desired unit (°C, °F, L, cm, %, inch or mm) ing the ► key, the display switches back to the current menu
according to the setting. By default, the temperature display is item. Then, you can display the next menu item using ▲ and
set to °C. ▼ and select it using ►.
During the setting and/or programming of the corresponding
process parameters, the parameter values and/or the related
menu items will be shown in the display.
In case of an energy supply failure, all input values will be
stored, the min/max values can be retrieved from a perma-
nent memory, if necessary.
12/18 Bosch Rexroth AG Hydraulics ABZMS-41 RE 50222/05.10

Oil volume specification for float switch (dimensions in mm [inch])

Type M with two switching contacts

max.

L2
min.

2 1
1 Residual quantity with switching point L1 1)
2 Residual quantity with switching point L2 1)

Switching point
Float switch Residual hydraulic fluid volume at switching point
pre-set
Ordering length “L” Dimensions in mm [inch] AB 40-40, AB 40-43, AB 40-44
in mm [inch]
L1 L2 Size L1 1) in liter [US gal] L2 1) in liter [US gal]
63 28 [7.40] 42 [11.10]
100 45 [11.89] 67 [17.70]
160 74 [19.55] 100 [26.42]
370 [14.57] 220 [8.66] 140 [5.51] 250 120 [31.70] 174 [45.97]
400 190 [50.19] 277 [73.18]
630 365 [96.42] 475 [125.48]
800 460 [121.52] 600 [158.50]
1000 490 [129.44] 740 [195.49]
1250 780 [206.05] 1030 [272.10]
500 [19.69] 280 [11.02] 160 [6.30]
1600 990 [261.53] 1310 [346.07]
2000 1380 [364.56] 1730 [457.02]

Attention!
Before commissioning, the switching contacts are to be set according to the necessary operating conditions.

Adjustment of the switching height

The contacts installed in the float switch are screwed to a contract strip within the sliding tube. They are set to the switching
points according to the preceding table and can be adjusted upwards or downwards retroactively (observe minimum distanc-
es!). Proceeds as follows in order to adjust the contacts:
– Interrupt the voltage supply
– Loosen the plug-in connections
– Loosen the screws of the plug-in connector base and pull out the plug-in connector base with the contact strip
– Loosen the contact from the strip and mount it at the requested spot (can be adjusted in 10 mm increments)
– Insert the contact strip smoothly
– Fasten the plug-in connector base using screws
– Re-establish the plug-in connection and the power connection
RE 50222/05.10 ABZMS-41 Hydraulics Bosch Rexroth AG 13/18

Oil volume specification for float switch (dimensions in mm [inch])

Type RTA, D1 and D2
In tank according to AB 40-40, AB 40-43 and AB 40-44

Tank size from DN100 to 800

30 [1.81]
55 [2.17]

mm mA Liter
30 20 97 160 249 393 630 800
max. 90 150 600
18 140 350 750
76 [2.99]

80 130 550 700

100 16 200
min. 70 120 300 500 650
14 110 600
310 [12.20]

150
Measuring range
60 100 250 450
12 150 550
370 [14.57]

90
200 50 80 400 500
10 70 200
40 350 450
250 8 60 100 150 400
30 50 300
6 40 350
20 30 100 250
310 4 15 25 50 79 225 285

DN400

DN800
DN160
DN100

DN250

DN630
Tank size from DN1000 to 2000
30 [1.81]
55 [2.17]

mm mA Liter

30 20 1010 1300 1655 2110

131 [5.16]

1600
2000
76 [2.99]

100 18 900 1200 1500

1900
250 16 1100 1400
800 1800
76 [2.99]

Measuring range
440 [17.32]

14
500 [19.69]

200 1300 1700

700 1000
min. 350 12 1200 1600
600 900
300 10 1100 1500
350 500 800 1000 1400
8
900 1300
400 6 400 700
800 1200
440 4 595 755 1120
DN1600

DN2000
DN1000

DN1250
14/18 Bosch Rexroth AG Hydraulics ABZMS-41 RE 50222/05.10

Installation opening of the tank cover (dimensions in mm [inch])

6 x M5
4]
0.0
.44+
[2 [2.87
–0.0
08]

Standard breakthrough AB 03-39.73 similar to DIN 24557 part 2

Fastening screws:
6 HEXAGON SOCKET HEAD CAP SCREWS ISO4762-M5X18-8.8-A2P Material no. R900202612
RE 50222/05.10 ABZMS-41 Hydraulics Bosch Rexroth AG 15/18

Spare parts (only for version K24: Electrical connection VDC 10-36)

1 2 3 A

1 Temperature monitoring
R901217053 TEMPERATURE SENSOR T60F-DC ABZMS-41
R901217052 TEMPERATURE SENSOR T70F-DC ABZMS-41
R901217054 TEMPERATURE SENSOR T80F-DC ABZMS-41

R901217050 TEMPERATURE SENSOR TS-PT100 ABZMS-41

R901217051 TEMPERATURE SENSOR TA-4-20MA ABZMS-41

2 Level contacts

R901217055 REED CONTACT K101-DC ABZMS-41

R901217056 REED CONTACT K102-DC ABZMS-41

R901217057 REED CONTACT K103-DC ABZMS-41

R901217058 REED CONTACT K104-DC ABZMS-41

3 R901217059 SEAL 1.0X90X60 ABZMS-41

When exchanging the level contacts, correct order has to be ensured.

Contact ..K101.. (green) is to be mounted first after the mounting flange (A).
Depending on the type, this is followed by .. K102 (yellow), ..K103.. (red) and ..K104.. (blue).
Any change in the order may cause malfunctions!
16/18 Bosch Rexroth AG Hydraulics ABZMS-41 RE 50222/05.10

Spare parts (only for version K14 and K6: Electrical connection VDC 10-230)

1 2 3 A

1 Temperature monitoring

R901270930 TEMPERATURE SENSOR T60F-AC ABZMS-41

R901270931 TEMPERATURE SENSOR T70F-AC ABZMS-41
R901270932 TEMPERATURE SENSOR T80F-AC ABZMS-41

2 Level contacts

R901270933 REED CONTACT K231-AC ABZMS-41

R901270934 REED CONTACT K232-AC ABZMS-41

3 R901217059 SEAL 1.0X90X60 ABZMS-41

When exchanging the level contacts, correct order has to be ensured.

Contact ..K231.. (purple) is to be mounted first and ..K232.. (brown) second after the
mounting flange (A).
Any change in the order may cause malfunctions!
RE 50222/05.10 ABZMS-41 Hydraulics Bosch Rexroth AG 17/18

Assembly information
– Vertical installation according to technical data page 4 Electrical connections:
– Avoid flows – Electrical connections may only be performed by specialists
– Do not expose the switch to strong impact and bends – Before performing any works at electrical parts, the voltage
– Avoid external magnetic fields. They may impair the func- supply is to be interrupted
tion of the reed contacts. – Tighten round connector M12x1 or mating connectors
after connection
– Only plug in the round connector M12x1 or mating connec-
tor if it is de-energized
– Do not overload the contacts (see technical data)
– In case of inductive load, provide for a protective
circuit!

Use in explosive areas according to directive 94/9/EC (ATEX)

The float switches ABZMS-41 are not suitable for the use in
explosive areas.

Normative references

AB 24-02 DIN EN 175301-803: Detail specification: Rectangular con-

Cable sets and distributors nectors – Flat contacts, 0.8 mm thickness, locking screw not
detachable; German version EN 175301-803:1999
AB 40-40
Tanks made of steel, form AN, cover form C, DIN EN 60751
oil pan according to WHG Industrial platinum resistance thermometers and platinum
temperature sensors (IEC 60751:2008)
AB 40-43
Tanks made of steel, cover form C DIN EN 60529
Degrees of protection provided by enclosures
AB 40-44
VDMA 24317
Tanks made of steel, with frame Fluid technology – Flame-resistant fluids – Technical mini-
mum requirements
RE 08006
Mating connectors for controlling electrically operated valves VDMA 24568
and sensors Fluid technology – Fast biodegradable hydraulic fluids – Tech-
nical minimum requirements
DIN 24320
Flame-resistant fluids – Hydraulic fluids of categories HFAE VDMA 24574-1
and HFAS – Properties and requirements Fluid technology – Terms, menu navigation and electrical
connection for fluid sensors
DIN 51524
Hydraulic fluids; hydraulic oils

DIN EN 175201-804: Detail specification – Circular connec-

tors – Round contacts, size diameter 1.6 mm; threaded cou-
pling; German version EN 175201-804:1999
RS 50070/10.05 1/10
Filtro de aire para tanque Reemplaza a: 01.03

Tipo ELF, BF y BL

R 7802_2 H_S_95

Filtro de aire para tanque, Filtro de aire para tanque

tipo ELF 3... con malla de carga tipo BF 7...K...

Indice Características
Contenido Página – Resistente a aceites minerales, fluidos no inflamables
Características 1 (sólo tamaños constructivos 5 y 7) y fluidos degradables
en forma biológica
Código de pedido 2, 3
– Buenas propiedades de retención con caídas reducidas de
Características técnicas 4
presión
Función, símbolos, corte 4, 5
– Filtro de carga de material plástico (malla metálica estándar
Curvas características 5, 6 para tamaño constructivo 5, es posible para tamaños
Dimensiones 7 hasta 10 constructivos 3 y 7)
– Gran superficie de filtración
– Con indicador de ensuciamiento para tamaño constructivo 7
– Conexión tipo bayoneta entre filtro de ventilación y filtro de
carga (roscada para tamaños constructivos 5 y 7)
– Filtro de ventilación asegurado mediante cadena al filtro de
carga (para tamaños constructivos 3 y 4)
– Los tamaños constructivos 5 y 7 son intercambiables
mediante un elemento reemplazable (ver tabla de pág. 3)
– Cartucho filtrante enroscable para tipo BL
– Sujeción por soldadura para tipo BL

Información sobre repuestos suministrables:

[Link]/spc
2/10 Bosch Rexroth AG Hydraulics ELF, BF, BL RS 50070/10.05

Código de pedido

FILTRO P X *
Filtro de aire para tanque = BF Otros datos en texto
con malla de carga = ELF complementario
con cartucho Spin-on = BL Datos complementarios
Material del filtro: fibra de papel =P AS = 4) Protegido contra derrame
Tamaño constructivo 3 =3 SO175 = 4) Malla metálica de
Tamaño constructivo 4 sólo para =4 carga (100 mm long.)
Tamaño constructivo 5 ELF y BF =5 SO148 = 4) Malla metálica de
Tamaño constructivo 7 =7 carga (200 mm long.)
Tamaño constructivo 162 sólo para BL = 162 Sin desig. = Juntas NBR,
Conexión roscada sólo para BF =G filtro adecuado para aceite mineral
Conexión por brida sólo para ELF y BL =F (HL, HLP) según DIN 51524 y fluidos
Conexión soldada sólo para BL =S hidráulicos rápidamente degradables en
forma biológica HETG, HEES, HEPG
Malla filtrante según VDMA 24568
3 µm absoluto (sólo para ELF y BF) = 03 V = 5; 6) Juntas FKM, filtro adecuado
10 µm absoluto = 10 para éster fosforico (HFD-R), poliglicol
Indicador de ensuciamiento (HEPG y éster sintético (HE)
sin posibilidad de indicador de ensuciamiento =W W = 5; 6) Juntas NBR, filtro adecuado
con manómetro, rango medición –1 hasta +0,6 bar =K para emulsión aceite en agua o emulsión
(sólo para ELF7 y BF7) agua en aceite (HFA), agua-glicol (HFC)
y aceites vegetales (HETG)
Tamaño de las conexiones
X= Dígito de variación 0 hasta 9
Filtro tipo Conexión Conexión Conexión Tamaño de
1) Sujeción por brida con tornillos autoblocantes
roscada (G) por brida (F) soldada (S) la conexión
∇ 1; 2) 2) Sujeción por brida según DIN 24557/T2
ELFP3... ∇ =1
ELFP4... 1) =1 3) Sujeción por soldadura, material: acero 35
∇ 4)
ELFP5... G 2 1/2 =2 sólo par ELFP 3 y 7
∇
∇ G3 =3 5) Empleo de fluidos no inflamables
G2 =4
∇
G 1 1/2 =5 TC HFA HFC HFD-R
∇ 2)
3 – – –
ELFP7... =1
∇ 4 – – –
BFP3... ∇ G 3/4 =1 5 W W V
G 3/8 =2
∇ 7 W W –
G 1/2 =3
BFP4...
∇
G 1/4 =1 162 – – –
∇
BFP5... ∇ G 2 1/2 =1 6) Empleo de fluidos degradables en forma biológica
BFP7... G1 =1
∇ 2)
TC HETG HEES HEPG
BLP162F... =2
∇ 3 + + •
BLP162S... 3) =2 4 + + •
∇
= disponible, ver también pág. 7 hasta 10 5 + + •
7 + + •
162 + + •
+ utilización sin restricciones
– no utilizable
• utilización condicionada
Tipos preferidos de filtros

Tipo Malla filtrante en in µm Denominación Nro. referencia

10 FILTRO ELFP 3 F10W1.X/ R900011023
ELF 10 FILTRO ELFP 4 F10W1.X/ R900011241
10 FILTRO ELFP 5 G10W4.X/ R900005153

Otros tipos preferidos y equipos estándares están

indicados en la EPS (lista de precios estándar).
RS 50070/10.05 ELF, BF, BL Hydraulics Bosch Rexroth AG 3/10

Código de pedido para elemento filtrante reemplazable (sólo posible para TC 5, 7 y 162)
Para tipo ELFP 5 y BFP 5
FILTERELEMENT 1) 0005 L P V *
Tamaño constructivo 5 = 0005 Otros datos en texto
Elemento tipo L =P complementario

Malla filtrante V= Juntas FKM, filtro adecuado para

3 µm = 003 éster fosfórico (HFD-R),
10 µm = 010 poliglicol (HEPG)
y éster sintético (HE)
Material de filtro P =P

Para tipo ELFP 5 y BFP 7

FILTERELEMENT 1) 0007 L P V *
Tamaño constructivo 7 = 0007 Otros datos en texto
Elemento tipo L =P complementario

Malla filtrante V= Juntas FKM, filtro adecuado para

3 µm = 003 éster fosfórico (HFD-R),
10 µm = 010 poliglicol (HEPG)
y éster sintético (HE)
Material de filtro P =P
Código de pedido para tipo BL 162: 1) FILTERELEMENT = ELEMENTO FILTRANTE
ELEMENTO FILTRANTE 0160 MU010P

Características técnicas (para utilización con valores distintos, consúltenos!)

Generalidades
Posición de montaje Vertical, máx. 30 ° fuera de la vertical
Conjunto filtrante y malla – TC 3, 4, 5 Fibra de papel, filtro de profundidad (3, 10 µm)
– TC 7 Papel impregnado, filtro de profundidad (3, 10 µm)
– TC BLP 162 Papel impregnado en resina fenólica, malla 10 µm
Masa – TC 3 4 ..5-..2.X/.. ..5-..3.X/.. ..5-..4.X/.. ..5-..5.X/.. 7
– tipo ELF kg 0,25 0,10 2,7 3,1 2,7 2,6 0,38
– tipo BF kg 0,28 0,08 2,00 0,40
– tipo BLP 162 S kg 1,75
– tipo BLP 162 F kg 2,10

Hidráulicas
Fluido hidráulico Aceite mineral (HL, HLP) según DIN 51524;
fluidos hidráulicos rápidamente degradables en forma
biológica según VDMA 24568 (ver también RS 90221);
HETG (aceite de colza); HEPG (poliglicol);
HEES (éster sintético); otros fluidos a pedido
Rango de temperatura del fluido °C – 10 … + 100
Malla filtrante del filtro de carga (sólo para tipo ELF) µm 500
Clase de pureza según norma ISO Grado máximo admisible de impurezas del fluido hidráulico
según ISO 4406 (c) correspondiente a los requerimientos
para sistemas hidráulicos completos 1)
Neumáticas
Flujo de aire Ver curvas características
1) En los sistemas hidráulicos las clases de pureza indicadas Para la elección del filtro ver los catálogos RS 50070,
para los componentes deben ser mantenidas. Un efectivo RS 50076, RS 50081, RS 50086 y RS 50088.
filtrado evita perturbaciones y eleva simultáneamente la vida
útil de los componentes.
4/10 Bosch Rexroth AG Hydraulics ELF, BF, BL RS 50070/10.05

Función, símbolo, corte

El filtro de aire para tanque, serie ELF, se compone de un filtro Símbolo
para filtrar el aire que ingresa al tanque y de una malla para
retener las partículas grandes durante la carga del fluido. Con indicado de
ensucia-miento
Los filtros de ventilación de tanque de las series BF y BL se
versión "K"
componen, por el contrario, sólo de un filtro de aire.
(sólo TC 7)

Filtro de aire par tanque, tipo ELF

Tipo ELFP 3...
Los filtros de aire para tanque del tipo ELF son filtros para
filtrar el aire que ingresa al tanque combinados con una malla
2 1
para retener las partículas grandes durante la carga del fluido.
La gran superficie de la malla filtrante permite una carga del
fluido hidráulico sin dificultad.
5 5
Tipo ELFP 3... y ELFP 4...
Constan básicamente de capuchón (1), filtro de aire (2), filtro 4
de carga (3) y cadena de seguridad (4).
La entrada de aire se realiza a través de las perforaciones (5)
en el lado inferior del capuchón (1). De este modo sólo pueden
3
llegar partículas en suspensión al elemento filtrante (2) donde
son separadas en función de la malla filtrante.

Tipo ELFP 5...

1.1 5
Tipo ELFP 5...
Constan básicamente de carcasa (tapa 1.1; pieza inferior 1.2), 1.2
elemento filtrante (2) y la malla de carga (3) roscada con el 2
filtro de aire.
La entrada de aire se realiza desde abajo a través del espacio
anular (5) entre la tapa 1.1 y la pieza inferior 1.2. De este modo
sólo pueden llegar partículas en suspensión al elemento filtran-
te (2) donde son separadas en función de la malla filtrante. 3
Están equipados con un filtro de aire (2) reemplazable.

Tipo ELFP 7...

Constan básicamente de carcasa (tapa 1.1; pieza inferior 1.2), Tipo ELFP 7...K... 6
elemento filtrante (2) y malla de carga (3).
La tapa (1.1) y la pieza inferior (1.2) son de fibra de vidrio 1.1
reforzada y unidas entre sí mediante rosca. La entrada de aire
se realiza desde abajo a través de la perforaciones laterales (5)
en la pieza inferior (1.2). 5
De este modo sólo pueden llegar partículas en suspensión al 2
elemento filtrante (2) donde son separadas en función de la 1.2
malla filtrante.
Están equipados con un filtro de aire (2) reemplazable. Para
la supervisión de la limpieza del elemento filtrante los filtros se 3
suministran también con un manómetro (6).
RS 50070/10.05 ELF, BF, BL Hydraulics Bosch Rexroth AG 5/10

Función, símbolo, corte

Filtros de aire para tanque BF y BL
Los filtros del tipo BF están diseñados sólo como filtros de Los filtros del tipo BL
aire y se enroscan directamente sobre el depósito de fluido constan de una pieza de
hidráulico. sujeción (6) con un car-
La función de este filtro corresponde tucho filtrante enroscable
en principio a la del tipo ELF. (2) unida al depósito de
fluido.
La diferencia consiste en la
falta de malla de carga.
Los tamaños 5 y 7 están
equipados con un filtro de 2
aire reemplazable.

Tipo BFP 7...K... Tipo BLP 162 S...

Curvas características
(Flujo de aire en litros normalizados por minuto. Las características de flujo valen para todas las mallas!)
0,04 0,04
Diferencia de presión en bar →

Diferencia de presión en bar →

ELFP 3 y BFP 3 ELFP 5 y BFP 5
0,03 0,03

0,02 0,02

0,01 0,01

0 200 400 600 800 1000 1200 0 1000 2000 3000 4000 5000 6000
Flujo de aire en lN/min → Flujo de aire en lN/min →
0,04 0,04
Diferencia de presión en bar →

Diferencia de presión en bar →

ELFP 4 y BFP 4 ELFP 7 y BFP 7

0,03 0,03

0,02 0,02

0,01 0,01

0 50 100 150 200 250 300 0 400 800 1200 1600 2000 2400
Flujo de aire en lN/min → Flujo de aire en lN/min →
0,04
Diferencia de presión en bar →

BLP 162
0,03

0,02

0,01

0 500 1000 1500 2000 2500 3000

Flujo de aire en lN/min →
6/10 Bosch Rexroth AG Hydraulics ELF, BF, BL RS 50070/10.05

Dimensionado del filtro

Diferencia de presión sobre el filtro de aire Filtro ELF y BF – ∆p = 0,01 bar

La diferencia de presión del filtro limpio se puede 3000
tomar de las curvas de pág. 5 para cada tamaño 2000 5/
constructivo. F P 5
EL BFP
1000 7
Criterios de dimensionamiento
BFP
7/

Flujo de aire en lN/min →

Recomendamos seleccionar el filtro de aire 500 FP
(con elemento limpio) según el diagrama de EL
dimensionamiento correspondiente. 3
P
∆p inicial = 0,01 bar BF
3/
FP
EL
100

50 4
BFP
4/
FP
EL

Diagrama de dimensionamiento del filtro,

ejemplo
Estos diagramas son válidos para filtros tipo
ELF y BF tamaño 3, 4, 5, 7 y tipo BLP 162 S Filtro BLP 162 – ∆p = 0,01 bar
y BLP 162 F. 3000
La determinación del tamaño con ayuda del 2000
diagrama se realiza para un diferencia de presión
≤ 0,01 bar. 1000 2
El siguiente ejemplo aclara el modo de trabajo 16
P
BL
Flujo de aire en lN/min →

con el diagrama de dimensionamiento: 500

Ejemplo:
• flujo de aire Ql
(en litro normalizado por minuto): 300 lN/min
filtro tipo: ELF 100
• ∆p inicial recomendado: 0,01 bar
50
• determinación del tamaño para
Ql = 300 l/min
resulta en función del diagrama:
• tamaño constructivo 3
filtro tipo: ELFP 3-..-... 10
RS 50070/10.05 ELF, BF, BL Hydraulics Bosch Rexroth AG 7/10

Dimensiones (medidas en mm)

Tipo ELFP 3... y ELFP 4... Perforaciones ELFP 4

d4
Ød2 Tipo ELFP 3 ELFP 4
d5
Ød1
Ø d1 76 44
Ø d2 83 50

d6
h3 Ø d3 49 28
Ø d4 73 41,3
Ø d5 60 30
d4
h1

d5 d6 M5 M5
h1 159 135
h2

h2 96,5 81,5

d6
h3 62,5 53,5

Ød3

Perforaciones ELFP 3
según DIN 24557/parte 2

Tipo ELFP 5 SW 17

Ød1
h5
h3

1
Tipo ELFP 5G..2.X/.. ELFP 5G..3.X/... ELFP 5G..4.X/... ELFP 5G..5.X/...
h4

Ø d1 177 177 177 177

Ø d2 68 68 49,5 39,5
d3
G 2 1/2 G3 G2 G 1 1/2
d3
h1

ISO 228 ISO 228 ISO 228 ISO 228

h1 345 345 345 345

h2 240 240 240 240
h3 105 105 105 105
h4 25 25 25 25
h5 90 90 90 90
pos. 1 90 90 90 90
tamaño de la llave

Ød2 El elemento filtrante del filtro de aire es reemplazable

(ver código de pedido, pág. 3).
8/10 Bosch Rexroth AG Hydraulics ELF, BF, BL RS 50070/10.05

Dimensiones (medidas en mm)

Tipo ELFP 7 Tipo ELFP 7 2 6 tornillos verticales

con ranura
h4

Ød1 Ø d1 116 M5 x 16 DIN 963

b1
Ø d2 120 3 Manómetro como indicador
Ø d3 49 de ensuciamiento,
3 Ø d4 73
rango opcional de medición
h3

– 1 hasta + 0,6 bar

Ø d5 60
2 El elemento filtrante del filtro
d6 M5 de aire es reemplazable
h1

h1 181 (ver código de pedido, pág. 3).

h2 97
h3 84
h2

h4 60
b1 44

Ød3

d4
d5
ELFP 7.....

d6
d2

Perforaciones
según DIN 24557/parte 2

Tipo BFP 3 y BFP 4 Tipo BFP 3G..1.X/.. BFP 3G..2.X/... BFP 3G..3.X/... BFP 4G..1.X/...
Ød1
Ø d1 76 76 76 44
G 3/4 G 3/8 G 1/2 G 1/4
d2
ISO 228 ISO 228 ISO 228 ISO 228
Ø d3 19 12 15 8
h1

h1 79 72 76 62
h2 16 12 14 13,5
h2

1 pos. 1 36 22 27 17
Ød3
d2 tamaño de la llave

Tipo BFP 5 Tipo BFP 5G..1.X/...

SW 17
h2

Ø d1 177
Ød1
G 2 1/2
d2
ISO 228
h1 102
h1

El elemento filtrante del filtro de aire es

h2 90 reemplazable (ver código de pedido, pág. 3).

d2
RS 50070/10.05 ELF, BF, BL Hydraulics Bosch Rexroth AG 9/10

Dimensiones (medidas en mm)

Tipo BFP 7 Tipo BFP 7G..1.X/...

Ød1 Ø d1 116
h2

b1 G1
d2
ISO 228
Ø d3 120
h1 108
3 h2 60
h1

h3 18
b1 44
1 pos. 1 41
h3

tamaño de la llave
d2
1 Tamaño de la llave 41 mm
3 Manómetro como indicador de ensuciamiento,
rango opcional de medición – 1 hasta + 0,6 bar

El elemento filtrante del filtro de aire es reemplazable

(ver código de pedido, pág. 3).
BFP7.......
d3

Tipo BLP 162 F Tipo BLP 162 F

Ø d1 Ø d1 127
Ø d2 83
Ø d3 73
Ø d4 60
d5 M5
Ø d6 25 4 La junta no está incluida
h1 254 en el suministro
h2

h2 175 El elemento filtrante

h3 90 (cartucho) del filtro de
h1

aire es reemplazable
h4 2
(ver código de pedido, pág. 3).

d3
d4
d5
h4

Ø d6
4 Ø d2
Perforaciones según DIN 24557/T2
10/10 Bosch Rexroth AG Hydraulics ELF, BF, BL RS 50070/10.05

Dimensiones (medidas en mm)

Tipo BLP 162 S

Ø d1
Tipo BLP 162 S
Ø d1 127
Ø d2 43
Ø d3 25
Ø d4 41
h1 245
h2

h2 175 El elemento filtrante

h3 90 (cartucho) del filtro de aire
h1

es reemplazable (ver código

h4 6
de pedido, pág. 3).

Ø d4
h4

Ø d3
Ø d2

Bosch Rexroth AG © Todos los derechos de Bosch Rexroth AG, también para el caso de so-
Hydraulics licitudes de derechos protegidos. Nos reservamos todas las capacidades
Zum Eisengießer 1 dispositivas tales como derechos de copia y de tramitación.
97816 Lohr am Main, Germany Los datos indicados sirven sólo para describir el producto. De nuestras
Telefon +49 (0) 93 52 / 18-0 especificaciones no puede derivarse ninguna declaración sobre una cierta
Telefax +49 (0) 93 52 / 18-23 58 composición o idoneidad para un cierto fin de empleo. Las especificaciones
documentation@[Link] no liberan al usuario de las propias evaluaciones y verificaciones. Hay que
[Link] tener en cuenta que nuestros productos están sometidos a un proceso
natural de desgaste y envejecimiento.
Hägglunds DUe | Drive unit 45/62

4.3.4 Air breather 4.3.5 Tank bladder

DD00063128 DD00097427

Fig. 50: Air breather Fig. 52: Tank bladder

Function Function
The air breathing of the tank is via an air filter element to The separators (bladder) task is to prevent contamination
prevent contamination of the oil by particles in the air. to enter into the tank and contaminate the hydraulic fluid.
The breather filter consists of a housing which is screwed If the drive unit is operating in dusty environment it is
onto the oil tank and a built-in filter element. advisable to choose an air bladder combine with an air
relief valve for the tank air breathing.
Mechanical data
Table 60: Material, Air breather filter Mechanical data
Volume (Expanded): 6 l, 8 l, 15 l, 25 l.
Filter Standard For bladder
Filtration rating 3 μm (absolute)
Shape: Rectangular Standard.
Check/bypass valve: No Yes Δp at 0.2 bar Thread: 3/4˝ BSP Carbon Steel.
Clogging indicator No Material: Reinforced Polyurethane with coated thermo-
Temperature range -30 °C or +100 °C plastic sheet.
Material Hose Steel, zinc-plated/plastic coated
Filter element Paper fiber
Seal NBR (Nitrile)
Tread G3/4˝
Additional attributes Anti-splash device
Hydraulic fluids The standard models are suitable for
use with mineral and lubrication oils
according to ISO 2943
The filter elements are made from phenolic resin impregnated pa-
per and cannot therefore be cleaned

DD00097423

Fig. 51: Hydarulic symbol

RE 15325/04.2020, Bosch Rexroth AB

Pressure transducers
for hydraulic applications

RE 30272
Edition:2014-08
Type HM20 Replaces: 2013-11

▶▶ Component series 2X

H8002

Features Contents

▶▶ Measuring pressures in hydraulic systems Features 1

▶▶ 8 measurement ranges up to 630 bar Ordering code 2
▶▶ Sensor with thin film measuring cell Technical data 3, 4
▶▶ Components that are in contact with the media are Electrical connection 5
made of stainless steel Unit dimensions 5
▶▶ Operational safety due to high bursting pressure,
reversed polarity, overvoltage and short-circuit protection
▶▶ Accuracy class 0.5
▶▶ Excellent non-repeatability < 0.05 %
▶▶ Wide operating temperature range –40 ... +85 °C

Bosch Rexroth AG, RE 30272, Edition:2014-08

2/6 HM20-2X | Pressure transducer

Ordering code

01 02 03 04 05
HM20 – 2X / – – K35

01 Pressure transducer HM20

02 Component series 20 to 29 (20 to 29: unchanged installation dimensions and pin assignments) 2X

03 10 bar 10
50 bar 50
100 bar 100
160 bar 160
250 bar 250
315 bar 315
400 bar 400
630 bar 630

04 Current output 4 to 20 mA C
Voltage output 0.1 to 10 V H

05 Connector, 4-pole, M12 x 1 K35

Replacement seal ring Cable sets or mating connectors are not included in the
Designation Material no. scope of delivery; please order separately
Seal ring NBR R900012467

Cable sets and mating connectors

Technical data Unit dimensions (in mm) Designation Material no.
General 4PM12 (L = 2 m) R900773031
Current carrying capacity 4 A 4PM12 (L = 5 m) R900779498
Temperature range –25 ... +85 °C
Protection class IP 67 according to EN 60529
Cable sets, shielded
Cable diameter 5.9 mm
Jacket material PUR-OB
Line cross-section 4 x 0.34 mm2 4PM12 (L = 2 m) R900779504
Mating connectors 4PM12 (L = 5 m) R900779503

Cable diameter 4 to 6 mm
Line cross-section 4 x 0.75 mm2
Type of connection Screw connection

Connection diagram Socket contacts, 4PE11508 R900773042

Cable set View to the socket side

4PE11509 R900779509

Bosch Rexroth AG, RE 30272, Edition:2014-08

Pressure transducer | HM20-2X 3/6

Technical data

Input variables
Operating voltage US 16 … 36 VDC 1)
Residual ripple UPP 2.5 V (40 to 400 Hz)
Current consumption Imax ≤ 12 mA (with voltage output)
Protection class III
Isolation resistance R >100 MΩ (500 VDC)
Measurement range pN [bar] 10 50 100 160 250 315 400 630
Overload protection pmax [bar] 25 100 200 320 500 630 800 1000
Bursting pressure p [bar] 200 200 400 640 1000 1260 1600 2520
Output parameters
Output signal and admissible load RA ISig 4 … 20 mA
RA = (US – 8.5 V) / 0.0215 A with RA in Ω and US in V
USig 0.1 … 10 V, RA > 2 kΩ
Setting time (10 to 90 %) t < 1 ms
Accuracy (characteristic curve deviation) < related to the complete measurement range, including,
0.5 hysteresis, zero point and end value deviation
% (corresponds to the measuring deviation according to IEC 61298-2)
Temperature coefficient (TK) for zero point and range
– in the nominal temperature range < 0.1 % / 10 K
– outside the nominal temperature range < 0.2 % / 10 K
Hysteresis < 0.15 % 2)

Non-repeatability < 0.05 % 2)

Long-term drift (1 year) under reference conditions < 0.1 %

Protection class according to EN 60529 IP65/IP67 with mating connector correctly mounted and locked
Weight m 0.05 kg
Life cycle 60 million load cycles or 60000 h
Vibration load:
– Transport shock according to DIN EN 60068-2-27 15 g / 11 ms / 3 axes
– Sine test according to DIN EN 60068-2-6 10 ... 2000 Hz / maximum of 10 g / 10 cycles / 3 axes
– Noise test according to DIN EN 60068-2-64 20 ... 2000 Hz / 14 g RMS / 42 g peak / 24 h / 3 axes

1) With cULus: max. of 30 V DC is admissible 4) Recommendation: Use of shielded connection cable, see cable
2) related to nominal temperature range sets on page 2
3) maximum of 300 bar is admissible

RE 30272, Edition:2014-08, Bosch Rexroth AG

4/6 HM20-2X | Pressure transducer

Technical data

Electro-magnetic compatibility (EMC):

EN 61000-6:-2 / EN 61326-2-3
– EN 61000-4-2 ESD 4 kV CD / 8 kV AD with evaluation criterion B
– EN 61000-4-3 HF radiated 10 V/m (80 ... 2700 MHz) with evaluation criterion A
– EN 61000-4-4 burst 2 kV with evaluation criterion B
– EN 61000-4-5 surge 1 kV / 42 Ohm with evaluation criterion B
– EN 61000-4-6 HF cable-propagated 10 Veff (150 kHz ... 80 MHz) with evaluation criterion A
– EN 61000-4-8 magnetic field 50/60Hz 100 A/m with evaluation criterion A
– EN 61000-4-9 magnetic field pulsed 1000 A/m with evaluation criterion A
EN 61000-6:-3 / EN 61326-2-3
– EN 55016-2-1 interference voltage 0.15 ... 30 MHz, class A, EN 55022
– EN 55016-2-3 radio interference field strength 30 ... 1000 MHz, class B, EN 55022
Conformity CE as per EMC directive
Further tests cULus-listed

Bosch Rexroth AG, RE 30272, Edition:2014-08

Pressure transducer | HM20-2X 5/6

Electrical connection

4-pole M12 connector, view to connection side

Voltage Current (two-wire system)

Values for US, RA and USig, Values for US, RA and ISig,
see page 3 see page 3

Unit dimensions (dimensions in mm)

Ø18,8

M12x1

3
65,9

19
51,6

2
12

1 Pressure port G1/4 male thread

2 Seal ring
3 4-pole M12 connector
1 G1/4

RE 30272, Edition:2014-08, Bosch Rexroth AG

TF
Features
The TF mounting is installed in minutes by following the
instructions provided. There is no need to fix the machines
to the floor since the rubber base of the mounting keeps
the machine in place. Whenever necessary, the machine
can easily be re-positioned. The level is adjusted with load
applied.

The rubber element of the TF mounting is oil and chemi-

cal resistant. All metal parts are zincplated and chromated
for protection against corrosion.

Models TF 250, TF 600 and TF 1200, also available in

S/S (ISO 2604/11, BS 3605:1).

Novibra® type TF
Novibra® type TF with level adjuster is suitable for a wide
range of free standing workshop machines, e.g.
• Lathes
• Milling machines
• Grinding machines G
• Multiple operation machinery
• Presses
• Plate shears
• Nibbling machines
• Punches and cutters
• Woodworking machines
• Plastic moulding machinery H

Dimensions in mm Overall Thread Weight Max load

Type [Link]. D H min H max bolt length G (kg) (kg)
1)
TF 250 1860740 69 23 100 M 12 0.40 250
TF 250 s/s 2256520 69 23 1)
100 M 12 0.40 250
1)
TF 600 1860780 81 25 100 M 12 0.49 600
TF 600 s/s 2256530 81 25 1)
100 M 12 0.49 600
1)
TF 1200 1860790 108 29 100 M 16 1.0 1200
TF 1200 s/s 2256540 108 29 1)
100 M 16 1.0 1200
1)
TF 3000 1860800 151 35 120 M 20 2.2 3000
1)
TF 4000 1860810 170 39 120 M 20 2.9 4000
1)
TF 6000 1860820 205 44 150 M 24 4.8 6000

1) Levelling of the bolt up to its total length.

68 Trelleborg Industrial AVS operates a policy of continuous improvement and development. We reserve the right to change design an d specification of our products without prior notification or alteration of literature
TF
Loading range per mounting (kg)

Type of General work- Presses and punches

machinery
shop machines Numbers of strokes per minute
Mounting Max load (kg) 1– 125 126– 175 176– 225 226– 275
TF 250 250 25– 125 20– 100 15– 85 10– 60
TF 600 251– 600 126– 300 101– 240 86– 200 61– 150
TF 1200 601– 1200 301– 600 241– 480 201– 400 151– 300
TF 3000 1201– 3000 601– 2400 481– 1600 401– 1000 301– 750
TF 4000 3001– 4000 2401– 3200 1601– 2100 1001– 1300 751– 1000
TF 6000 4001– 6000 3201– 4800 2101– 3200 1301– 2000 1001– 1500

Mounting instructions

1 2 3

TFE

Mounting TFE is a simpler version of type TF without Both models also available in S/S
level adjuster. It is used for machines which do not require (ISO 2604/11,BS 3605:1 )
height adjustment or where such a feature is already pro-
vided, e.g. by an adjusting screw in the machine.

Dimensions in mm Weight Max load

Type [Link]. D H (kg) (kg)
TFE 601 1861050 80 25 0.375 800
TFE 1201 1861060 109 29 0.925 1600

Trelleborg Industrial AVS operates a policy of continuous improvement and development. We reserve the right to change design and specification of our products without prior notification or alteration of literature 69
Documentation for Spider II control system

Serial number: C02619

(Matched to Drive Unit R939070738, D02473)

Customer: PRAXA
Project: PBR-1198 Components for Belt
Tensioning Winch
Table of contents

1 Manual for control system

2 Specification for control system

3 Hardware settings

4 Additional components

5 Connection diagrams

6 Declaration of conformity

7 Parameter changes

8 Bus settings

10
Specification

Spider control system: Serial No: C02619

Main card material ID: R939055212 (276 0020-500)

Main card revision: R3C

Main card serial No: 8609-2009

Memory card material ID: R939003962

Memory card serial No: 8579

Software version: 5.0.5

Power supply unit: Material ID: R939003773

Card revision: D

Card serial No: 2008-8226

Supply voltage: 110 VAC

Spider control panel: Double door material ID: R939050089

Card material ID: R939057061

Card revision: R2A

Card serial No: 2006-1265

Software version: 0.02

Display material ID: R939066782 (OLED-display)

Note. Parameter settings that have been changed from

DEFAULT are shown in Parameter list at delivery.

Connection: As drawing HU6 0752 and HU6 0751 shows.

Hardware settings

Jumpers on Spider main card

Name Setting
SP D1 Lower (I)
SP D2 Lower (I)
AI 1 Lower (I)
AI 2 Lower (I)
AI 3 Lower (I)
AI 4 Lower (I)
AI 5 Lower (I)
AI 6 Lower (I)
AI 7 Lower (I)
AI 8 Lower (I)
AI 9 Lower (I)
P48 Right (Differential)
P49 Right (Differential)
P50 Right (Differential)
P51 Right (Differential)

Switches on Spider main card

Name Setting
SW1 0 (2 sec)
SW3-1 ON (LCD)
SW3-2 ON (D1 left, D2 right)

Switches on Spider control panel

card
Name Setting
SW1-1 ON (Standard)
Cables and connectors

Cables and connectors

Type* Cable material ID Connector material ID
Type 1 R901499099 R911339732
Type 2 R901499099 R911339732
Type 3 Not used Not used
Type 4 R901499099 R939004658
R911343815, angled
Type 5 R901499099
R913027473, straight
Type 6 R901499099 N/A

*Type according to drawing HU6 0751

Sensor boxes
Number of slots** Sensor box material ID
4 R987172681
8 R987257616

**In some tandem pump applications a M12 Y-distributor is used: R913020082

Additional components

Fieldbus card: Profibus-DP slave installed on Spider board.

Material ID: R939004771
Serial No: A04307D9
Software version: V2.06

Plexiglass window: Protective plexiglass window mounted on spider.

Material ID: Description
R939004865 Glass window
R939004866 Gas spring

In-Line fuse: In-Line fuse holder, with exchangeable ATO Fuse (blade
type fuse), mounted inside the Spider box.
Qty: Material ID: Description
2pc R939004816 In-Line Fuse holder, Little fuse
2pc R939004818 ATO Fuse 2A, Littlefuse

Emitter VpCl: Material ID: R978980579

Note! Life time after installation is 2 years, expiry date is shown on
the sticker beside the installed Emitter.
Emitter VpCI (Vapor phase Corrosion Inhibitor) is mounted inside the
Spider box to protect against oxidation. The Emitter (containing a
pulverous substance) emits a vapor that covers all components with a
protective layer when the air inside the enclosure is saturated.
Declaration of conformity
Parameter list at delivery (V5.0.x)
Note. ( * ) = not default value

1/23
Parameter list at delivery (V5.0.x)
Note. ( * ) = not default value
Printout time: 2020-05-25 [Link]
Printed by SpiderCom2 PRO version: 5.0.5 Build: 20
Parameter file name: pc02619.s2px
Parameter file version: 5
SpiderII software version: 5.0.5 5
SpiderII serial number: C02619

Main settings
Function
MAA01 - System function BASIC
MAA02 - Analog sample frequency 10
MAA03 - Processor overload limit 100 (*)
Configuration
MAB01 - E-motor connection for P01 E-motor 1
MAB02 - E-motor connection for P02 E-motor 1 (*)
MAB03 - E-motor connection for P03 off
MAB04 - E-motor connection for P04 off
MAB05 - Drive connection for P01 Drive 1
MAB06 - Drive connection for P02 Drive 2 (*)
MAB07 - Drive connection for P03 off
MAB08 - Drive connection for P04 off
MAB09 - Separate or common Separate
MAB10 - Shutdown ramp time 0
MAB11 - M. stop memory bypass off
MAB13 - Charge pump Drive 1 Internal
MAB14 - Charge pump Drive 2 Internal
MAB15 - Function at CAN com. drop Interlock
Language
MAC01 - Display language selection Spanish (*)
Protection
MAD01 - Security code - setup menu no
MAD02 - Security code CODE

Pump outputs
Pump 1
POA01 - Forward min current 256 (*)
POA02 - Forward max current 750 (*)
POA03 - Reverse min current 260 (*)
POA04 - Reverse max current 745 (*)
POA05 - Coil resistance 20 (*)
POA06 - PWM frequency 100 (*)
POA07 - Dither amplitude 200
POA08 - Dither frequency 200
Pump 2
POB01 - Forward min current 0
POB02 - Forward max current 0
POB03 - Reverse min current 0
POB04 - Reverse max current 0
POB05 - Coil resistance 40
POB06 - PWM frequency 200
POB07 - Dither amplitude 200
POB08 - Dither frequency 200
Pump 3
POC01 - Forward min current 0
POC02 - Forward max current 0
POC03 - Reverse min current 0
POC04 - Reverse max current 0
POC05 - Coil resistance 40
POC06 - PWM frequency 200
POC07 - Dither amplitude 200
POC08 - Dither frequency 200
Pump 4
POD01 - Forward min current 0
POD02 - Forward max current 0
POD03 - Reverse min current 0
POD04 - Reverse max current 0
POD05 - Coil resistance 40
POD06 - PWM frequency 200
POD07 - Dither amplitude 200
POD08 - Dither frequency 200
2/23
Parameter list at delivery (V5.0.x)
Note. ( * ) = not default value
Friction
POE01 - Pump friction Off
POE02 - Pump low friction limit 0
POE03 - Pump high friction limit 200
POE04 - Friction up ramp time 2.0
POE05 - Friction down ramp time 2.0
Ramp
POF01 - Pump up ramp time 2.0
POF02 - Pump down ramp time 2.0

Digital inputs
Digital in 1 - 22
DIN01 - Digital input 1, DI1:3 21 MEM 01 (*)
DIN02 - Digital input 2, DI1:4 06 DF1 100 (*)
DIN03 - Digital input 3, DI1:5 05 SUCTION1 (*)
DIN04 - Digital input 4, DI1:6 off (*)
DIN05 - Digital input 5, DI1:7 off (*)
DIN06 - Digital input 6, DI1:8 off (*)
DIN07 - Digital input 7, DI2:4 19 EMOTOR 1 (*)
DIN08 - Digital input 8, DI2:5 21 MEM 02 (*)
DIN09 - Digital input 9, DI2:6 06 RF100 P1 (*)
DIN10 - Digital input 10, DI2:7 off (*)
DIN11 - Digital input 11, DI2:8 off (*)
DIN12 - Digital input 12, DI2:9 off (*)
DIN13 - Digital input 13, DI2:10 off (*)
DIN14 - Digital input 14, DI2:11 off (*)
DIN15 - Digital input 15, DI2:12 off
DIN16 - Digital input 16, DI3:4 off (*)
DIN17 - Digital input 17, DI3:5 off (*)
DIN18 - Digital input 18, DI3:6 off (*)
DIN19 - Digital input 19, DI3:7 off (*)
DIN20 - Digital input 20, DI3:8 off (*)
DIN21 - Digital input 21, DI3:9 off (*)
DIN22 - Digital input 22, DI3:10 off (*)
Digital in 23 - 43
DIN23 - Digital input 23, DI3:11 off (*)
DIN24 - Digital input 24, DI3:12 off
DIN25 - Digital input 25, DI4:4 off
DIN26 - Digital input 26, DI4:5 off
DIN27 - Digital input 27, DI4:6 off
DIN28 - Digital input 28, DI4:7 off
DIN29 - Digital input 29, DI4:8 off
DIN30 - Digital input 30, DI4:9 off
DIN31 - Digital input 31, DI4:10 off
DIN32 - Digital input 32, DI4:11 off
DIN33 - Digital input 33, DI4:12 off
DIN34 - Digital input 34, DI5:3 14 START 1 (*)
DIN35 - Digital input 35, DI5:4 14 START 2 (*)
DIN36 - Digital input 36, DI5:5 off
DIN37 - Digital input 37, DI5:6 off
DIN38 - Digital input 38, DI5:7 off
DIN39 - Digital input 39, DI5:8 off
DIN40 - Digital input 40, DI5:9 off
DIN41 - Digital input 41, DI5:10 off
DIN42 - Digital input 42, DI5:11 off
DIN43 - Digital input 43, DI5:12 off

Digital outputs
Digital out 1
DOA01 - Digital output function 11 COOLCONI (*)
DOA02 - Inverted function no
DOA03 - Delay time for digital output 5.0
DOA04 - Delay function for output NO
DOA05 - Connected for lamptest no
Digital out 2
DOB01 - Digital output function 11 HEAT CON (*)
DOB02 - Inverted function no
DOB03 - Delay time for digital output 5.0
DOB04 - Delay function for output NO
DOB05 - Connected for lamptest no
3/23
Parameter list at delivery (V5.0.x)
Note. ( * ) = not default value
Digital out 3
DOC01 - Digital output function off
DOC02 - Inverted function no
DOC03 - Delay time for digital output 5.0
DOC04 - Delay function for output NO
DOC05 - Connected for lamptest no
Digital out 4
DOD01 - Digital output function off
DOD02 - Inverted function no
DOD03 - Delay time for digital output 5.0
DOD04 - Delay function for output NO
DOD05 - Connected for lamptest no
Digital out 5
DOE01 - Digital output function 16 BDIN 7 (*)
DOE02 - Inverted function no
DOE03 - Delay time for digital output 5.0
DOE04 - Delay function for output NO
DOE05 - Connected for lamptest no
Digital out 6
DOF01 - Digital output function off
DOF02 - Inverted function no
DOF03 - Delay time for digital output 5.0
DOF04 - Delay function for output NO
DOF05 - Connected for lamptest no
Digital out 7
DOG01 - Digital output function 01 A1 (*)
DOG02 - Inverted function no
DOG03 - Delay time for digital output 5.0
DOG04 - Delay function for output NO
DOG05 - Connected for lamptest no
Digital out 8
DOH01 - Digital output function 01 W1 (*)
DOH02 - Inverted function no
DOH03 - Delay time for digital output 5.0
DOH04 - Delay function for output NO
DOH05 - Connected for lamptest no
Digital out 9
DOI01 - Digital output function 03 READY 1 (*)
DOI02 - Inverted function no
DOI03 - Delay time for digital output 5.0
DOI04 - Delay function for output NO
DOI05 - Connected for lamptest no
Digital out 10
DOJ01 - Digital output function 02 START 1 (*)
DOJ02 - Inverted function no
DOJ03 - Delay time for digital output 5.0
DOJ04 - Delay function for output NO
DOJ05 - Connected for lamptest no
Digital out 11
DOK01 - Digital output function off
DOK02 - Inverted function no
DOK03 - Delay time for digital output 5.0
DOK04 - Delay function for output NO
DOK05 - Connected for lamptest no
Digital out 12
DOL01 - Digital output function off
DOL02 - Inverted function no
DOL03 - Delay time for digital output 5.0
DOL04 - Delay function for output NO
DOL05 - Connected for lamptest no
Digital out 13
DOM01 - Digital output function off
DOM02 - Inverted function no
DOM03 - Delay time for digital output 5.0
DOM04 - Delay function for output NO
DOM05 - Connected for lamptest no

Pulse inputs
Selection
P0I01 - Drive 1 pulse input DE1
4/23
Parameter list at delivery (V5.0.x)
Note. ( * ) = not default value
P0I02 - Drive 2 pulse input DE2
Drive 1
P1I01 - Pulses/rev 2500 (*)
P1I02 - Units for REG109 rpm
P1I03 - Decimals for REG109 1 (*)
P1I04 - Scaling for REG109 1.00
P1I05 - Filter time for speed reading 0.0
P1I06 - Polarity - digital speed signal 1
P1I07 - Encoder type 1
P1I08 - High indication level (rpm) 0.0
P1I09 - Low indication level (rpm) 0.0
P1I10 - Function for high indication off
P1I11 - Function for low indication off
Drive 2
P2I01 - Pulses/rev 1000
P2I02 - Units for REG209 rpm
P2I03 - Decimals for REG209 0
P2I04 - Scaling for REG209 1.00
P2I05 - Filter time for speed reading 0.0
P2I06 - Polarity - digital speed signal 1
P2I07 - Encoder type 1
P2I08 - High indication level (rpm) 0.0
P2I09 - Low indication level (rpm) 0.0
P2I10 - Function for high indication off
P2I11 - Function for low indication off

Analog inputs
Setpoint 1
AIA01 - Input type 4-20 mA
AIA02 - Zero point adjustment 2 (*)
AIA03 - Max point adjustment -6 (*)
AIA04 - Reading for REG101 %
AIA05 - Input scaling 1.00
Setpoint 2
AIB01 - Input type 4-20 mA
AIB02 - Zero point adjustment 1 (*)
AIB03 - Max point adjustment -7 (*)
AIB04 - Reading for REG201 %
AIB05 - Input scaling 1.00
Analog in 1
AIF01 - Input type 4-20 mA
AIF02 - Zero point adjustment 0
AIF03 - Max point adjustment 0
AIF04 - Min input, REG401 0
AIF05 - Max input, REG401 200
AIF06 - Units for REG401 bar
AIF07 - Decimals for REG401 0
AIF08 - Scaling for REG401 1.00
AIF09 - Function for input off
AIF10 - High indication level 200
AIF11 - Low indication level 0
AIF12 - Function for min indication off
AIF13 - Function for high indication off
AIF14 - Function for low indication off
AIF15 - Filter time reading 0.0
AIF16 - Filter time signal 0.00
Analog in 2
AIG01 - Input type 4-20 mA
AIG02 - Zero point adjustment 0
AIG03 - Max point adjustment 0
AIG04 - Min input, REG402 0
AIG05 - Max input, REG402 200
AIG06 - Units for REG402 bar
AIG07 - Decimals for REG402 0
AIG08 - Scaling for REG402 1.00
AIG09 - Function for input off
AIG10 - High indication level 200
AIG11 - Low indication level 0
AIG12 - Function for min indication off
AIG13 - Function for high indication off
5/23
Parameter list at delivery (V5.0.x)
Note. ( * ) = not default value
AIG14 - Function for low indication off
AIG15 - Filter time reading 0.0
AIG16 - Filter time signal 0.00
Analog in 3
AIH01 - Input type 4-20 mA
AIH02 - Zero point adjustment 1 (*)
AIH03 - Max point adjustment -1 (*)
AIH04 - Min input, REG403 0
AIH05 - Max input, REG403 250 (*)
AIH06 - Units for REG403 bar
AIH07 - Decimals for REG403 0
AIH08 - Scaling for REG403 1.00
AIH09 - Function for input off
AIH10 - High indication level 50 (*)
AIH11 - Low indication level 0
AIH12 - Function for min indication AUX 3 (*)
AIH13 - Function for high indication off
AIH14 - Function for low indication off
AIH15 - Filter time reading 0.0
AIH16 - Filter time signal 0.00
Analog in 4
AII01 - Input type 4-20 mA
AII02 - Zero point adjustment 1 (*)
AII03 - Max point adjustment -1 (*)
AII04 - Min input, REG404 0
AII05 - Max input, REG404 250 (*)
AII06 - Units for REG404 bar
AII07 - Decimals for REG404 0
AII08 - Scaling for REG404 1.00
AII09 - Function for input off
AII10 - High indication level 50 (*)
AII11 - Low indication level 15 (*)
AII12 - Function for min indication AUX 4 (*)
AII13 - Function for high indication off
AII14 - Function for low indication 13 AUX 14 (*)
AII15 - Filter time reading 0.0
AII16 - Filter time signal 0.00
Analog in 5
AIJ01 - Input type 4-20 mA
AIJ02 - Zero point adjustment 1 (*)
AIJ03 - Max point adjustment -1 (*)
AIJ04 - Min input, REG405 0
AIJ05 - Max input, REG405 350 (*)
AIJ06 - Units for REG405 bar
AIJ07 - Decimals for REG405 0
AIJ08 - Scaling for REG405 1.00
AIJ09 - Function for input AS2 (*)
AIJ10 - High indication level 200 (*)
AIJ11 - Low indication level 0
AIJ12 - Function for min indication AUX 5 (*)
AIJ13 - Function for high indication off
AIJ14 - Function for low indication off
AIJ15 - Filter time reading 0.0
AIJ16 - Filter time signal 0.00
Analog in 6
AIK01 - Input type 4-20 mA
AIK02 - Zero point adjustment 1 (*)
AIK03 - Max point adjustment -1 (*)
AIK04 - Min input, REG406 0
AIK05 - Max input, REG406 400 (*)
AIK06 - Units for REG406 bar
AIK07 - Decimals for REG406 0
AIK08 - Scaling for REG406 1.00
AIK09 - Function for input off
AIK10 - High indication level 200 (*)
AIK11 - Low indication level 0
AIK12 - Function for min indication AUX 6 (*)
AIK13 - Function for high indication off
AIK14 - Function for low indication off
AIK15 - Filter time reading 0.0
6/23
Parameter list at delivery (V5.0.x)
Note. ( * ) = not default value
AIK16 - Filter time signal 0.00
Analog in 7
AIL01 - Input type 4-20 mA
AIL02 - Zero point adjustment 1 (*)
AIL03 - Max point adjustment 0
AIL04 - Min input, REG407 0
AIL05 - Max input, REG407 250 (*)
AIL06 - Units for REG407 bar
AIL07 - Decimals for REG407 0
AIL08 - Scaling for REG407 1.00
AIL09 - Function for input off
AIL10 - High indication level 50 (*)
AIL11 - Low indication level 8 (*)
AIL12 - Function for min indication AUX 7 (*)
AIL13 - Function for high indication off
AIL14 - Function for low indication 03 C PRB P1 (*)
AIL15 - Filter time reading 0.0
AIL16 - Filter time signal 0.00
Analog in 8
AIM01 - Input type 4-20 mA
AIM02 - Zero point adjustment 0
AIM03 - Max point adjustment 2 (*)
AIM04 - Min input, REG408 0
AIM05 - Max input, REG408 100 (*)
AIM06 - Units for REG408 °C (*)
AIM07 - Decimals for REG408 0
AIM08 - Scaling for REG408 1.00
AIM09 - Function for input TANK A (*)
AIM10 - High indication level 100
AIM11 - Low indication level 0
AIM12 - Function for min indication AUX 8 (*)
AIM13 - Function for high indication off
AIM14 - Function for low indication off
AIM15 - Filter time reading 0.0
AIM16 - Filter time signal 0.00
Analog in 9
AIN01 - Input type 4-20 mA
AIN02 - Zero point adjustment 1 (*)
AIN03 - Max point adjustment 2 (*)
AIN04 - Min input, REG409 58 (*)
AIN05 - Max input, REG409 142 (*)
AIN06 - Units for REG409 l (*)
AIN07 - Decimals for REG409 0
AIN08 - Scaling for REG409 1.00
AIN09 - Function for input LEVEL A (*)
AIN10 - High indication level 142
AIN11 - Low indication level 58
AIN12 - Function for min indication AUX 9 (*)
AIN13 - Function for high indication off
AIN14 - Function for low indication off
AIN15 - Filter time reading 0.0
AIN16 - Filter time signal 0.00
Tank temp
AIP01 - Zero point adjustment 0
AIP02 - Max point adjustment 0
AIP03 - Units for REG410 °C
Power limit
AIR01 - Limitation level E-motor 1 400
AIR02 - Limitation level E-motor 2 400
AIR03 - Limitation level E-motor 3 400

Analog outputs
Analog out 1
AOA01 - Analog output REG406 (*)
AOA02 - 4-20mA or 2-10V output on
AOA03 - Zero point adjustment 5 (*)
AOA04 - Max point adjustment -8 (*)
Analog out 2
AOB01 - Analog output REG408 (*)
AOB02 - 4-20mA or 2-10V output on
7/23
Parameter list at delivery (V5.0.x)
Note. ( * ) = not default value
AOB03 - Zero point adjustment 3 (*)
AOB04 - Max point adjustment -5 (*)
Analog out 3
AOC01 - Analog output REG206 (*)
AOC02 - 4-20mA or 2-10V output on
AOC03 - Zero point adjustment -8 (*)
AOC04 - Max point adjustment -20 (*)
Analog out 4
AOD01 - Analog output off
AOD02 - 4-20mA or 2-10V output on
AOD03 - Zero point adjustment -1 (*)
AOD04 - Max point adjustment -13 (*)

Bus
Type && Function
BTF01 - Type of bus communication Profibus (*)
BTF02 - Max com. drop time 1
BTF03 - Function at com. drop Interlock
BTF04 - Bus data area Ver.3
BTF05 - Analog byte switching off
BTF06 - Max bus start up time 10 (*)
Digital in 1-24
BDI01 - Digital input 1 09 BUS 1
BDI02 - Digital input 2 16 REM 1
BDI03 - Digital input 3 14 START 1
BDI04 - Digital input 4 18 REG 1 (*)
BDI05 - Digital input 5 15 FIXED 1B
BDI06 - Digital input 6 15 FIXED 1A (*)
BDI07 - Digital input 7 off/used (*)
BDI08 - Digital input 8 off
BDI09 - Digital input 9 09 BUS 2
BDI10 - Digital input 10 16 REM 2
BDI11 - Digital input 11 14 START 2
BDI12 - Digital input 12 18 REG 2 (*)
BDI13 - Digital input 13 off (*)
BDI14 - Digital input 14 off
BDI15 - Digital input 15 off
BDI16 - Digital input 16 off
BDI17 - Digital input 17 09 BUS R
BDI18 - Digital input 18 09 ALARM R
BDI19 - Digital input 19 13 AUX 11 (*)
BDI20 - Digital input 20 off
BDI21 - Digital input 21 09 EMSTOP (*)
BDI22 - Digital input 22 off
BDI23 - Digital input 23 off
BDI24 - Digital input 24 off
Digital in 25-32
BDI25 - Digital input 25 off
BDI26 - Digital input 26 off
BDI27 - Digital input 27 off
BDI28 - Digital input 28 off
BDI29 - Digital input 29 off
BDI30 - Digital input 30 off
BDI31 - Digital input 31 off
BDI32 - Digital input 32 off
Analog in 1
BAA01 - Min input, REG501 0
BAA02 - Max input, REG501 200
BAA03 - Units for REG501 %
BAA04 - Decimals for REG501 0
BAA05 - Function for input off
BAA06 - High indication level 200
BAA07 - Low indication level 0
BAA08 - Function for high indication off
BAA09 - Function for low indication off
Analog in 2
BAB01 - Min input, REG502 0
BAB02 - Max input, REG502 200
BAB03 - Units for REG502 %
BAB04 - Decimals for REG502 0
8/23
Parameter list at delivery (V5.0.x)
Note. ( * ) = not default value
BAB05 - Function for input off
BAB06 - High indication level 200
BAB07 - Low indication level 0
BAB08 - Function for high indication off
BAB09 - Function for low indication off
Analog in 3
BAC01 - Min input, REG503 0
BAC02 - Max input, REG503 200
BAC03 - Units for REG503 °
BAC04 - Decimals for REG503 0
BAC05 - Function for input off
BAC06 - High indication level 200
BAC07 - Low indication level 0
BAC08 - Function for high indication off
BAC09 - Function for low indication off
Analog in 4
BAD01 - Min input, REG504 0
BAD02 - Max input, REG504 200
BAD03 - Units for REG504 bar
BAD04 - Decimals for REG504 0
BAD05 - Function for input off
BAD06 - High indication level 200
BAD07 - Low indication level 0
BAD08 - Function for high indication off
BAD09 - Function for low indication off
Analog in 5
BAE01 - Min input, REG505 0
BAE02 - Max input, REG505 200
BAE03 - Units for REG505 bar
BAE04 - Decimals for REG505 0
BAE05 - Function for input off
BAE06 - High indication level 200
BAE07 - Low indication level 0
BAE08 - Function for high indication off
BAE09 - Function for low indication off
Analog in 6
BAF01 - Min input, REG506 0
BAF02 - Max input, REG506 200
BAF03 - Units for REG506 bar
BAF04 - Decimals for REG506 0
BAF05 - Function for input off
BAF06 - High indication level 200
BAF07 - Low indication level 0
BAF08 - Function for high indication off
BAF09 - Function for low indication off
Analog in 7
BAG01 - Min input, REG507 0
BAG02 - Max input, REG507 200
BAG03 - Units for REG507 bar
BAG04 - Decimals for REG507 0
BAG05 - Function for input off
BAG06 - High indication level 200
BAG07 - Low indication level 0
BAG08 - Function for high indication off
BAG09 - Function for low indication off
Analog in 8
BAH01 - Min input, REG508 0
BAH02 - Max input, REG508 200
BAH03 - Units for REG508 bar
BAH04 - Decimals for REG508 0
BAH05 - Function for input off
BAH06 - High indication level 200
BAH07 - Low indication level 0
BAH08 - Function for high indication off
BAH09 - Function for low indication off
Analog in 9
BAI01 - Min input, REG509 0
BAI02 - Max input, REG509 200
BAI03 - Units for REG509 bar
BAI04 - Decimals for REG509 0
9/23
Parameter list at delivery (V5.0.x)
Note. ( * ) = not default value
BAI05 - Function for input off
BAI06 - High indication level 200
BAI07 - Low indication level 0
BAI08 - Function for high indication off
BAI09 - Function for low indication off
Analog in 10
BAJ01 - Min input, REG510 0
BAJ02 - Max input, REG510 200
BAJ03 - Units for REG510 bar
BAJ04 - Decimals for REG510 0
BAJ05 - Function for input off
BAJ06 - High indication level 200
BAJ07 - Low indication level 0
BAJ08 - Function for high indication off
BAJ09 - Function for low indication off
Analog out
BAK01 - Analog output register REG409 (*)
BAK02 - Analog output register REG408 (*)
BAK03 - Analog output register REG407 (*)
BAK04 - Analog output register REG406 (*)
BAK05 - Analog output register REG405 (*)
BAK06 - Analog output register REG404 (*)
BAK07 - Analog output register REG403 (*)
BAK08 - Analog output register off
BAK09 - Analog output register off
BAK10 - Analog output register off
BAK11 - Analog output register REG109 (*)
BAK12 - Analog output register off

Pump monitor
Pump 1
PMA01 - Charge pr. interlock delay 5 sec
PMA02 - Delay, Charge pr. A 0.5 sec
PMA03 - Delay, Charge pr. B 0.5 sec
PMA04 - Delay, Suction line 0.0 sec
PMA05 - Delay, Return filter 75% 7.0 sec
PMA06 - Delay, Return filter 100% 7.0 sec
PMA07 - Return filter alarm off
PMA08 - Delay, High work pr. A 7.0 sec
PMA09 - Mem bypass, work pr. A off
PMA10 - Delay, High work pr. B 7.0 sec
PMA11 - Mem bypass, work pr. B off
PMA12 - Signal plausibility check on
PMA13 - Error limits between in/out 50
PMA14 - Analog pressure sensor on (*)
PMA15 - Delay, Charge filter 75% 7.0 sec
PMA16 - Delay, Charge filter 100% 7.0 sec
PMA17 - Charge filter alarm off
Pump 2
PMB01 - Charge pr. interlock delay 5 sec
PMB02 - Delay, Charge pr. A 0.5 sec
PMB03 - Delay, Charge pr. B 0.5 sec
PMB04 - Delay, Suction line 0.0 sec
PMB05 - Delay, Return filter 75% 7.0 sec
PMB06 - Delay, Return filter 100% 7.0 sec
PMB07 - Return filter alarm off
PMB08 - Delay, High work pr. A 7.0 sec
PMB09 - Mem bypass, work pr. A off
PMB10 - Delay, High work pr. B 7.0 sec
PMB11 - Mem bypass, work pr. B off
PMB12 - Signal plausibility check on
PMB13 - Error limits between in/out 50
PMB14 - Analog pressure sensor off
PMB15 - Delay, Charge filter 75% 7.0 sec
PMB16 - Delay, Charge filter 100% 7.0 sec
PMB17 - Charge filter alarm off
Pump 3
PMC01 - Charge pr. interlock delay 5 sec
PMC02 - Delay, Charge pr. A 0.5 sec
PMC03 - Delay, Charge pr. B 0.5 sec
10/23
Parameter list at delivery (V5.0.x)
Note. ( * ) = not default value
PMC04 - Delay, Suction line 0.0 sec
PMC05 - Delay, Return filter 75% 7.0 sec
PMC06 - Delay, Return filter 100% 7.0 sec
PMC07 - Return filter alarm off
PMC08 - Delay, High work pr. A 7.0 sec
PMC09 - Mem bypass, work pr. A off
PMC10 - Delay, High work pr. B 7.0 sec
PMC11 - Mem bypass, work pr. B off
PMC12 - Signal plausibility check on
PMC13 - Error limits between in/out 50
PMC14 - Analog pressure sensor off
PMC15 - Delay, Charge filter 75% 7.0 sec
PMC16 - Delay, Charge filter 100% 7.0 sec
PMC17 - Charge filter alarm off
Pump 4
PMD01 - Charge pr. interlock delay 5 sec
PMD02 - Delay, Charge pr. A 0.5 sec
PMD03 - Delay, Charge pr. B 0.5 sec
PMD04 - Delay, Suction line 0.0 sec
PMD05 - Delay, Return filter 75% 7.0 sec
PMD06 - Delay, Return filter 100% 7.0 sec
PMD07 - Return filter alarm off
PMD08 - Delay, High work pr. A 7.0 sec
PMD09 - Mem bypass, work pr. A off
PMD10 - Delay, High work pr. B 7.0 sec
PMD11 - Mem bypass, work pr. B off
PMD12 - Signal plausibility check on
PMD13 - Error limits between in/out 50
PMD14 - Analog pressure sensor off
PMD15 - Delay, Charge filter 75% 7.0 sec
PMD16 - Delay, Charge filter 100% 7.0 sec
PMD17 - Charge filter alarm off

Tank monitor
Digital
TMA01 - Delay, Low oil level warn. 0.0 sec
TMA02 - Delay, Min oil level alarm 0.0 sec
TMA03 - Delay, Min temp alarm 0.0 sec
TMA04 - Delay, High temp warn. 0.0 sec
TMA05 - Delay, Max temp alarm 0.5 sec
TMA06 - Delay, Drain1 75% warn. 7.0 sec
TMA07 - Delay, Drain1 100% warn. 7.0 sec
TMA08 - Drain filter1 alarm off
TMA09 - Min oil temp function A
TMA10 - Delay, Aux filter 75% warn. 7.0 sec
TMA11 - Delay, Aux filter 100% warn. 7.0 sec
TMA12 - Aux filter alarm off
TMA13 - Delay, Drain2 75% warn. 7.0 sec
TMA14 - Delay, Drain2 100% warn. 7.0 sec
TMA15 - Drain filter2 alarm off
Analog temp
TMB01 - Analog temp sensor on
TMB03 - Max oil temp alarm level 63
TMB04 - High oil temp warning level 55
TMB05 - Cooling temp on level (rise) 40
TMB06 - Cooling hysteresis 3
TMB07 - Filter interlock temp level 0
TMB08 - Heating temp on level (fall) 15
TMB09 - Heating hysteresis 3
TMB10 - Min oil temp alarm level 10
TMB11 - Warm flush on level (falling) 30
TMB12 - Flushing hysteresis 3
TMB13 - Min Aux pump temp 0
TMB14 - Warm flush on level (rising) 10
TMB15 - Flushing hysteresis 3
TMB16 - Warm flush on delay 2.0
TMB17 - Cooler forward time 12
TMB18 - Cooler reverse time 10
TMB19 - Cooler motor on delay 10.0
TMB20 - Cooler rev. at e-motor start on
11/23
Parameter list at delivery (V5.0.x)
Note. ( * ) = not default value
TMB21 - Oil temp interlock level 60
Analog level
TMC01 - Analog level sensor on (*)
TMC03 - Min oil alarm level 100 (*)
TMC04 - Low oil warning level 109 (*)
TMC05 - Full indication level 120 (*)
TMC06 - Max oil warning level 128 (*)
TMC07 - Delay, Max oil level 0.0 sec

Aux monitor
Aux 1
AMA01 - Aux function W D1
AMA02 - Aux delay time 1.0
AMA03 - Aux memory bypass off
AMA04 - Aux configurable text AUX 1
AMA05 - Aux inverted input off
Aux 2
AMB01 - Aux function W D1
AMB02 - Aux delay time 1.0
AMB03 - Aux memory bypass off
AMB04 - Aux configurable text AUX 2
AMB05 - Aux inverted input off
Aux 3
AMC01 - Aux function W D1
AMC02 - Aux delay time 1.0
AMC03 - Aux memory bypass off
AMC04 - Aux configurable text BRAKE SENSOR FAULT (*)
AMC05 - Aux inverted input off
Aux 4
AMD01 - Aux function W D1
AMD02 - Aux delay time 1.0
AMD03 - Aux memory bypass off
AMD04 - Aux configurable text [Link] [Link] (*)
AMD05 - Aux inverted input off
Aux 5
AME01 - Aux function W D1
AME02 - Aux delay time 1.0
AME03 - Aux memory bypass off
AME04 - Aux configurable text [Link] (*)
AME05 - Aux inverted input off
Aux 6
AMF01 - Aux function W D1
AMF02 - Aux delay time 1.0
AMF03 - Aux memory bypass off
AMF04 - Aux configurable text PRES. SENS. P1 FAULT (*)
AMF05 - Aux inverted input off
Aux 7
AMG01 - Aux function W D1
AMG02 - Aux delay time 1.0
AMG03 - Aux memory bypass off
AMG04 - Aux configurable text [Link] SENS. P1 FAULT (*)
AMG05 - Aux inverted input off
Aux 8
AMH01 - Aux function W D1
AMH02 - Aux delay time 1.0
AMH03 - Aux memory bypass off
AMH04 - Aux configurable text OIL TMP SENSOR FAULT (*)
AMH05 - Aux inverted input off
Aux 9
AMI01 - Aux function W D1
AMI02 - Aux delay time 1.0
AMI03 - Aux memory bypass off
AMI04 - Aux configurable text OIL LVL SENSOR FAULT (*)
AMI05 - Aux inverted input off
Aux 10
AMJ01 - Aux function W D1
AMJ02 - Aux delay time 1.0
AMJ03 - Aux memory bypass off
AMJ04 - Aux configurable text AUX 10
AMJ05 - Aux inverted input off
12/23
Parameter list at delivery (V5.0.x)
Note. ( * ) = not default value
Aux 11
AMK01 - Aux function off (*)
AMK02 - Aux delay time 0.0 (*)
AMK03 - Aux memory bypass on (*)
AMK04 - Aux configurable text DCS WATCHDOG (*)
AMK05 - Aux inverted input off
Aux 12
AML01 - Aux function W D1
AML02 - Aux delay time 1.0
AML03 - Aux memory bypass off
AML04 - Aux configurable text AUX 12
AML05 - Aux inverted input off
Aux 13
AMM01 - Aux function W D1
AMM02 - Aux delay time 1.0
AMM03 - Aux memory bypass off
AMM04 - Aux configurable text AUX 13
AMM05 - Aux inverted input off
Aux 14
AMN01 - Aux function A D1 (*)
AMN02 - Aux delay time 1.0
AMN03 - Aux memory bypass off
AMN04 - Aux configurable text LOW [Link] (*)
AMN05 - Aux inverted input off
Aux 15
AMO01 - Aux function W D1
AMO02 - Aux delay time 1.0
AMO03 - Aux memory bypass off
AMO04 - Aux configurable text AUX 15
AMO05 - Aux inverted input off
Aux 16
AMP01 - Aux function W D1
AMP02 - Aux delay time 1.0
AMP03 - Aux memory bypass off
AMP04 - Aux configurable text AUX 16
AMP05 - Aux inverted input off
Aux 17
AMQ01 - Aux function W D1
AMQ02 - Aux delay time 1.0
AMQ03 - Aux memory bypass off
AMQ04 - Aux configurable text AUX 17
AMQ05 - Aux inverted input off
AMQ06 - Aux function 2 off
AMQ07 - Aux delay time 2 off
AMQ08 - Aux configurable text 2 AUX 17 A
Aux 18
AMR01 - Aux function W D1
AMR02 - Aux delay time 1.0
AMR03 - Aux memory bypass off
AMR04 - Aux configurable text AUX 18
AMR05 - Aux inverted input off
AMR06 - Aux function 2 off
AMR07 - Aux delay time 2 off
AMR08 - Aux configurable text 2 AUX 18 A
Aux 19
AMS01 - Aux function W D1
AMS02 - Aux delay time 1.0
AMS03 - Aux memory bypass off
AMS04 - Aux configurable text AUX 19
AMS05 - Aux inverted input off
AMS06 - Aux function 2 off
AMS07 - Aux delay time 2 off
AMS08 - Aux configurable text 2 AUX 19 A
Aux 20
AMT01 - Aux function W D1
AMT02 - Aux delay time 1.0
AMT03 - Aux memory bypass off
AMT04 - Aux configurable text AUX 20
AMT05 - Aux inverted input off
AMT06 - Aux function 2 off
13/23
Parameter list at delivery (V5.0.x)
Note. ( * ) = not default value
AMT07 - Aux delay time 2 off
AMT08 - Aux configurable text 2 AUX 20 A

Drive monitor
Start interlock
DMA01 - Start alternative, drive 1 and
DMA02 - Start delay time, drive 1 5 sec
DMA03 - Start alternative, drive 2 and
DMA04 - Start delay time, drive 2 5 sec
Drive 1
DMB01 - Delay, charge pressure A 0.5 sec
DMB02 - Delay, charge pressure B 0.5 sec
DMB03 - Delay, E-motor temp 0.0 sec
DMB04 - Delay, work pressure A 7.0 sec
DMB05 - Mem bypass, work pr. A off
DMB06 - Delay, work pressure B 7.0 sec
DMB07 - Mem bypass, work pr. B off
DMB08 - Analog pressure sensor off
Drive 2
DMC01 - Delay, charge pressure A 0.5 sec
DMC02 - Delay, charge pressure B 0.5 sec
DMC03 - Delay, E-motor temp 0.0 sec
DMC04 - Delay, work pressure A 7.0 sec
DMC05 - Mem bypass, work pr. A off
DMC06 - Delay, work pressure B 7.0 sec
DMC07 - Mem bypass, work pr. B off
DMC08 - Analog pressure sensor off
Emotor interlock
DMD01 - Delay, Interlock E-motor 1 1.5
DMD02 - Delay, Interlock E-motor 2 1.5
DMD03 - Delay, Interlock E-motor 3 1.5
DMD04 - Delay, Charge pump Dr. 1 2.0
DMD05 - Delay, Charge pump Dr. 2 2.0
Drain temp
DME01 - Drain temp function active off
DME02 - Shutdown temp lvl (falling) 2
DME03 - Stand-by flush on lvl (falling) 5
DME04 - Stand-by flush hysteresis 3
DME05 - Start delay time cold oil 300
DME06 - Start delay time warm oil 10
DME07 - Start delay switching lvl 20
Compare calc. (1)
DMF01 - Register A for REG701 off
DMF02 - Register B for REG701 off
DMF03 - Register C for REG701 REG202 (*)
DMF04 - Constant K for REG701 10000
DMF05 - Operation for REG701 A+B+C*K/e4 (*)
DMF06 - Function for REG701 off
DMF07 - Register A for REG702 off
DMF08 - Register B for REG702 off
DMF09 - Register C for REG702 off
DMF10 - Constant K for REG702 10000
DMF11 - Operation for REG702 off
DMF12 - Function for REG702 off
DMF13 - Register A for REG703 off
DMF14 - Register B for REG703 off
DMF15 - Register C for REG703 off
DMF16 - Constant K for REG703 10000
DMF17 - Operation for REG703 off
DMF18 - Function for REG703 off
Compare calc. (2)
DMF19 - Register A for REG704 off
DMF20 - Register B for REG704 off
DMF21 - Register C for REG704 off
DMF22 - Constant K for REG704 10000
DMF23 - Operation for REG704 off
DMF24 - Function for REG704 off
DMF25 - Register A for REG705 off
DMF26 - Register B for REG705 off
DMF27 - Register C for REG705 off
14/23
Parameter list at delivery (V5.0.x)
Note. ( * ) = not default value
DMF28 - Constant K for REG705 10000
DMF29 - Operation for REG705 off
DMF30 - Function for REG705 off
DMF31 - Register A for REG706 off
DMF32 - Register B for REG706 off
DMF33 - Register C for REG706 off
DMF34 - Constant K for REG706 10000
DMF35 - Operation for REG706 off
DMF36 - Function for REG706 off
Compare display
DMG01 - Min display value REG701 0
DMG02 - Max display value REG701 350 (*)
DMG03 - Units for REG701 bar
DMG04 - Nr. of decimals for REG701 0
DMG05 - Min display value REG702 0
DMG06 - Max display value REG702 200
DMG07 - Units for REG702 bar
DMG08 - Nr. of decimals for REG702 0
DMG09 - Min display value REG703 0
DMG10 - Max display value REG703 200
DMG11 - Units for REG703 bar
DMG12 - Nr. of decimals for REG703 0
DMG13 - Min display value REG704 0
DMG14 - Max display value REG704 200
DMG15 - Units for REG704 bar
DMG16 - Nr. of decimals for REG704 0
DMG17 - Min display value REG705 0
DMG18 - Max display value REG705 200
DMG19 - Units for REG705 bar
DMG20 - Nr. of decimals for REG705 0
DMG21 - Min display value REG706 0
DMG22 - Max display value REG706 200
DMG23 - Units for REG706 bar
DMG24 - Nr. of decimals for REG706 0

[Link] mon.
Temp limit
HMA01 - Limitation level, H-motor 1 60
HMA02 - Limitation level, H-motor 2 60
HMA03 - Limitation level, H-motor 3 60
HMA04 - Limitation level, H-motor 4 60
Drive connection
HMB01 - Drive for Hydr. motor 1 Drive 1
HMB02 - Drive for Hydr. motor 2 off
HMB03 - Drive for Hydr. motor 3 off
HMB04 - Drive for Hydr. motor 4 off

Drive Logic
Digital block 1
DLA01 - Input A MEM 01 (*)
DLA02 - Input B off
DLA03 - Input C MEM 02 (*)
DLA04 - Input D off
DLA05 - Logic function 2 x AND (*)
DLA06 - Output selection 1 off
DLA07 - Inverted output sel. 1 06 DF1 75 (*)
DLA08 - Output selection 2 off
DLA09 - Inverted output sel. 2 06 RF75 P1 (*)
Digital block 2
DLB01 - Input A off
DLB02 - Input B off
DLB03 - Input C off
DLB04 - Input D off
DLB05 - Logic function AND
DLB06 - Output selection 1 off
DLB07 - Inverted output sel. 1 off
DLB08 - Output selection 2 off
DLB09 - Inverted output sel. 2 off
Digital block 3
DLC01 - Input A off
15/23
Parameter list at delivery (V5.0.x)
Note. ( * ) = not default value
DLC02 - Input B off
DLC03 - Input C off
DLC04 - Input D off
DLC05 - Logic function AND
DLC06 - Output selection 1 off
DLC07 - Inverted output sel. 1 off
DLC08 - Output selection 2 off
DLC09 - Inverted output sel. 2 off
Digital block 4
DLD01 - Input A off
DLD02 - Input B off
DLD03 - Input C off
DLD04 - Input D off
DLD05 - Logic function AND
DLD06 - Output selection 1 off
DLD07 - Inverted output sel. 1 off
DLD08 - Output selection 2 off
DLD09 - Inverted output sel. 2 off
Digital block 5
DLE01 - Input A off
DLE02 - Input B off
DLE03 - Input C off
DLE04 - Input D off
DLE05 - Logic function AND
DLE06 - Output selection 1 off
DLE07 - Inverted output sel. 1 off
DLE08 - Output selection 2 off
DLE09 - Inverted output sel. 2 off
Digital block 6
DLF01 - Input A off
DLF02 - Input B off
DLF03 - Input C off
DLF04 - Input D off
DLF05 - Logic function AND
DLF06 - Output selection 1 off
DLF07 - Inverted output sel. 1 off
DLF08 - Output selection 2 off
DLF09 - Inverted output sel. 2 off
Digital block 7
DLG01 - Input A off
DLG02 - Input B off
DLG03 - Input C off
DLG04 - Input D off
DLG05 - Logic function AND
DLG06 - Output selection 1 off
DLG07 - Inverted output sel. 1 off
DLG08 - Output selection 2 off
DLG09 - Inverted output sel. 2 off
Digital block 8
DLH01 - Input A off
DLH02 - Input B off
DLH03 - Input C off
DLH04 - Input D off
DLH05 - Logic function AND
DLH06 - Output selection 1 off
DLH07 - Inverted output sel. 1 off
DLH08 - Output selection 2 off
DLH09 - Inverted output sel. 2 off
Digital block 9
DLI01 - Input A off
DLI02 - Input B off
DLI03 - Input C off
DLI04 - Input D off
DLI05 - Logic function AND
DLI06 - Output selection 1 off
DLI07 - Inverted output sel. 1 off
DLI08 - Output selection 2 off
DLI09 - Inverted output sel. 2 off
Digital block 10
DLJ01 - Input A off
16/23
Parameter list at delivery (V5.0.x)
Note. ( * ) = not default value
DLJ02 - Input B off
DLJ03 - Input C off
DLJ04 - Input D off
DLJ05 - Logic function AND
DLJ06 - Output selection 1 off
DLJ07 - Inverted output sel. 1 off
DLJ08 - Output selection 2 off
DLJ09 - Inverted output sel. 2 off
Digital block 11
DLK01 - Input A off
DLK02 - Input B off
DLK03 - Input C off
DLK04 - Input D off
DLK05 - Logic function AND
DLK06 - Output selection 1 off
DLK07 - Inverted output sel. 1 off
DLK08 - Output selection 2 off
DLK09 - Inverted output sel. 2 off
Digital block 12
DLL01 - Input A off
DLL02 - Input B off
DLL03 - Input C off
DLL04 - Input D off
DLL05 - Logic function AND
DLL06 - Output selection 1 off
DLL07 - Inverted output sel. 1 off
DLL08 - Output selection 2 off
DLL09 - Inverted output sel. 2 off

Value Threshold
Analog block 1
VTA01 - Register for threshold off
VTA02 - High indication level 0.0
VTA03 - Low indication level 0.0
VTA04 - Func. for high indication off
VTA05 - Func. for low indication off
Analog block 2
VTB01 - Register for threshold off
VTB02 - High indication level 0.0
VTB03 - Low indication level 0.0
VTB04 - Func. for high indication off
VTB05 - Func. for low indication off
Analog block 3
VTC01 - Register for threshold off
VTC02 - High indication level 0.0
VTC03 - Low indication level 0.0
VTC04 - Func. for high indication off
VTC05 - Func. for low indication off
Analog block 4
VTD01 - Register for threshold off
VTD02 - High indication level 0.0
VTD03 - Low indication level 0.0
VTD04 - Func. for high indication off
VTD05 - Func. for low indication off
Analog block 5
VTE01 - Register for threshold off
VTE02 - High indication level 0.0
VTE03 - Low indication level 0.0
VTE04 - Func. for high indication off
VTE05 - Func. for low indication off
Analog block 6
VTF01 - Register for threshold off
VTF02 - High indication level 0.0
VTF03 - Low indication level 0.0
VTF04 - Func. for high indication off
VTF05 - Func. for low indication off
Analog block 7
VTG01 - Register for threshold off
VTG02 - High indication level 0.0
VTG03 - Low indication level 0.0
17/23
Parameter list at delivery (V5.0.x)
Note. ( * ) = not default value
VTG04 - Func. for high indication off
VTG05 - Func. for low indication off
Analog block 8
VTH01 - Register for threshold off
VTH02 - High indication level 0.0
VTH03 - Low indication level 0.0
VTH04 - Func. for high indication off
VTH05 - Func. for low indication off

Drive 1 basic
Setpoint
D1A01 - Speed setpoint Local/Remote (*)
D1A02 - Type of command signal Unidirectional (*)
D1A03 - Reset of local setpoint yes
D1A04 - Reverse input off
D1A05 - Reverse command setpoint -20.0
D1A06 - Digital setpoint (FIXED 1B) 10.0
D1A07 - Digital setpoint (FIXED 1A) -10.0
D1A08 - Drive front panel buttons on
D1A09 - Digital setpoint (FIXED 1D) 20.0
D1A10 - Digital setpoint (FIXED 1C) -20.0
D1A11 - Multipump setpoint limit on
Ramp
D1C01 - Up ramp time forward 2.0
D1C02 - Down ramp time forward 2.0
D1C03 - Up ramp time reverse 2.0
D1C04 - Down ramp time reverse 2.0
Regulator
D1D02 - Feed forward function on
D1D03 - Proportional regulator on (*)
D1D04 - Integrating regulator on (*)
D1D05 - Derivation regulator off
D1D06 - Proportional gain 0.5 (*)
D1D07 - Integration time 10.0
D1D08 - Derivation time 0.10
D1D09 - Derivation decline time 0.1
D1D10 - Max feedback deviation 50
D1D11 - Regulated or nonregulated Switching (*)
Feedback
D1E01 - Max motor shaft speed 10.0
D1E02 - Feedback selection Digital
D1E03 - Filter time for feedback 0.00
Power limitation
D1F01 - Delay time, power limitation 0.5
D1F02 - Ramp time, power limitation 20.0
D1F03 - Min power limit level 0
Brake
D1G01 - Brake function off
D1G02 - Brake close delay (off) 2.0
D1G03 - Brake open ind. delay (on) 2.0
D1G04 - Brake monitor delay (on) 5.0

Drive 2 basic
Setpoint
D2A01 - Speed setpoint Local/Remote (*)
D2A02 - Type of command signal Unidirectional (*)
D2A03 - Reset of local setpoint yes
D2A04 - Reverse input off
D2A05 - Reverse command setpoint -20.0
D2A06 - Digital setpoint (FIXED 2B) 10.0
D2A07 - Digital setpoint (FIXED 2A) -10.0
D2A08 - Drive front panel buttons on
D2A09 - Digital setpoint (FIXED 2D) 20.0
D2A10 - Digital setpoint (FIXED 2C) -20.0
D2A11 - Multipump setpoint limit on
Ramp
D2C01 - Up ramp time forward 2.0
D2C02 - Down ramp time forward 2.0
D2C03 - Up ramp time reverse 2.0
D2C04 - Down ramp time reverse 2.0
18/23
Parameter list at delivery (V5.0.x)
Note. ( * ) = not default value
Regulator
D2D02 - Feed forward function on
D2D03 - Proportional regulator on (*)
D2D04 - Integrating regulator on (*)
D2D05 - Derivation regulator off
D2D06 - Proportional gain 0.5 (*)
D2D07 - Integration time 10.0
D2D08 - Derivation time 0.10
D2D09 - Derivation decline time 0.1
D2D10 - Max feedback deviation 50
D2D11 - Regulated or nonregulated Switching (*)
Feedback
D2E01 - Max motor shaft speed 350.0 (*)
D2E02 - Feedback selection Analog (*)
D2E03 - Filter time for feedback 0.00
Power limitation
D2F01 - Delay time, power limitation 0.5
D2F02 - Ramp time, power limitation 20.0
D2F03 - Min power limit level 0
Brake
D2G01 - Brake function off
D2G02 - Brake close delay (off) 2.0
D2G03 - Brake open ind. delay (on) 2.0
D2G04 - Brake monitor delay (on) 5.0

Shredder 1
Function
SHA01 - Reverse control Pressure, separate
SHA02 - Reverse stop function Going to forward
SHA03 - Delay before reversal 3.0
SHA04 - Reversal time 10.0
SHA05 - Reverse delay SHA02 3.0
SHA06 - Forward time 10.0
SHA07 - Interval direction funct. off
SHA08 - Forward time interval 60
SHA09 - Reverse time interval 60
SHA10 - Selection of regulated dr. Unregulated
SHA11 - Stop trig signal to Drive 2 off
Setpoint
SHB01 - Reverse command setpoint Forward
SHB02 - Scale factor for reverse 100
SHB03 - Analog pressure sensor off
SHB04 - High pr. level, forward 200
SHB05 - High pr. level, reverse 200
SHB06 - Sh. interval command A 75.0
SHB07 - Sh. interval command B 50.0
SHB08 - Activation of interval com. off
Counter
SHC01 - Window time for counter 60
SHC02 - Reversal counter 5

Shredder 2
Function
SHG01 - Reverse control Pressure, separate
SHG02 - Reverse stop function Going to forward
SHG03 - Delay before reversal 3.0
SHG04 - Reversal time 10.0
SHG05 - Reverse delay SHG02 3.0
SHG06 - Forward time 10.0
SHG07 - Interval direction funct. off
SHG08 - Forward time interval 60
SHG09 - Reverse time interval 60
SHG10 - Selection of regulated dr. Unregulated
SHG11 - Stop trig signal to Drive 2 off
Setpoint
SHH01 - Reverse command setpoint Forward
SHH02 - Scale factor for reverse 100
SHH03 - Analog pressure sensor off
SHH04 - High pr. level, forward 200
SHH05 - High pr. level, reverse 200
19/23
Parameter list at delivery (V5.0.x)
Note. ( * ) = not default value
SHH06 - Sh. interval command A 75.0
SHH07 - Sh. interval command B 50.0
SHH08 - Activation of interval com. off
SHH09 - Common interval off
Counter
SHI01 - Window time for counter 60
SHI02 - Reversal counter 5

Synchro
Function
SYA01 - Type of synchronisation RATIO
SYA02 - Master command D1 Master - D2 Slave
Drive 1 reset
SYB01 - Counter reset command Reset by start
SYB02 - Enable of counter reset E-motors start
Drive 2 setpoint
SYC01 - Drive 2 low friction limit 70
SYC02 - Drive 2 high friction limit 130
SYC03 - Offset reset by motor start off
SYC04 - Offset for Drive 2 0.0
Drive 2 indication
SYD01 - Synchro indication limit 5
SYD02 - Sync time 1.0
Drive 2 reset
SYE01 - Counter reset command Reset by start
SYE02 - Enable of counter reset E-motors start
Master setpoint
SYF01 - Up ramp time forward 2.0
SYF02 - Down ramp time forward 2.0
SYF03 - Up ramp time reverse 2.0
SYF04 - Down ramp time reverse 2.0
SYF05 - Master max speed 10.0
Drive 1 setpoint
SYG01 - Drive 1 low friction limit 70
SYG02 - Drive 1 high friction limit 130
Drive pos. indication
SYH01 - Drive 1 position scaling 1.00
SYH02 - Drive 2 position scaling 1.00

Pressure 1
Function
PRA01 - Pressure control off
PRA02 - Reverse control action off
PRA03 - Low pressure control off
PRA04 - High pressure control off
PRA05 - Filter time, low pr. control 5.0
PRA06 - Filter time, high pr. control 5.0
Pr. setpoint
PRB01 - Pressure setpoint Local
PRB02 - Local pressure setpoint 200
PRB03 - Low limit, pressure setpoint 25
PRB04 - High limit, pressure setpoint 25
PRB05 - Low limit, PID output 10
PRB06 - High limit, PID output 10
PRB07 - Max pressure 250
PRB08 - PID output breakpoint 20
Regulator
PRC01 - Proportional regulator off
PRC02 - Integrating regulator off
PRC03 - Derivation regulator off
PRC04 - Proportional gain 0.1
PRC05 - Integration time 10.0
PRC06 - Derivation time 0.10
PRC07 - Derivation decline time 0.1
PRC08 - Filter time for pr. feedback 0.00

Pressure 2
Function
PRG01 - Pressure control off
PRG02 - Reverse control action off
20/23
Parameter list at delivery (V5.0.x)
Note. ( * ) = not default value
PRG03 - Low pressure control off
PRG04 - High pressure control off
PRG05 - Filter time, low pr. control 5.0
PRG06 - Filter time, high pr. control 5.0
Pr. setpoint
PRH01 - Pressure setpoint Local
PRH02 - Local pressure setpoint 200
PRH03 - Low limit, pressure setpoint 25
PRH04 - High limit, pressure setpoint 25
PRH05 - Low limit, PID output 10
PRH06 - High limit, PID output 10
PRH07 - Max pressure 250
PRH08 - PID output breakpoint 20
Regulator
PRI01 - Proportional regulator off
PRI02 - Integrating regulator off
PRI03 - Derivation regulator off
PRI04 - Proportional gain 0.1
PRI05 - Integration time 10.0
PRI06 - Derivation time 0.10
PRI07 - Derivation decline time 0.1
PRI08 - Filter time for pr. feedback 0.00

Reading 1
Scroll menu
R1A01 - Text for reading 1 TANKTEMP
R1A02 - Reading 1 REG408 (*)
R1A03 - Text for reading 2 OIL LVL (*)
R1A04 - Reading 2 REG409 (*)
R1A05 - Text for reading 3 PRES P1 (*)
R1A06 - Reading 3 REG406 (*)
R1A07 - Text for reading 4 CHAR PR1 (*)
R1A08 - Reading 4 REG407 (*)
R1A09 - Text for reading 5 [Link] (*)
R1A10 - Reading 5 REG403 (*)
R1A11 - Text for reading 6 [Link] (*)
R1A12 - Reading 6 REG404 (*)
R1A13 - Text for reading 7 READING7
R1A14 - Reading 7 off
R1A15 - Text for reading 8 READING8
R1A16 - Reading 8 off
R1A17 - Text for reading 9 CURR P1 (*)
R1A18 - Reading 9 REG311 (*)
Left upper
R1B01 - Reading REG102
Right upper
R1C01 - Reading REG106
Left lower
R1D01 - Reading REG109
Right lower
R1E01 - Reading REG311

Reading 2
Scroll menu
R2A01 - Text for reading 1 READING1
R2A02 - Reading 1 off
R2A03 - Text for reading 2 READING2
R2A04 - Reading 2 off
R2A05 - Text for reading 3 READING3
R2A06 - Reading 3 off
R2A07 - Text for reading 4 READING4
R2A08 - Reading 4 off
R2A09 - Text for reading 5 READING5
R2A10 - Reading 5 off
R2A11 - Text for reading 6 READING6
R2A12 - Reading 6 off
R2A13 - Text for reading 7 READING7
R2A14 - Reading 7 off
R2A15 - Text for reading 8 READING8
R2A16 - Reading 8 off
21/23
Parameter list at delivery (V5.0.x)
Note. ( * ) = not default value
R2A17 - Text for reading 9 READING9
R2A18 - Reading 9 off
Left upper
R2B01 - Reading REG202
Right upper
R2C01 - Reading REG701 (*)
Left lower
R2D01 - Reading REG206 (*)
Right lower
R2E01 - Reading REG405 (*)

Spare functions
Spare functions
SPR01 - Spare function 1 0
SPR02 - Spare function 2 0
SPR03 - Spare function 3 0
SPR04 - Spare function 4 0
SPR05 - Spare function 5 0
SPR06 - Spare function 6 0
SPR07 - Spare function 7 0
SPR08 - Spare function 8 0
SPR09 - Spare function 9 0
SPR10 - Spare function 10 0

Log function
Log 1
Date and time 200512 8:55
STA1 - Status for log register ON
MT1 - Interval time 1800000 sec
LHI1 - Setting of upper limit 56.0
LLO1 - Setting of lower limit 40.0
REG1 - Choice of register for logging REG408
Log 2
Date and time 200512 8:55
STA2 - Status for log register ON
MT2 - Interval time 1800000 sec
LHI2 - Setting of upper limit 8.0
LLO2 - Setting of lower limit 2.0
REG2 - Choice of register for logging REG109
Log 3
Date and time 200512 8:55
STA3 - Status for log register ON
MT3 - Interval time 1800000 sec
LHI3 - Setting of upper limit 220.0
LLO3 - Setting of lower limit 100.0
REG3 - Choice of register for logging REG406
Log 4
Date and time 200512 8:55
STA4 - Status for log register ON
MT4 - Interval time 1800000 sec
LHI4 - Setting of upper limit 20.0
LLO4 - Setting of lower limit 8.0
REG4 - Choice of register for logging REG407
Log 5
Date and time 200512 8:55
STA5 - Status for log register ON
MT5 - Interval time 1800000 sec
LHI5 - Setting of upper limit 300.0
LLO5 - Setting of lower limit 100.0
REG5 - Choice of register for logging REG405
Log 6
Date and time 200512 8:55
STA6 - Status for log register ON
MT6 - Interval time 1800000 sec
LHI6 - Setting of upper limit 20.0
LLO6 - Setting of lower limit 12.0
REG6 - Choice of register for logging REG404
Log 7
Date and time 200512 8:55
STA7 - Status for log register ON
22/23
Parameter list at delivery (V5.0.x)
Note. ( * ) = not default value
MT7 - Interval time 1800000 sec
LHIX7 - Setting of upper limit, X axis 20.0
LLOX7 - Setting of lower limit, X axis 4.0
REGX7 - Choice of register for X axis logging REG109
LHIY7 - Setting of upper limit, Y axis 220.0
LLOY7 - Setting of lower limit, Y axis 100.0
REGY7 - Choice of register for Y axis logging REG406
LHIZ7 - Setting of upper limit, Z axis 56.0
LLOZ7 - Setting of lower limit, Z axis 40.0
REGZ7 - Choice of register for Z axis logging REG408
Log 8
Date and time 200512 8:55
STA8 - Status for log register ON
MT8 - Interval time 1800000 sec
LHIX8 - Setting of upper limit, X axis 20.0
LLOX8 - Setting of lower limit, X axis 4.0
REGX8 - Choice of register for X axis logging REG209
LHIY8 - Setting of upper limit, Y axis 250.0
LLOY8 - Setting of lower limit, Y axis 130.0
REGY8 - Choice of register for Y axis logging REG404
LHIZ8 - Setting of upper limit, Z axis 56.0
LLOZ8 - Setting of lower limit, Z axis 40.0
REGZ8 - Choice of register for Z axis logging REG410

(*) Not default value

23/23

También podría gustarte

Instalación y Mantenimiento de Motores
100% (1)
Instalación y Mantenimiento de Motores
40 páginas
Inching Drives para Molinos de Bolas
Aún no hay calificaciones
Inching Drives para Molinos de Bolas
2 páginas
Catalogo Productos Oleohidraulica 2020-01-96
Aún no hay calificaciones
Catalogo Productos Oleohidraulica 2020-01-96
93 páginas
Tipos de Bombas Hidráulicas
Aún no hay calificaciones
Tipos de Bombas Hidráulicas
4 páginas
Declaración de Conformidad y Garantía Bomba
100% (1)
Declaración de Conformidad y Garantía Bomba
33 páginas
Informe de Reparación Ventilador 181/60
Aún no hay calificaciones
Informe de Reparación Ventilador 181/60
7 páginas
Mantenimiento de Sistemas Hidráulicos
Aún no hay calificaciones
Mantenimiento de Sistemas Hidráulicos
10 páginas
Spare Parts Filtro Larox Ceramec 121
100% (1)
Spare Parts Filtro Larox Ceramec 121
64 páginas
Manual de Instalación Marathon SP683-2H
Aún no hay calificaciones
Manual de Instalación Marathon SP683-2H
34 páginas
Manual de Operación RK 6155
Aún no hay calificaciones
Manual de Operación RK 6155
297 páginas
Componentes del Tanque Hidráulico
Aún no hay calificaciones
Componentes del Tanque Hidráulico
10 páginas
Manual de Instalación BSFI 3000-S/R-200
Aún no hay calificaciones
Manual de Instalación BSFI 3000-S/R-200
75 páginas
Manual de Bombas GEPUMPS Serie 2000
Aún no hay calificaciones
Manual de Bombas GEPUMPS Serie 2000
4 páginas
Bombas de Grasa y Funcionamiento
Aún no hay calificaciones
Bombas de Grasa y Funcionamiento
36 páginas
Instalación Motobombas Lotus 100-200
Aún no hay calificaciones
Instalación Motobombas Lotus 100-200
32 páginas
Tipos y Mantenimiento de Rodamientos
100% (2)
Tipos y Mantenimiento de Rodamientos
27 páginas
Bombas de Eje Inclinado: Guía Completa
Aún no hay calificaciones
Bombas de Eje Inclinado: Guía Completa
21 páginas
Mantenimiento Preventivo Sonda Boart Longyear
Aún no hay calificaciones
Mantenimiento Preventivo Sonda Boart Longyear
5 páginas
Competencias en Sistemas Hidráulicos y Neumáticos
Aún no hay calificaciones
Competencias en Sistemas Hidráulicos y Neumáticos
10 páginas
Mantenimiento Bomba Warman 8x6
Aún no hay calificaciones
Mantenimiento Bomba Warman 8x6
2 páginas
Diplomado en Bombas y Sistemas de Bombeo
Aún no hay calificaciones
Diplomado en Bombas y Sistemas de Bombeo
3 páginas
Mecanizado de Cilindros ISO 6020/1
Aún no hay calificaciones
Mecanizado de Cilindros ISO 6020/1
44 páginas
Guía Completa sobre Retenes y Sellos
Aún no hay calificaciones
Guía Completa sobre Retenes y Sellos
217 páginas
Mantención Wet-End Bombas Warman 450 GL
Aún no hay calificaciones
Mantención Wet-End Bombas Warman 450 GL
21 páginas
Motores Hidráulicos: Definición y Usos
Aún no hay calificaciones
Motores Hidráulicos: Definición y Usos
17 páginas
Especificaciones Bomba Siam J-165
Aún no hay calificaciones
Especificaciones Bomba Siam J-165
3 páginas
Fundamentos de Hidráulica Industrial
Aún no hay calificaciones
Fundamentos de Hidráulica Industrial
89 páginas
Mantenimiento de Actuadores Hidráulicos
Aún no hay calificaciones
Mantenimiento de Actuadores Hidráulicos
13 páginas
Carga de Nitrógeno en Acumuladores de Frenos
Aún no hay calificaciones
Carga de Nitrógeno en Acumuladores de Frenos
17 páginas
Cambio de Mangueras Hitachi 3600-6
Aún no hay calificaciones
Cambio de Mangueras Hitachi 3600-6
7 páginas
Guía de Sistemas Hidráulicos HANSA-TMP
Aún no hay calificaciones
Guía de Sistemas Hidráulicos HANSA-TMP
36 páginas
Divisores de Flujo Hidráulico y Aplicaciones
Aún no hay calificaciones
Divisores de Flujo Hidráulico y Aplicaciones
16 páginas
Partes del Espesador de Relaves
Aún no hay calificaciones
Partes del Espesador de Relaves
8 páginas
Componentes de Bombas Centrífugas
100% (1)
Componentes de Bombas Centrífugas
17 páginas
Manual de Prensa Hidráulica PDF
Aún no hay calificaciones
Manual de Prensa Hidráulica PDF
12 páginas
Herramientas de Confiabilidad: FMEA
100% (1)
Herramientas de Confiabilidad: FMEA
28 páginas
Tipos de Filtros Hidráulicos en MS-375-3
Aún no hay calificaciones
Tipos de Filtros Hidráulicos en MS-375-3
61 páginas
Bomba Slurry
Aún no hay calificaciones
Bomba Slurry
18 páginas
Diagnóstico de fallas en bombas hidráulicas
Aún no hay calificaciones
Diagnóstico de fallas en bombas hidráulicas
5 páginas
150 7228 SP
Aún no hay calificaciones
150 7228 SP
121 páginas
Tipos y usos de motores hidráulicos
Aún no hay calificaciones
Tipos y usos de motores hidráulicos
2 páginas
Chancadores de Rodillos HPGR: Mantenimiento
Aún no hay calificaciones
Chancadores de Rodillos HPGR: Mantenimiento
182 páginas
Tipos de Desalineación de Ejes
100% (1)
Tipos de Desalineación de Ejes
33 páginas
BR Cat 300M STD Spa R00 2
100% (1)
BR Cat 300M STD Spa R00 2
560 páginas
Rodamiento esférico 22217 EK/C3 SKF
Aún no hay calificaciones
Rodamiento esférico 22217 EK/C3 SKF
15 páginas
Ficha MMP
100% (1)
Ficha MMP
2 páginas
Datos Técnicos de Equipos Industriales
Aún no hay calificaciones
Datos Técnicos de Equipos Industriales
41 páginas
Motor Indar ACP-560-X/6 2900 kW
100% (1)
Motor Indar ACP-560-X/6 2900 kW
26 páginas
Capacitación en Bomba Geho TZPM 1200
Aún no hay calificaciones
Capacitación en Bomba Geho TZPM 1200
49 páginas
Cambio de Transmisión Crowd BSE-PA-072
Aún no hay calificaciones
Cambio de Transmisión Crowd BSE-PA-072
12 páginas
Funcionamiento del Motor Hidráulico Hägglunds
100% (2)
Funcionamiento del Motor Hidráulico Hägglunds
13 páginas
Mantenimiento de Transmisiones con Fajas en V
Aún no hay calificaciones
Mantenimiento de Transmisiones con Fajas en V
24 páginas
Motor Monofásico: Funcionamiento y Partes
100% (1)
Motor Monofásico: Funcionamiento y Partes
6 páginas
Dossier Bomba Gorman Rupp T3A71S
100% (2)
Dossier Bomba Gorman Rupp T3A71S
67 páginas
Sistema Hidráulico Hägglunds y Motor Bidireccional
100% (1)
Sistema Hidráulico Hägglunds y Motor Bidireccional
6 páginas
Bomba Variable de Paletas
Aún no hay calificaciones
Bomba Variable de Paletas
32 páginas
Manual de Banco de Pruebas Hidráulico
Aún no hay calificaciones
Manual de Banco de Pruebas Hidráulico
20 páginas
Manual CHA-6: Instalación y Mantenimiento
Aún no hay calificaciones
Manual CHA-6: Instalación y Mantenimiento
21 páginas
Manual de Operación Filtro Prensa Metso
0% (1)
Manual de Operación Filtro Prensa Metso
24 páginas
Clasificación y características de resistencias
Aún no hay calificaciones
Clasificación y características de resistencias
43 páginas
Prácticas de Transistores BJT en Laboratorio
Aún no hay calificaciones
Prácticas de Transistores BJT en Laboratorio
4 páginas
Dispositivos de Protección Eléctrica
Aún no hay calificaciones
Dispositivos de Protección Eléctrica
10 páginas
Alternativas al LM741 en Circuitos Modernos
Aún no hay calificaciones
Alternativas al LM741 en Circuitos Modernos
3 páginas
Especialización en Electrónica Automotriz
Aún no hay calificaciones
Especialización en Electrónica Automotriz
31 páginas
Filtro Hamming Digital FIR Paso Bajo
Aún no hay calificaciones
Filtro Hamming Digital FIR Paso Bajo
16 páginas
Delixi Catálogo SP
Aún no hay calificaciones
Delixi Catálogo SP
10 páginas
Renovación de Bobinadora Semiautomática
50% (4)
Renovación de Bobinadora Semiautomática
25 páginas
Conductividad Eléctrica de Materiales
Aún no hay calificaciones
Conductividad Eléctrica de Materiales
8 páginas
Máquina Troqueladora Semi-Automática
Aún no hay calificaciones
Máquina Troqueladora Semi-Automática
30 páginas
Pruebas de Equipos de Protección Eléctrica
Aún no hay calificaciones
Pruebas de Equipos de Protección Eléctrica
30 páginas
Especificaciones del Modelo KV-N40DTP
Aún no hay calificaciones
Especificaciones del Modelo KV-N40DTP
3 páginas
Evolución y Tecnología de Cargadores Móviles
Aún no hay calificaciones
Evolución y Tecnología de Cargadores Móviles
5 páginas
Simbolos Diodos PDF
100% (1)
Simbolos Diodos PDF
3 páginas
Ficha Técnica UPS APC SRT 10KVA
Aún no hay calificaciones
Ficha Técnica UPS APC SRT 10KVA
4 páginas
Ejercicios de Instalaciones Eléctricas
Aún no hay calificaciones
Ejercicios de Instalaciones Eléctricas
6 páginas
Protocolo de Pruebas para Tableros Eléctricos
100% (2)
Protocolo de Pruebas para Tableros Eléctricos
1 página
Introducción a la Electrónica Digital
Aún no hay calificaciones
Introducción a la Electrónica Digital
1 página
Examen de Fundamentos de Electrónica 2025
Aún no hay calificaciones
Examen de Fundamentos de Electrónica 2025
10 páginas
Amplificadores Operacionales: Práctica 3
Aún no hay calificaciones
Amplificadores Operacionales: Práctica 3
5 páginas
Multímetro: Instrumento de Medición Eléctrica
Aún no hay calificaciones
Multímetro: Instrumento de Medición Eléctrica
4 páginas
Carrera Profesional en Grabación de Audio
Aún no hay calificaciones
Carrera Profesional en Grabación de Audio
1 página
Sistemas de Puesta a Tierra: Seguridad Eléctrica
Aún no hay calificaciones
Sistemas de Puesta a Tierra: Seguridad Eléctrica
12 páginas
Fundamentos de Electrónica Digital
Aún no hay calificaciones
Fundamentos de Electrónica Digital
18 páginas
Motor de Inducción: Rotor Devanado
Aún no hay calificaciones
Motor de Inducción: Rotor Devanado
5 páginas
Presupuesto Instalaciones Eléctricas
Aún no hay calificaciones
Presupuesto Instalaciones Eléctricas
18 páginas
Inversor/Cargador MultiPlus 2000 VA
Aún no hay calificaciones
Inversor/Cargador MultiPlus 2000 VA
2 páginas
Decodificadores BCD a 7 segmentos
Aún no hay calificaciones
Decodificadores BCD a 7 segmentos
7 páginas
Normas de Distribución Eléctrica RD
Aún no hay calificaciones
Normas de Distribución Eléctrica RD
8 páginas
Preguntas sobre Instalaciones Satelitales
Aún no hay calificaciones
Preguntas sobre Instalaciones Satelitales
5 páginas